This is a modern-English version of The Science of Fingerprints: Classification and Uses, originally written by United States. Federal Bureau of Investigation. It has been thoroughly updated, including changes to sentence structure, words, spelling, and grammar—to ensure clarity for contemporary readers, while preserving the original spirit and nuance. If you click on a paragraph, you will see the original text that we modified, and you can toggle between the two versions.

Scroll to the bottom of this page and you will find a free ePUB download link for this book.


THE

SCIENCE

OF

FINGERPRINTS

 

Classification and Uses

 

FBI logo

FBI logo

 

UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF JUSTICE

FEDERAL BUREAU OF INVESTIGATION

John Edgar Hoover, Director


INTRODUCTION

This booklet concerning the study of fingerprints has been prepared by the Federal Bureau of Investigation for the use of interested law enforcement officers and agencies, particularly those which may be contemplating the inauguration of fingerprint identification files. It is based on many years' experience in fingerprint identification work out of which has developed the largest collection of classified fingerprints in the world. Inasmuch as this publication may serve as a general reference on classification and other phases of fingerprint identification work, the systems utilized in the Identification Division of the Federal Bureau of Investigation are set forth fully. The problem of pattern interpretation, in particular, is discussed in detail.

This booklet about fingerprint study has been created by the Federal Bureau of Investigation for the benefit of law enforcement officers and agencies interested in starting fingerprint identification files. It draws on many years of experience in fingerprint identification, which has led to the development of the largest collection of classified fingerprints in the world. Since this publication can act as a general reference on classification and other aspects of fingerprint identification, the systems used in the Identification Division of the Federal Bureau of Investigation are thoroughly explained. The issue of pattern interpretation, in particular, is discussed in depth.

Criminal identification by means of fingerprints is one of the most potent factors in obtaining the apprehension of fugitives who might otherwise escape arrest and continue their criminal activities indefinitely. This type of identification also makes possible an accurate determination of the number of previous arrests and convictions which, of course, results in the imposition of more equitable sentences by the judiciary, inasmuch as the individual who repeatedly violates the law finds it impossible to pose successfully as a first, or minor, offender. In addition, this system of identification enables the prosecutor to present his case in the light of the offender's previous record. It also provides the probation officers, parole board, and the Governor with definite information upon which to base their judgment in dealing with criminals in their jurisdictions.

Criminal identification using fingerprints is one of the most powerful tools for catching fugitives who might otherwise avoid arrest and continue their criminal activities indefinitely. This method of identification also allows for an accurate count of prior arrests and convictions, leading to fairer sentences by the courts, since individuals who repeatedly break the law cannot successfully claim to be first-time or minor offenders. Additionally, this identification system helps prosecutors present their cases in light of the offender's past record. It also gives probation officers, parole boards, and the Governor clear information to guide their decisions when dealing with criminals in their areas.

From earliest times fingerprinting, because of its peculiar adaptability to the field, has been associated in the lay mind with criminal identification to the detriment of the other useful phases of the science. However, the Civil File of the Identification Division of the Federal Bureau of Investigation contains three times as many fingerprints as the Criminal File. These civil fingerprints are an invaluable aid in identifying amnesia victims, missing persons and unknown deceased. In the latter category the victims of major disasters may be quickly and positively identified if their fingerprints are on file, thus providing a humanitarian benefit not usually associated with fingerprint records.

From the earliest times, fingerprinting has been closely linked to criminal identification in the public's mind, overshadowing its other valuable uses. However, the Civil File of the Identification Division of the Federal Bureau of Investigation holds three times more fingerprints than the Criminal File. These civil fingerprints are incredibly helpful in identifying victims of amnesia, missing persons, and unknown deceased individuals. In the case of major disasters, victims can be quickly and accurately identified if their fingerprints are on file, providing a humanitarian benefit that is not typically associated with fingerprint records.

The regular contributors who voluntarily submit fingerprints to the Federal Bureau of Investigation play a most important role in the [Pg iv]drama of identification. Their action expands the size of the fingerprint files, thereby increasing the value of the files to all law enforcement agencies. Mutual cooperation and efficiency are resultant by-products.

The regular contributors who willingly submit fingerprints to the Federal Bureau of Investigation play a crucial role in the [Pg iv] drama of identification. Their actions enlarge the fingerprint files, therefore boosting the files' value for all law enforcement agencies. Mutual cooperation and efficiency are positive outcomes of this process.

The use of fingerprints for identification purposes is based upon distinctive ridge outlines which appear on the bulbs on the inside of the end joints of the fingers and thumbs. These ridges have definite contours and appear in several general pattern types, each with general and specific variations of the pattern, dependent on the shape and relationship of the ridges. The outlines of the ridges appear most clearly when inked impressions are taken upon paper, so that the ridges are black against a white background. This result is achieved by the ink adhering to the friction ridges. Impressions may be made with blood, dirt, grease or any other foreign matter present on the ridges, or the saline substance emitted by the glands through the ducts or pores which constitute their outlets. The background or medium may be paper, glass, porcelain, wood, cloth, wax, putty, silverware, or any smooth, nonporous material.

The use of fingerprints for identification is based on the unique ridge patterns found on the pads of the fingers and thumbs. These ridges have specific shapes and show several general types of patterns, each with variations depending on the arrangement of the ridges. The ridge outlines are most visible when inked impressions are made on paper, making the ridges appear black against a white backdrop. This happens because the ink sticks to the raised ridges. Impressions can also be made with blood, dirt, grease, or any other substances found on the ridges, as well as the salty substance released by glands through ducts or pores. The medium for these impressions can be paper, glass, porcelain, wood, cloth, wax, putty, silverware, or any smooth, non-porous material.

Of all the methods of identification, fingerprinting alone has proved to be both infallible and feasible. Its superiority over the older methods, such as branding, tattooing, distinctive clothing, photography, and body measurements (Bertillon system), has been demonstrated time after time. While many cases of mistaken identification have occurred through the use of these older systems, to date the fingerprints of no two individuals have been found to be identical.

Of all the identification methods, fingerprinting is the only one that has been proven to be both reliable and practical. It has consistently shown to be better than older methods like branding, tattooing, distinctive clothing, photography, and body measurements (Bertillon system). Many cases of mistaken identity have happened with these older systems, but so far, no two people's fingerprints have ever been found to be the same.

The background and history of the science of fingerprints constitute an eloquent drama of human lives, of good and of evil. Nothing, I think, has played a part more exciting than that enacted by the fascinating loops, whorls, and arches etched on the fingers of a human being.

The background and history of fingerprint science tell a powerful story of human lives, both good and bad. I believe nothing has been more thrilling than the drama created by the intriguing loops, whorls, and arches found on a person's fingers.

J. Edgar Hoover signature

J. Edgar Hoover signature

J. EDGAR HOOVER,
Director.

J. EDGAR HOOVER,
Director.


CONTENTS

ChapterPage
Introduction iii
I. The Identification Division of the FBI 1
II. Types of Patterns and Their Interpretation 5
III. Questionable Patterns 71
IV. The Classification Formula and Extensions 87
V. Classification of Scarred Patterns—Amputation—Missing at Birth 98
VI. Filing Sequence 103
VII. Searching and Referencing 109
VIII. How To Take Inked Fingerprints 114
IX. Problems in the Taking of Inked Fingerprints 118
X. Problems and Practices in Fingerprinting the Dead 131
XI. Establishment of a Local Fingerprint Identification Bureau 160
XII. Latent Impressions 173
XIII. Powdering and Lifting Latent Impressions 175
XIV. Chemical Development of Latent Impressions 177
XV. The Use of the Fingerprint Camera 184
XVI. Preparation of Fingerprint Charts for Court Testimony 190
XVII. Unidentified Latent Fingerprint File 194

CHAPTER I

The Identification Division of the FBI

 

The FBI Identification Division was established in 1924 when the records of the National Bureau of Criminal Investigation and the Leavenworth Penitentiary Bureau were consolidated in Washington, D.C. The original collection of only 810,000 fingerprint cards has expanded into many millions. The establishment of the FBI Identification Division resulted from the fact that police officials of the Nation saw the need for a centralized pooling of all fingerprint cards and all arrest records.

The FBI Identification Division was founded in 1924 when the records from the National Bureau of Criminal Investigation and the Leavenworth Penitentiary Bureau were combined in Washington, D.C. Originally, there were just 810,000 fingerprint cards, but that number has grown to many millions. The creation of the FBI Identification Division came about because law enforcement officials across the country recognized the need for a centralized database of all fingerprint cards and arrest records.

The Federal Bureau of Investigation offers identification service free of charge for official use to all law enforcement agencies in this country and to foreign law enforcement agencies which cooperate in the International Exchange of Identification Data. Through this centralization of records it is now possible for an officer to have available a positive source of information relative to the past activities of an individual in his custody. It is the Bureau's present policy to give preferred attention to all arrest fingerprint cards since it is realized that speed is essential in this service.

The FBI provides free identification services for official use to all law enforcement agencies in the U.S. and to foreign agencies that work with them in the International Exchange of Identification Data. This centralization of records allows officers to access reliable information about an individual's past activities while in their custody. The Bureau's current policy is to prioritize all arrest fingerprint cards because they understand that speed is crucial in this service.

In order that the FBI Identification Division can provide maximum service to all law enforcement agencies, it is essential that standard fingerprint cards and other forms furnished by the FBI be utilized. Fingerprints must be clear and distinct and complete name and descriptive data required on the form should be furnished in all instances. Fingerprints should be submitted promptly since delay might result in release of a fugitive prior to notification to the law enforcement agency seeking his apprehension.

To ensure that the FBI Identification Division can offer the best service to all law enforcement agencies, it's crucial to use the standard fingerprint cards and other forms provided by the FBI. Fingerprints must be clear and distinct, and the complete name and other required information on the form should be provided every time. Fingerprints should be submitted quickly, as delays could lead to the release of a fugitive before the law enforcement agency looking to capture them is notified.

When it is known to a law enforcement agency that a subject under arrest is an employee of the U.S. Government or a member of the Armed Forces, a notation should be placed in the space for "occupation" on the front of the fingerprint card. Data such as location of agency or military post of assignment may be added beside the space reserved for the photograph on the reverse side of the card.

When a law enforcement agency knows that a person being arrested is a U.S. Government employee or a member of the Armed Forces, they should note this in the "occupation" section on the front of the fingerprint card. Additional information like the location of the agency or military assignment can be added next to the space reserved for the photograph on the back of the card.

Many instances have been observed where an individual is fingerprinted by more than one law enforcement agency for the same arrest. This duplicate submission of fingerprints can be eliminated by placing a notation on the first set of fingerprints sent to the FBI requesting copies of the record for other interested law enforcement agencies, thereby eliminating submission of fingerprints by the latter agencies.

Many cases have been seen where a person is fingerprinted by more than one law enforcement agency for the same arrest. This duplicate submission of fingerprints can be avoided by adding a note on the first set of fingerprints sent to the FBI asking for copies of the record for other interested law enforcement agencies, which would prevent the latter agencies from submitting fingerprints.

If a photograph is available at the time fingerprints are submitted to the FBI Identification Division, it should be identified on the reverse side with the individual's complete name, name of the department submitting, the department's number, and it should be securely pasted in the space provided[Pg 2] on the fingerprint card. If a photograph is to be submitted at a later date, it should be held until the identification record or "no record" reply from the FBI is received in order that FBI number or fingerprint classification can be added to the reverse side of the photograph for assistance of the Identification Division in relating it to the proper record.

If a photograph is available when fingerprints are sent to the FBI Identification Division, it should be labeled on the back with the person's full name, the name of the submitting department, the department's number, and it should be securely attached in the designated space[Pg 2] on the fingerprint card. If a photograph is going to be submitted later, it should be kept until the identification record or "no record" response from the FBI is received, so that the FBI number or fingerprint classification can be added to the back of the photograph to help the Identification Division connect it to the correct record.

The FBI number, if known, and any request for special handling, such as collect wire or telephone reply, should be indicated on the fingerprint card in the appropriate space. Such notations eliminate the need for an accompanying letter of instructions.

The FBI number, if known, and any request for special handling, like collect wire or phone reply, should be noted on the fingerprint card in the designated space. These notes remove the need for an accompanying letter of instructions.

As indicated, the FBI's service is given without cost to regularly constituted law enforcement agencies and officers. Supplies of fingerprint cards and self-addressed, franked envelopes will be forwarded upon the request of any law enforcement officer. The following types of cards and forms are available: Criminal (Form FD-249), used for both arrest and institution records; Applicant (Form FD-258); Personal Identification (Form FD-353); Death Sheet (Form R-88); Disposition Sheet (Form R-84); Wanted Notice (Form 1-12); Record of Additional Arrest (Form 1-1). An order form for identification supplies appears each month with the insert to the FBI Law Enforcement Bulletin.

As mentioned, the FBI provides its services at no cost to established law enforcement agencies and officers. Fingerprint cards and pre-addressed, stamped envelopes will be sent upon request from any law enforcement officer. The following types of cards and forms are available: Criminal (Form FD-249), used for both arrest and institutional records; Applicant (Form FD-258); Personal Identification (Form FD-353); Death Sheet (Form R-88); Disposition Sheet (Form R-84); Wanted Notice (Form 1-12); Record of Additional Arrest (Form 1-1). An order form for identification supplies is included each month with the insert in the FBI Law Enforcement Bulletin.

In addition to its criminal identification activities, the Bureau's Identification Division maintains several auxiliary services. Not the least of these is the system whereby fugitives are identified through the comparison of fingerprints which are received currently. When a law enforcement officer desires the apprehension of a fugitive and the fingerprints of that individual are available, it is necessary only that he inform the Bureau of this fact so a wanted notice may be placed in the fugitive's record. This insures immediate notification when the fugitive's fingerprints are next received.

In addition to its criminal identification activities, the Bureau's Identification Division offers several support services. One of the most important is the system that identifies fugitives by comparing their fingerprints, which are submitted on an ongoing basis. When a law enforcement officer wants to apprehend a fugitive and has the individual's fingerprints, they simply need to notify the Bureau so a wanted notice can be added to the fugitive's record. This ensures that they receive immediate notification when the fugitive's fingerprints are submitted next.

The fugitive service is amplified by the Bureau's action in transmitting a monthly bulletin to all law enforcement agencies which forward fingerprints for its files. In this bulletin are listed the names, descriptions, and fingerprint classifications of persons wanted for offenses of a more serious character. This information facilitates prompt identifications of individuals arrested for any offense or otherwise located by those receiving the bulletin.

The fugitive service is enhanced by the Bureau's action in sending out a monthly bulletin to all law enforcement agencies that submit fingerprints for its files. This bulletin includes the names, descriptions, and fingerprint classifications of individuals wanted for more serious offenses. This information helps with quick identifications of people arrested for any crime or otherwise found by those receiving the bulletin.

Missing-persons notices are posted in the Identification files so that any incoming record on the missing person will be noted. Notices are posted both by fingerprint card and by name, or by name alone if fingerprints are not available. The full name, date, and place of birth, complete description and photograph of a missing person should be forwarded, along with fingerprints, if available. Upon receipt of pertinent information, the contributing agency is advised immediately. A section on missing persons is carried as an insert in the Law Enforcement Bulletin.

Missing persons notices are added to the Identification files to ensure that any new records about the missing person are recognized. Notices are posted both by fingerprint card and by name, or by name only if fingerprints aren’t available. The full name, date and place of birth, a complete description, and a photograph of the missing person should be submitted, along with fingerprints if available. Once relevant information is received, the agency that provided it is notified right away. There is a section on missing persons included as an insert in the Law Enforcement Bulletin.

The FBI Identification Division has arranged with the identification bureaus of many foreign countries to exchange criminal identifying data in[Pg 3] cases of mutual interest. Fingerprints and arrest records of persons arrested in this country are routed to the appropriate foreign bureaus in cases when the interested agency in the United States has reason to believe an individual in custody may have a record in or be wanted by the other nation. Similarly, fingerprints are referred to the Federal Bureau of Investigation by foreign bureaus when it seems a record may be disclosed by a search of the Bureau's records. Numerous identifications, including a number of fugitives, have been effected in this manner, and it is believed that the complete development of this project will provide more effective law enforcement throughout the world. When the facts indicate an individual may have a record in another country, and the contributor submits an extra set of his fingerprints, they are transmitted by this Bureau to the proper authorities.

The FBI Identification Division has set up an arrangement with identification bureaus in many foreign countries to share criminal identification data in[Pg 3] cases of mutual interest. Fingerprints and arrest records of individuals arrested in the U.S. are sent to the relevant foreign bureaus when the interested agency in the United States believes that a person in custody might have a record in or be wanted by the other country. Likewise, fingerprints are sent to the Federal Bureau of Investigation by foreign bureaus when there’s a possibility that a record could be found in the Bureau's files. Many identifications, including several fugitives, have been made this way, and it is thought that fully developing this project will enhance law enforcement worldwide. When it appears that someone might have a record in another country, and the contributor provides an extra set of their fingerprints, these are forwarded by this Bureau to the appropriate authorities.

In very rare cases persons without hands are arrested. A file on footprints is maintained in the Identification Division on such individuals.

In very rare cases, people without hands are arrested. There's a file of footprints kept in the Identification Division on these individuals.

In view of the fact that many individuals in the underworld are known only by their nicknames, the Identification Division has for years maintained a card-index file containing in alphabetical order the nicknames appearing on fingerprint cards. When requesting a search of the nickname file, it is desired that all possible descriptive data be furnished.

In light of the fact that many people in the criminal world are known only by their nicknames, the Identification Division has maintained a card-index file for years that lists these nicknames in alphabetical order alongside fingerprint cards. When asking for a search of the nickname file, it's important to provide as much descriptive information as possible.

The Latent Fingerprint Section handles latent print work. Articles of evidence submitted by law enforcement agencies are processed for the development of latent impressions in the Latent Fingerprint Section. In addition, photographs, negatives, and lifts of latents are scrutinized for prints of value for identification purposes. Photographs of the prints of value are always prepared for the FBI's files and are available for comparisons for an indefinite period. Should the law enforcement agency desire additional comparisons it needs only advise the FBI Identification Division, attention Latent Fingerprint Section, and either name or submit the prints of the new suspect. It is not necessary to resubmit the evidence. When necessary, a fingerprint expert will testify in local court as to his findings. Should a department have any special problems involving the development or preservation of fingerprints at a crime scene, the experts are available for suggestions. In connection with the Latent Fingerprint Section there is maintained a general appearance file of many confidence game operators. Searches in this file will be made upon request. In furnishing data on a suspect, the agency should make sure that complete descriptive data is sent in. Photographs and other material on individuals who may be identical with those being sought will be furnished to the interested departments.

The Latent Fingerprint Section deals with latent print work. Evidence submitted by law enforcement agencies is processed to develop latent impressions in the Latent Fingerprint Section. Additionally, photographs, negatives, and lifts of latent prints are examined for usable identification purposes. Photos of valuable prints are always prepared for the FBI's files and are available for comparisons for an indefinite time. If the law enforcement agency wants more comparisons, it just needs to notify the FBI Identification Division, attention Latent Fingerprint Section, and either name or submit the prints of the new suspect. There's no need to resubmit the evidence. If necessary, a fingerprint expert will testify in local court about their findings. If a department has special issues with developing or preserving fingerprints at a crime scene, experts are available for advice. There is also a general appearance file for many con artists maintained by the Latent Fingerprint Section. Searches in this file can be made upon request. When providing information about a suspect, the agency should ensure that complete descriptive data is included. Photographs and other materials on individuals who might match those being sought will be provided to the interested departments.

During the years many persons have voluntarily submitted their fingerprints to the Identification Division for possible use in the case of an emergency. These cards are not filed with the criminal fingerprints but are maintained separately. Such prints should be taken on the standard[Pg 4] fingerprint form entitled "Personal Identification" (Form FD-353). No answer is given to Personal Identification fingerprint cards.

During the years, many people have willingly submitted their fingerprints to the Identification Division for potential use in emergencies. These cards are not stored with criminal fingerprints but are kept separately. Prints should be taken on the standard[Pg 4] fingerprint form called "Personal Identification" (Form FD-353). No response is provided for Personal Identification fingerprint cards.

The fingerprint records of the FBI Identification Division are used liberally not only by police agencies to obtain previous fingerprint histories and to ascertain whether persons arrested are wanted elsewhere, but by prosecutors to whom the information from the Bureau's files may prove to be valuable in connection with the prosecution of a case. These records are likewise of frequent value to the judge for his consideration in connection with the imposition of sentence. Obviously, the ends of justice may be served most equitably when the past fingerprint record of the person on trial can be made known to the court, or information may be furnished to the effect that the defendant is of hitherto unblemished reputation.

The FBI Identification Division's fingerprint records are widely used not just by police agencies to access previous fingerprint histories and determine if arrested individuals are wanted elsewhere, but also by prosecutors who find the information valuable for their cases. These records are often important for judges as well when considering sentencing. Clearly, justice can be served most fairly when the court has access to the past fingerprint record of the person on trial or is informed that the defendant has a previously spotless reputation.

It should be emphasized that FBI identification records are for the OFFICIAL use of law enforcement and governmental agencies and misuse of such records by disseminating them to unauthorized persons may result in cancellation of FBI identification services.

It’s important to highlight that FBI identification records are for the OFFICIAL use of law enforcement and government agencies, and misusing these records by sharing them with unauthorized individuals may lead to the cancellation of FBI identification services.


CHAPTER II

Types of Patterns and Their Interpretation

 

Types of patterns

Fingerprints may be resolved into three large general groups of patterns, each group bearing the same general characteristics or family resemblance. The patterns may be further divided into sub-groups by means of the smaller differences existing between the patterns in the same general group. These divisions are as follows:

Fingerprints can be categorized into three main groups of patterns, each group sharing similar characteristics or a family resemblance. The patterns can be further divided into sub-groups based on the smaller differences among the patterns within the same general group. These divisions are as follows:

I. ARCH II. LOOP III. WHORL
a. Plain arch. a. Radial loop. a. Plain whorl.
b. Tented arch. b. Ulnar loop. b. Central pocket loop.
    c. Double loop.
    d. Accidental whorl.


Illustrations 1 to 10 are examples of the various types of fingerprint patterns.


Illustrations 1 to 10 show different types of fingerprint patterns.

 

Figs. 1-2

Figs. 1-2

Figs. 3-8

Figs. 3-8

Figs. 9-10

Figs. 9-10

[Figs. 1-10]

[Figs. 1-10]

 

Interpretation

Before pattern definition can be understood, it is necessary to understand the meaning of a few technical terms used in fingerprint work.

Before understanding pattern definition, it's important to know the meaning of a few technical terms used in fingerprint work.

The pattern area is the only part of the finger impression with which we are concerned in regard to interpretation and classification. It is present in all patterns, of course, but in many arches and tented arches it is im[Pg 7]possible to define. This is not important, however, as the only patterns in which we need to define the pattern area for classification purposes are loops and whorls. In these two pattern types the pattern area may be defined as follows:

The pattern area is the only part of the fingerprint that matters for interpretation and classification. It's found in all patterns, but in many arches and tented arches, it's often hard to define. This isn't a big deal, though, since the only patterns we need to clearly identify the pattern area for classification are loops and whorls. For these two pattern types, the pattern area can be defined as follows:

The pattern area is that part of a loop or whorl in which appear the cores, deltas, and ridges with which we are concerned in classifying.

The pattern area is the section of a loop or whorl where the cores, deltas, and ridges that we use for classification are found.

The pattern areas of loops and whorls are enclosed by type lines.

The areas of loops and whorls are surrounded by type lines.

Type lines may be defined as the two innermost ridges which start parallel, diverge, and surround or tend to surround the pattern area.

Type lines are the two inner ridges that start off parallel, then diverge, and either surround or tend to surround the pattern area.

Figure 11 is a typical loop. Lines A and B, which have been emphasized in this sketch, are the type lines, starting parallel, diverging at the line C and surrounding the pattern area, which is emphasized in figure 12 by eliminating all the ridges within the pattern area.

Figure 11 is a typical loop. Lines A and B, highlighted in this sketch, are the type lines, beginning parallel, diverging at line C and encircling the pattern area, which is highlighted in figure 12 by removing all the ridges within the pattern area.

 

Figs. 11-12

Figs. 11-12

[Figs. 11-12]

[Figs. 11-12]

 

Figures 72 through 101 should be studied for the location of type lines.[Pg 8]

Figures 72 through 101 should be examined for the position of type lines.[Pg 8]

Type lines are not always two continuous ridges. In fact, they are more often found to be broken. When there is a definite break in a type line, the ridge immediately outside of it is considered as its continuation, as shown by the emphasized ridges in figure 13.

Type lines are not always two continuous ridges. In fact, they are more often broken. When there’s a clear break in a type line, the ridge just outside it is regarded as its continuation, as highlighted by the emphasized ridges in figure 13.

 

Fig. 13

Fig. 13

[Fig. 13]

[Fig. 13]

 

Sometimes type lines may be very short. Care must be exercised in their location. Notice the right type line in figure 14.

Sometimes type lines may be very short. Care must be taken in their placement. See the right type line in figure 14.

 

Fig. 14

Fig. 14

[Fig. 14]

[Fig. 14]

 

When locating type lines it is necessary to keep in mind the distinction between a divergence and a bifurcation (fig. 15).

When finding type lines, it's important to remember the difference between a divergence and a bifurcation (fig. 15).

 

Fig. 15

Fig. 15

[Fig. 15]

[Fig. 15]

 

A bifurcation is the forking or dividing of one line into two or more branches.

A bifurcation is when one line splits or divides into two or more branches.

A divergence is the spreading apart of two lines which have been running parallel or nearly parallel.

A divergence is when two lines that have been running parallel or almost parallel start to separate.

According to the narrow meaning of the words in fingerprint parlance, a single ridge may bifurcate, but it may not be said to diverge. Therefore, with one exception, the two forks of a bifurcation may never constitute type lines. The exception is when the forks run parallel after bifurcating and then diverge. In such a case the two forks become the two innermost ridges required by the definition. In illustration 16, the ridges marked "A—A" are type lines even though they proceed from a bifurcation. In figure 17, however, the ridges A—A are not the type lines because the forks of the bifurcation do not run parallel with each other. Instead, the ridges marked "T" are the type lines.

According to the specific terminology used in fingerprint analysis, a single ridge can split into two but can't be described as diverging. Thus, with one exception, the two branches of a split can never be considered type lines. The exception occurs when the branches run parallel after splitting and then diverge. In that case, the two branches become the two innermost ridges needed by the definition. In illustration 16, the ridges labeled "A—A" are type lines even though they come from a split. However, in figure 17, the ridges A—A are not the type lines because the branches of the split do not run parallel to each other. Instead, the ridges labeled "T" are the type lines.

 

Fig. 16

Fig. 16

[Fig. 16]

[Fig. 16]

 

Fig. 17

Fig. 17

[Fig. 17]

[Fig. 17]

 

Angles are never formed by a single ridge but by the abutting of one ridge against another. Therefore, an angular formation cannot be used as a type line. In figure 18, ridges A and B join at an angle. Ridge B does not run parallel with ridge D; ridge A does not diverge. Ridges C and D, therefore, are the type lines.

Angles are never created by just one ridge but by the meeting of one ridge with another. So, an angular formation can't serve as a type line. In figure 18, ridges A and B connect at an angle. Ridge B doesn't run parallel to ridge D; ridge A doesn't split off. Therefore, ridges C and D are the type lines.

 

Fig. 18

Fig. 18

[Fig. 18]

[Fig. 18]

 

Focal points—Within the pattern areas of loops and whorls are enclosed the focal points which are used to classify them. These points are called delta and core.

Focal points—Within the patterns of loops and whorls are the focal points used to classify them. These points are called delta and core.

The delta is that point on a ridge at or in front of and nearest the center of the divergence of the type lines.

The delta is the spot on a ridge that is at, in front of, and closest to the center of the divergence of the type lines.

It may be:

It might be:

● A bifurcation

● A split

● An abrupt ending ridge

● A sudden ending ridge

● A dot

● A point

● A short ridge

● A small ridge

● A meeting of two ridges

● A meeting of two hills

● A point on the first recurving ridge located nearest to the center and in front of the divergence of the type lines.

● A spot on the first curving ridge closest to the center and in front of where the type lines split.

The concept of the delta may perhaps be clarified by further exposition. Webster furnishes the following definition: "(1) Delta is the name of the[Pg 10] fourth letter of the Greek alphabet (equivalent to the English D) from the Phoenician name for the corresponding letter. The Greeks called the alluvial deposit at the mouth of the Nile, from its shape, the Delta of the Nile. (2) A tract of land shaped like the letter "delta," especially when the land is alluvial, and enclosed within two or more mouths of a river, as the Delta of the Ganges, of the Nile, of the Mississippi" (fig. 19).

The idea of the delta can be explained further. Webster provides this definition: "(1) Delta is the name of the[Pg 10] fourth letter of the Greek alphabet (equivalent to the English D) derived from the Phoenician name for the corresponding letter. The Greeks referred to the alluvial deposit at the mouth of the Nile as the Delta of the Nile, due to its shape. (2) A piece of land shaped like the letter 'delta,' particularly when it is alluvial and situated between two or more mouths of a river, such as the Delta of the Ganges, the Nile, or the Mississippi" (fig. 19).

 

Fig. 19

Fig. 19

[Fig. 19]

[Fig. 19]

 

When the use of the word "delta" in physical geography is fully grasped, its fitness as applied in fingerprint work will become evident. Rivers wear away their banks and carry them along in their waters in the form of a fine sediment. As the rivers unite with seas or lakes, the onward sweep of the water is lessened, and the sediment, becoming comparatively still, sinks to the bottom where there is formed a shoal which gradually grows, as more and more is precipitated, until at length a portion of the shoal becomes higher than the ordinary level of the stream. There is a similarity between the use of the word "delta" in physical geography and in fingerprints. The island formed in front of the diverging sides of the banks where the stream empties at its mouth corresponds to the delta in fingerprints, which is the first obstruction of any nature at the point of divergence of the type lines in front of or nearest the center of the divergence.

When you fully understand the use of the word "delta" in physical geography, its relevance to fingerprint analysis will become clear. Rivers erode their banks and carry the sediment in their waters. When rivers flow into seas or lakes, their current slows down, causing the sediment to settle at the bottom and form a shoal that gradually grows as more sediment accumulates. Eventually, a part of the shoal rises above the regular water level. There’s a connection between the term "delta" in physical geography and in fingerprints. The island created in front of the diverging banks at the river’s mouth corresponds to the delta in fingerprints, which is the first obstruction at the point where the type lines diverge, located closest to the center of that divergence.

In figure 20, the dot marked "delta" is considered as the delta because it is the first ridge or part of a ridge nearest the point of divergence of the two type lines. If the dot were not present, point B on ridge C, as shown in the figure, would be considered as the delta. This would be equally true whether the ridges were connected with one of the type lines, both type lines, or disconnected altogether. In figure 20, with the dot as the delta, the first ridge count is ridge C. If the dot were not present, point B on ridge C would be considered as the delta and the first count would be ridge D. The lines X—X and Y—Y are the type lines, not X—A and Y—Z.

In figure 20, the dot labeled "delta" is recognized as the delta because it’s the closest ridge or part of a ridge to where the two type lines diverge. If that dot weren’t there, point B on ridge C, as shown in the figure, would be viewed as the delta. This would hold true whether the ridges were connected to one of the type lines, both type lines, or not connected at all. In figure 20, with the dot as the delta, the first ridge count is ridge C. Without the dot, point B on ridge C would be considered the delta, and the first count would be ridge D. The lines X—X and Y—Y are the type lines, not X—A and Y—Z.

 

Fig. 20

Fig. 20

[Fig. 20]

[Fig. 20]

 

In figures 21 to 24, the heavy lines A—A and B—B are type lines with the delta at point D.[Pg 11]

In figures 21 to 24, the bold lines A—A and B—B are type lines with the delta at point D.[Pg 11]

 

Figs. 21-24

Figs. 21-24

[Figs. 21-24]

[Figs. 21-24]

 

Figure 25 shows ridge A bifurcating from the lower type line inside the pattern area. Bifurcations are also present within this pattern at points B and C. The bifurcation at the point marked "delta" is the only one which fulfills all conditions necessary for its location. It should be understood that the diverging type lines must be present in all delta formations and that wherever one of the formations mentioned in the definition of a delta may be, it must be located midway between two diverging type lines at or just in front of where they diverge in order to satisfy the definition and qualify as a delta.

Figure 25 shows ridge A splitting off from the lower type line inside the pattern area. Splits are also found within this pattern at points B and C. The split at the point labeled "delta" is the only one that meets all the necessary conditions for its location. It's important to note that diverging type lines must be present in all delta formations, and wherever one of the formations described in the definition of a delta is located, it must be situated halfway between two diverging type lines at or just in front of where they separate to meet the definition and qualify as a delta.

 

Fig. 25

Fig. 25

[Fig. 25]

[Fig. 25]

 

When there is a choice between two or more possible deltas, the following rules govern:

When choosing between two or more possible changes, the following rules apply:

The delta may not be located at a bifurcation which does not open toward the core.

The delta might not be positioned at a split that doesn't lead toward the center.

In figure 26, the bifurcation at E is closer to the core than the bifurcation at D. However, E is not immediately in front of the divergence of the type lines and it does not open toward the core. A—A and B—B are the only possible type lines in this sketch and it follows, therefore, that the bifurcation at D must be called the delta. The first ridge count would be ridge C.

In figure 26, the bifurcation at E is closer to the core than the bifurcation at D. However, E is not directly in front of the divergence of the type lines, and it does not open toward the core. A—A and B—B are the only possible type lines in this sketch, so the bifurcation at D must be referred to as the delta. The first ridge count would be ridge C.

 

Fig. 26

Fig. 26

[Fig. 26]

[Fig. 26]

 

When there is a choice between a bifurcation and another type of delta, the bifurcation is selected.

When there's a choice between a split and another type of delta, the split is chosen.

A problem of this type is shown in figure 27. The dot, A, and the bifurcation are equally close to the divergence of the type lines, but the bifurcation is selected as the delta. The ridges marked "T" are the type lines.

A problem like this is shown in figure 27. The dot, A, and the bifurcation are equally close to the divergence of the type lines, but the bifurcation is chosen as the delta. The ridges marked "T" are the type lines.

 

Fig. 27

Fig. 27

[Fig. 27]

[Fig. 27]

 

When there are two or more possible deltas which conform to the definition, the one nearest the core is chosen.

When there are two or more possible deltas that fit the definition, the one closest to the core is selected.

Prints are sometimes found wherein a single ridge enters the pattern area with two or more bifurcations opening toward the core. Figure 28 is an example of this. Ridge A enters the pattern area and bifurcates at points X and D. The bifurcation at D, which is the closer to the core, is[Pg 13] the delta and conforms to the rule for deltas. A—A and B—B are the type lines. A bifurcation which does not conform to the definition should not be considered as a delta irrespective of its distance from the core.

Prints can sometimes be found where a single ridge enters the pattern area and splits into two or more branches leading toward the core. Figure 28 is an example of this. Ridge A enters the pattern area and splits at points X and D. The split at D, which is closer to the core, is[Pg 13] the delta and matches the criteria for deltas. A—A and B—B are the type lines. A split that doesn't meet the definition shouldn't be considered a delta, no matter how far it is from the core.

 

Fig. 28

Fig. 28

[Fig. 28]

[Fig. 28]

 

The delta may not be located in the middle of a ridge running between the type lines toward the core, but at the nearer end only.

The delta might not be in the center of a ridge that runs between the type lines towards the core, but rather at the closer end only.

The location of the delta in this case depends entirely upon the point of origin of the ridge running between the type lines toward the core. If the ridge is entirely within the pattern area, the delta is located at the end nearer the point of divergence of the type lines. Figure 29 is an example of this kind.

The position of the delta in this situation is completely determined by the starting point of the ridge that runs between the type lines towards the core. If the ridge is fully within the pattern area, the delta is found at the end closer to where the type lines diverge. Figure 29 is an example of this kind.

 

Fig. 29

Fig. 29

[Fig. 29]

[Fig. 29]

 

If the ridge enters the pattern area from a point below the divergence of the type lines, however, the delta must be located at the end nearer the core. Ridge A in figure 30 is of this type.

If the ridge comes into the pattern area from a point below where the type lines split, then the delta has to be positioned at the end closer to the core. Ridge A in figure 30 is an example of this.

 

Fig. 30

Fig. 30

[Fig. 30]

[Fig. 30]

 

In figure 31, A—A and B—B are the type lines, with the dot as the delta. The bifurcations cannot be considered as they do not open toward the core.

In figure 31, A—A and B—B are the type lines, with the dot as the delta. The bifurcations can’t be considered since they don’t open toward the core.

 

Fig. 31

Fig. 31

[Fig. 31]

[Fig. 31]

 

In figure 32, the dot cannot be the delta because line D cannot be considered as a type line. It does not run parallel to type line A—A at any[Pg 14] point. The same reason prevents line E from being a type line. The end of ridge E is the only possible delta as it is a point on the ridge nearest to the center of divergence of the type lines. The other type line is, of course, B—B.

In figure 32, the dot can’t be the delta because line D isn’t a type line. It doesn’t run parallel to type line A—A at any[Pg 14] point. The same reason holds for why line E can’t be a type line. The end of ridge E is the only possible delta since it’s the point on the ridge closest to where the type lines diverge. The other type line is, of course, B—B.

 

Fig. 32

Fig. 32

[Fig. 32]

[Fig. 32]

 

The delta is the point from which to start in ridge counting. In the loop type pattern the ridges intervening between the delta and the core are counted. The core is the second of the two focal points.

The delta is the starting point for ridge counting. In the loop pattern, the ridges between the delta and the core are counted. The core is the other focal point.

The core, as the name implies, is the approximate center of the finger impression. It will be necessary to concern ourselves with the core of the loop type only. The following rules govern the selection of the core of a loop:

The core, as the name suggests, is the rough center of the finger impression. We will only focus on the core of the loop type. The following rules dictate how to select the core of a loop:

The core is placed upon or within the innermost sufficient recurve.

The core is positioned on or inside the innermost adequate recurve.

When the innermost sufficient recurve contains no ending ridge or rod rising as high as the shoulders of the loop, the core is placed on the shoulder of the loop farther from the delta.

When the deepest sufficient recurve has no ending ridge or rod that rises as high as the loop's shoulders, the core is positioned on the shoulder of the loop that is farther from the delta.

When the innermost sufficient recurve contains an uneven number of rods rising as high as the shoulders, the core is placed upon the end of the center rod whether it touches the looping ridge or not.

When the innermost effective curve has an odd number of rods reaching up to the shoulders, the core is positioned at the end of the center rod, regardless of whether it meets the looping ridge or not.

When the innermost sufficient recurve contains an even number of rods rising as high as the shoulders, the core is placed upon the end of the farther one of the two center rods, the two center rods being treated as though they were connected by a recurving ridge.

When the innermost sufficient curve has an even number of rods reaching up to the shoulders, the core is positioned at the end of the farther of the two center rods, with the two center rods treated as if they were linked by a curving ridge.

The shoulders of a loop are the points at which the recurving ridge definitely turns inward or curves.

The shoulders of a loop are the points where the bending ridge clearly turns inward or curves.

Figures 33 to 38 reflect the focal points of a series of loops. In figure 39, there are two rods, but the rod marked "A" does not rise as high as the shoulder line X, so the core is at B.

Figures 33 to 38 show the main points of a series of loops. In figure 39, there are two rods, but the rod labeled "A" doesn't reach the shoulder line X, so the core is at B.

 

Figs. 33-34

Figs. 33-34

Figs. 35-38

Figs. 35-38

Fig. 39

Fig. 39

[Figs. 33-39]

[Figs. 33-39]

 

Figures 40 to 45 illustrate the rule that a recurve must have no appendage abutting upon it at a right angle between the shoulders and on the outside. If such an appendage is present between the shoulders of a loop,[Pg 15] that loop is considered spoiled and the next loop outside will be considered to locate the core. In each of the figures, the point C indicates the core. Appendages will be further explained in the section concerning loops.

Figures 40 to 45 show the rule that a recurve must not have any appendage touching it at a right angle between the shoulders and on the outside. If there’s an appendage between the shoulders of a loop,[Pg 15] that loop is deemed spoiled and the next loop outside will be seen as the core. In each figure, the point C indicates the core. More details about appendages will be provided in the section on loops.

 

Fig. 40

Fig. 40

Figs. 41-44

Figs. 41-44

Fig. 45

Fig. 45

[Figs. 40-45]

[Figs. 40-45]

 

Figures 46 to 48 reflect interlocking loops at the center, while figure 49 has two loops side by side at the center. In all these cases the two loops are considered as one. In figure 46, when the shoulder line X—X[Pg 16] is drawn it is found to cross exactly at the point of intersection of the two loops. The two loops are considered one, with one rod, the core being placed at C. In figure 47, the shoulder line X—X is above the point of intersection of the two loops. The two are considered as one, with two rods, the core being at C. In figure 48, the shoulder line X—X is below the[Pg 17] point of intersection of the loops. Again the two are treated as one, with two rods, the core being placed at C. In figure 49, the two are treated as one, with two rods, the core being placed at C.

Figures 46 to 48 show interlocking loops at the center, while figure 49 has two loops next to each other at the center. In all these instances, the two loops are considered as one. In figure 46, when the shoulder line X—X[Pg 16] is drawn, it crosses exactly at the point where the two loops intersect. The two loops are seen as one, with one rod, and the core placed at C. In figure 47, the shoulder line X—X is above the intersection point of the two loops. They are considered as one, with two rods, and the core located at C. In figure 48, the shoulder line X—X is below the[Pg 17] intersection point of the loops. Once again, the two are treated as one, with two rods, and the core placed at C. In figure 49, the two are regarded as one, with two rods, and the core placed at C.

 

Fig. 46

Fig. 46

Figs. 47-48

Figs. 47-48

[Figs. 46-49]

[Figs. 46-49]

 

In figure 50, the delta is formed by a bifurcation which is not connected with either of the type lines. The first ridge count in this instance is ridge C. If the bifurcation were not present, the delta would be a point on ridge C and the first ridge count would be ridge D. In figure 51, the ridge which bifurcates is connected with the lower type line. The delta[Pg 18] in this would be located on the bifurcation as designated and the first ridge count would be ridge C. Figure 52 reflects the same type of delta shown in the previous figure in that the ridge is bifurcating from a type line and then bifurcates again to form the delta.

In figure 50, the delta is created by a split that isn't linked to either of the type lines. The first ridge count here is ridge C. If the split wasn't there, the delta would be a point on ridge C and the first ridge count would be ridge D. In figure 51, the ridge that splits is connected to the lower type line. The delta[Pg 18] in this case would be located at the split as indicated, and the first ridge count would be ridge C. Figure 52 shows the same type of delta as in the previous figure, where the ridge is splitting from a type line and then splits again to form the delta.

 

Fig. 50

Fig. 50

Figs. 51-52

Figs. 51-52

[Figs. 50-52]

[Figs. 50-52]

 

A white space must intervene between the delta and the first ridge count. If no such interval exists, the first ridge must be disregarded. In figures 53 and 54, the first ridge beyond the delta is counted. In figure 55, it is not counted because there is no interval between it and the delta. Notice that the ridge running from the delta toward the core is in a straight line between them. If it were not, of course, an interval would intervene as in figures 53 and 54.

A blank space must appear between the delta and the first ridge count. If there’s no space, the first ridge should be ignored. In figures 53 and 54, the first ridge after the delta is included in the count. In figure 55, it isn't counted because there’s no space between it and the delta. Notice that the ridge connecting the delta to the core is in a straight line between them. If it weren’t, there would be a space, just like in figures 53 and 54.

 

Figs. 53-55

Figs. 53-55

[Figs. 53-55]

[Figs. 53-55]

 

The loop

In fingerprints, as well as in the usual application of the word "loop," there cannot be a loop unless there is a recurve or turning back on itself of one or more of the ridges. Other conditions have to be considered, however. A pattern must possess several requisites before it may be properly classified as a loop. This type of pattern is the most numerous of all and constitutes about 65 percent of all prints.[Pg 19]

In fingerprints, similar to the common use of the term "loop," a loop cannot exist without one or more of the ridges curving back on themselves. However, other conditions also need to be taken into account. A pattern must meet several criteria before it can be correctly classified as a loop. This type of pattern is the most common, making up about 65 percent of all prints.[Pg 19]

A loop is that type of fingerprint pattern in which one or more of the ridges enter on either side of the impression, recurve, touch or pass an imaginary line drawn from the delta to the core, and terminate or tend to terminate on or toward the same side of the impression from whence such ridge or ridges entered.

A loop is a type of fingerprint pattern where one or more ridges enter from either side of the impression, curve back, touch or cross an imaginary line drawn from the delta to the core, and end or tend to end on or towards the same side of the impression from which those ridges entered.

Essentials of a loop

● A sufficient recurve.

● A good recurve.

● A delta.

● A delta.

● A ridge count across a looping ridge.

● A ridge count across a looping ridge.

A sufficient recurve may be defined as that part of a recurving ridge between the shoulders of a loop. It must be free of any appendages abutting upon the outside of the recurve at a right angle.

A sufficient recurve can be defined as the section of a recurving ridge located between the shoulders of a loop. It should be clear of any attachments touching the outside of the recurve at a right angle.

Appendages—Some explanation is necessary of the importance attached to appendages. Much care must be exercised in interpreting appendages because they sometimes change the shape of the recurving ridge to which they are connected. For example, a loop with an appendage abutting upon its recurve between the shoulders and at right angles, as in illustration 56, will appear sometimes as in illustration 57 with the recurve totally destroyed. For further examples see figures 161 to 184.

Appendages—It’s important to explain the significance of appendages. Great care must be taken when interpreting appendages because they can sometimes alter the shape of the recurving ridge to which they're attached. For instance, a loop with an appendage touching its recurve between the shoulders and at a right angle, as shown in illustration 56, might look different in illustration 57 with the recurve completely changed. For additional examples, see figures 161 to 184.

 

Figs. 56-57

Figs. 56-57

[Figs. 56-57]

[Figs. 56-57]

 

The same is true of a whorl recurve, as in figures 58 and 59.

The same goes for a whorl recurve, as shown in figures 58 and 59.

 

[Figs. 58-59]

[Figs. 58-59]

 

It is necessary, therefore, to consider and classify figures 56 and 58 as if they actually appeared as in figures 57 and 59.

It is necessary, therefore, to consider and classify figures 56 and 58 as if they actually appeared like in figures 57 and 59.

In figure 60, there is a ridge marked "A" which enters on one side of the impression and, after recurving, passes an imaginary line drawn from the core C to delta D, and terminates on the same side of the impression from which it entered, marked "B", thus fulfilling all the conditions required in the definition of a loop. X and Y are the type lines. It will be noted in figure 61 that there is a ridge which enters on one side of the[Pg 20] impression, recurves, and passes an imaginary line drawn from the delta to the core. It does not terminate on the side from which it entered but has a tendency to do so. In this case, all the requirements of the loop have been met, and consequently it is classified as such.

In figure 60, there's a ridge labeled "A" that enters on one side of the impression, curves back, crosses an imaginary line drawn from the core C to delta D, and ends on the same side of the impression where it started, marked "B," thus meeting all the conditions needed for a loop. X and Y are the type lines. You'll notice in figure 61 that there's a ridge that enters on one side of the[Pg 20] impression, curves back, and crosses an imaginary line drawn from the delta to the core. It doesn't end on the same side where it entered but tends to do so. In this instance, all the requirements of a loop have been satisfied, so it is classified as such.

 

Fig. 60

Fig. 60

[Fig. 60]

[Fig. 60]

 

Fig. 61

Fig. 61

[Fig. 61]

[Fig. 61]

 

Figure 62 shows a ridge entering on one side of the impression, recurving, and passing beyond an imaginary line drawn from the delta to the core, although opposite from the pattern shown in figure 61. After passing the imaginary line, the recurving ridge does not terminate on the side of the impression from which it entered, but it has a tendency to do so, and the pattern is, therefore, a loop.

Figure 62 shows a ridge entering from one side of the impression, curving back, and extending beyond an imaginary line drawn from the delta to the core, although it's opposite the pattern shown in figure 61. After crossing the imaginary line, the curving ridge doesn’t end on the side of the impression it came from, but it tends to do so, making the pattern a loop.

 

Fig. 62

Fig. 62

[Fig. 62]

[Fig. 62]

 

In figure 63, a ridge enters on one side of the impression and then recurves, containing two rods within it, each of which rises as high as the shoulder of the loop. From our study of cores, we know that the top of the rod more distant from the delta is the core, but the recurving ridge does not pass the imaginary line. For that reason the pattern is not classified as a loop, but is given the preferential classification of a tented arch due to the lack of one of the loop requisites. The proper location of the core and delta is of extreme importance, for an error in the location of either might cause this pattern to be classified as a loop.[Pg 21]

In figure 63, a ridge comes in on one side of the impression and then curves back, featuring two rods inside it, with each one rising as high as the loop's shoulder. From our analysis of cores, we know that the rod farther from the delta is the core, but the curving ridge doesn't cross the imaginary line. Because of this, the pattern isn't classified as a loop; instead, it's classified as a tented arch due to missing one of the loop requirements. The correct placement of the core and delta is extremely important, as a mistake in locating either could lead to this pattern being misclassified as a loop.[Pg 21]

 

Fig. 63

Fig. 63

[Fig. 63]

[Fig. 63]

 

Figure 64 reflects a similar condition.

Figure 64 shows a similar situation.

 

Fig. 64

Fig. 64

[Fig. 64]

[Fig. 64]

 

In figure 65, there is a looping ridge A which enters on one side of the impression. The ridges B and C are the type lines. As determined by rules already stated, the location of the core and the location of the delta[Pg 22] are shown, and if an imaginary line were placed on the core and delta, the recurving ridge A would cross it. This is another figure showing a ridge which does not terminate on the side of the impression from which it entered but tends to do so, and, therefore, is considered as a loop.

In figure 65, there’s a looping ridge A that enters from one side of the impression. The ridges B and C are the type lines. According to the previously mentioned rules, the locations of the core and the delta[Pg 22] are indicated, and if you were to draw an imaginary line between the core and delta, the recurving ridge A would intersect it. This is another figure illustrating a ridge that doesn’t end on the side of the impression from which it entered but tends to, and is thus classified as a loop.

 

Fig. 65

Fig. 65

[Fig. 65]

[Fig. 65]

 

In figure 66, we have a print which is similar in many respects to the one described in the preceding paragraph, but here the recurving ridge A continues and tends to terminate on the opposite side of the impression from which it entered. For this reason the pattern is not a loop, but a tented arch. The recurving ridge must touch or pass the imaginary line between delta and core and at least tend to pass out toward the side from which it entered, so that a ridge count of at least one can be obtained.

In figure 66, we have a print that is similar in many ways to the one described in the previous paragraph, but here the recurving ridge A continues and tends to end on the opposite side of the impression it came from. Because of this, the pattern is not a loop, but a tented arch. The recurving ridge must touch or cross the imaginary line between the delta and core and at least try to extend out toward the side it entered from, so that a ridge count of at least one can be achieved.

 

Fig. 66

Fig. 66

[Fig. 66]

[Fig. 66]

 

Figure 67 shows a ridge which enters on one side of the impression and, after flowing toward the center, turns or loops on itself and terminates on the same side from whence it entered. This pattern would be classified as a loop. This pattern should be distinguished from the pattern appearing in figure 139. Careful study of the pattern in figure 67 reveals that the core is located at C and the delta D. The imaginary line between these points will be crossed by the ridge forming a loop. In figure 139, the core is located on the recurve and an imaginary line between the delta and the core does not cross a looping ridge. Figure 139 is thus classified as a tented arch, as will be seen later.

Figure 67 shows a ridge that enters from one side of the impression and, after flowing toward the center, loops back on itself and ends on the same side it entered. This pattern is classified as a loop. It should be distinguished from the pattern appearing in figure 139. A careful examination of the pattern in figure 67 shows that the core is located at C and the delta at D. The imaginary line between these points is crossed by the ridge, forming a loop. In figure 139, the core is located on the recurve, and an imaginary line between the delta and the core does not cross a looping ridge. Figure 139 is thus classified as a tented arch, as will be discussed later.

 

Fig. 67

Fig. 67

[Fig. 67]

[Fig. 67]

 

Figure 68 shows at the center of the print a ridge which forms a pocket. It will be noticed that ridge A does not begin on the edge of the print, but this is of no significance. The ridge A within the pattern area recurves or loops, passing the imaginary line between the delta and the core, and tends to terminate toward the same side of the impression from whence it entered. This is a loop pattern possessing all of the requirements.[Pg 23]

Figure 68 shows a ridge in the center of the print that creates a pocket. It's worth noting that ridge A doesn't start at the edge of the print, but that's not important. Ridge A in the pattern area curves or loops back, crossing the imaginary line between the delta and the core, and tends to end near the same side of the impression where it entered. This is a loop pattern that meets all the necessary requirements.[Pg 23]

 

Fig. 68

Fig. 68

[Fig. 68]

[Fig. 68]

 

In figures 69 and 70, it will be observed that there is a ridge entering on one side of the pattern which recurves and then turns back on itself. These patterns are different from any others which have been shown in this respect but are classified as loops. In each of the patterns the core and delta are marked "C" and "D". The reader should trace the type lines in order to ascertain why the delta is located at point D, and then apply the delta rule.

In figures 69 and 70, you’ll notice a ridge entering on one side of the pattern, curving, and then turning back on itself. These patterns are unique compared to others shown but are categorized as loops. In each pattern, the core and delta are labeled "C" and "D". The reader should follow the type lines to understand why the delta is at point D, and then use the delta rule.

 

Fig. 69

Fig. 69

[Fig. 69]

[Fig. 69]

 

Fig. 70

Fig. 70

[Fig. 70]

[Fig. 70]

 

Figure 71 is an example of loops as they appear on the rolled impression portion of a fingerprint card.[Pg 24]

Figure 71 shows how loops look on the rolled impression part of a fingerprint card.[Pg 24]

 

[Fig. 71]

[Fig. 71]

 

Ridge counting

The number of ridges intervening between the delta and the core is known as the ridge count. The technical employees of the Federal Bureau of Investigation count each ridge which crosses or touches an imaginary line drawn from the delta to the core. Neither delta nor core is counted. A red line upon the reticule of the fingerprint glass is used to insure absolute accuracy. In the event there is a bifurcation of a ridge exactly at the point where the imaginary line would be drawn, two ridges are counted. Where the line crosses an island, both sides are counted. Fragments and dots are counted as ridges only if they appear to be as thick and heavy as the other ridges in the immediate pattern. Variations in inking and pressure must, of course, be considered.

The number of ridges between the delta and the core is called the ridge count. The technical staff of the Federal Bureau of Investigation count each ridge that crosses or touches an imaginary line drawn from the delta to the core. Neither the delta nor the core is counted. A red line on the fingerprint analysis glass is used to ensure complete accuracy. If there’s a bifurcation of a ridge exactly at the point where the imaginary line is drawn, two ridges are counted. When the line crosses an island, both sides are counted. Fragments and dots are counted as ridges only if they appear to be as thick and prominent as the other ridges in the immediate pattern. Differences in inking and pressure must, of course, be taken into account.

Figures 72 to 97 and figures 98 to 101 show various loop patterns. The reader should examine each one carefully in order to study the cores and deltas and to verify the count which has been placed below each pattern.[Pg 25]

Figures 72 to 97 and figures 98 to 101 display different loop patterns. The reader should take a close look at each one to analyze the cores and deltas and to confirm the count listed below each pattern.[Pg 25]

 

Figs. 78-83

Figs. 78-83

Figs. 84-89

Figs. 84-89

Figs. 90-95

Figs. 90-95

Figs. 96-101

Figs. 96-101

[Figs. 72-101]

[Figs. 72-101]

 

Figure 102 is a sketch reflecting the various types of ridges which the classifier will encounter when engaging in counting loop patterns.

Figure 102 is a sketch showing the different types of ridges that the classifier will come across when analyzing counting loop patterns.

 

[Fig. 102]

[Fig. 102]

 

In figure 103, the lighter lines are caused by the splitting or fraying of the ridges. Sometimes ingrained dirt will cause a similar condition between the ridges. These lines are not considered ridges and should not be counted.

In figure 103, the lighter lines are due to the splitting or fraying of the ridges. Sometimes, built-up dirt can create a similar effect between the ridges. These lines are not counted as ridges and should be disregarded.

 

Fig. 103

Fig. 103

[Fig. 103]

[Fig. 103]

 

In figure 104, the dot is not the delta because it is not as thick and heavy as the other ridges and might not be present if the finger were not perfectly inked and printed.

In figure 104, the dot isn't the delta because it's not as thick and bold as the other ridges and might not appear if the finger wasn't perfectly inked and printed.

 

Fig. 104

Fig. 104

[Fig. 104]

[Fig. 104]

 

When the core is located on a spike which touches the inside of the innermost recurving ridge, the recurve is included in the ridge count only when the delta is located below a line drawn at right angles to the spike.

When the core is on a spike that touches the inside of the innermost recurving ridge, the recurve is counted in the ridge total only if the delta is below a line drawn at a right angle to the spike.

Figures 105 and 106 are examples of this rule.

Figures 105 and 106 are examples of this guideline.

 

Figs. 105-106

Figs. 105-106

[Figs. 105-106]

[Figs. 105-106]

 

If the delta is located in areas A, the recurving ridge is counted.

If the delta is in areas A, the recurving ridge is counted.

If the delta is located in areas B, the recurving ridge is not counted.

If the delta is in area B, the recurving ridge doesn't count.

Radial and ulnar loops

The terms "radial" and "ulnar" are derived from the radius and ulna bones of the forearm. Loops which flow in the direction of the ulna bone (toward the little finger) are called ulnar loops and those which flow in the direction of the radius bone are called radial loops.

The terms "radial" and "ulnar" come from the radius and ulna bones of the forearm. Loops that flow toward the ulna bone (toward the little finger) are called ulnar loops, while those that flow toward the radius bone are called radial loops.

For test purposes, fingers of the right hand may be placed on the corresponding print of the right hand appearing in figure 71, and it will be noticed that the side of each finger which is nearer to the thumb on the hand is also nearer to the thumb on the fingerprint card. Place the fingers of the left hand on the corresponding prints of the left hand shown in figure 71. It will be noticed that the arrangement of the prints on the card is the reverse of the arrangement of the fingers on the hand. The classification of loops is based on the way the loops flow on the hand (not the card), so that on the fingerprint card for the left hand, loops flowing toward the thumb impression are ulnar, and loops flowing toward the little finger impression are radial.[Pg 32]

For testing, place the fingers of your right hand on the matching print of the right hand shown in figure 71, and you'll see that the side of each finger closest to the thumb on your hand is also closest to the thumb on the fingerprint card. Next, place the fingers of your left hand on the corresponding prints of the left hand displayed in figure 71. You’ll notice that the layout of the prints on the card is the opposite of how your fingers are arranged on your hand. The classification of loops is based on their direction on the hand (not the card), so on the fingerprint card for the left hand, loops that curve toward the thumb impression are called ulnar, while loops that curve toward the little finger impression are called radial.[Pg 32]

The plain arch

In plain arches the ridges enter on one side of the impression and flow or tend to flow out the other with a rise or wave in the center. The plain arch is the most simple of all fingerprint patterns, and it is easily distinguished. Figures 107 to 118 are examples of the plain arch. It will be noted that there may be various ridge formations such as ending ridges, bifurcations, dots and islands involved in this type of pattern, but they all tend to follow the general ridge contour; i.e., they enter on one side, make a rise or wave in the center, and flow or tend to flow out the other side.

In plain arches, the ridges enter on one side of the impression and flow out the other side with a rise or wave in the center. The plain arch is the simplest of all fingerprint patterns, and it's easy to identify. Figures 107 to 118 show examples of the plain arch. It's important to note that there can be different ridge formations such as ending ridges, bifurcations, dots, and islands in this type of pattern, but they all generally follow the same ridge shape; that is, they enter on one side, rise or wave in the center, and flow out the other side.

 

Figs. 107-110

Figs. 107-110

Figs. 111-116

Figs. 111-116

Figs. 117-118

Figs. 117-118

[Figs. 107-118]

[Figs. 107-118]

 

Figures 119 and 120 are examples of plain arches which approximate tented arches. Also, figure 121 is a plain arch approximating a tented arch as the rising ridge cannot be considered an upthrust because it is a continuous, and not an ending, ridge. (See following explanation of the tented arch.)

Figures 119 and 120 are examples of simple arches that resemble tented arches. Also, figure 121 is a simple arch that approximates a tented arch since the rising ridge shouldn't be seen as an upthrust because it is a continuous ridge, not a terminating one. (See the following explanation of the tented arch.)

 

Figs. 119-121

Figs. 119-121

[Figs. 119-121]

[Figs. 119-121]

 

The tented arch

In the tented arch, most of the ridges enter upon one side of the impression and flow or tend to flow out upon the other side, as in the plain arch type; however, the ridge or ridges at the center do not. There are three types of tented arches:

In the tented arch, most of the ridges start on one side of the impression and flow or tend to flow out on the other side, similar to the plain arch type; however, the ridge or ridges at the center do not. There are three types of tented arches:

● The type in which ridges at the center form a definite angle; i.e., 90° or less.

● The type where ridges in the center create a clear angle; that is, 90° or less.

● The type in which one or more ridges at the center form an upthrust. An upthrust is an ending ridge of any length rising at a sufficient degree from the horizontal plane; i.e., 45° or more.

● The type where one or more ridges in the center create an upthrust. An upthrust is a ridge at the end of any length that rises at a steep angle from the horizontal plane; that is, 45° or more.

● The type approaching the loop type, possessing two of the basic or essential characteristics of the loop, but lacking the third.

● The type that's close to the loop type has two of the main characteristics of the loop but is missing the third one.

Figures 122 to 133 are examples of the tented arch.

Figures 122 to 133 are examples of the tented arch.

 

Figs. 122-125

Figs. 122-125

Figs. 126-131

Figs. 126-131

Figs. 132-133

Figs. 132-133

[Figs. 122-133]

[Figs. 122-133]

 

Figures 122 to 124 are of the type possessing an angle.

Figures 122 to 124 are of the type that has an angle.

Figures 125 to 129 reflect the type possessing an upthrust.

Figures 125 to 129 show the type with an upward thrust.

Figures 130 to 133 show the type approaching the loop but lacking one characteristic.

Figures 130 to 133 show the type getting close to the loop but missing one characteristic.

Tented arches and some forms of the loop are often confused. It should be remembered by the reader that the mere converging of two ridges does not form a recurve, without which there can be no loop. On the other hand, there are many patterns which at first sight resemble tented arches but which on close inspection are found to be loops, as where one looping ridge will be found in an almost vertical position within the pattern area, entirely free from and passing in front of the delta.

Tented arches and some types of loops are often mixed up. It's important for the reader to remember that just because two ridges come together doesn't mean it creates a recurve; without that, there can't be a loop. However, there are many patterns that may initially look like tented arches but, upon closer examination, turn out to be loops, as where one looping ridge is positioned almost vertically within the pattern area, completely separate from and passing in front of the delta.

Figure 134 is a tented arch. The ridge marked "A—A" in the sketch enters on one side of the impression and flows to the other with an acute rise in the center. Ridge C strikes into A at point B and should not be considered as a bifurcating ridge. The ridges marked "D—D" would form a tented arch if the rest of the pattern were absent.

Figure 134 is a tented arch. The ridge labeled "A—A" in the sketch starts on one side of the impression and extends to the other with a sharp rise in the center. Ridge C intersects A at point B and should not be viewed as a branching ridge. The ridges labeled "D—D" would create a tented arch if the rest of the pattern were not present.

 

Fig. 134

Fig. 134

[Fig. 134]

[Fig. 134]

 

Figure 135 is a sketch of a pattern reflecting a ridge, A—B, entering on one side of the impression, recurving, and making its exit on the other side of the impression. The reader should study this sketch carefully. It should be borne in mind that there must be a ridge entering on one side of the impression and recurving in order to make its exit on the same side from which it entered, or having a tendency to make its exit on that side, before a pattern can be considered for possible classification as a loop. This pattern is a tented arch of the upthrust type. The upthrust is C. There is also an angle at E. D cannot be termed as a delta, as the ridge to the left of D cannot be considered a type line because it does not diverge from the ridge to the right of D but turns and goes in the same direction.

Figure 135 is a sketch of a pattern showing a ridge, A—B, entering from one side of the impression, curving, and exiting on the opposite side. The reader should examine this sketch closely. It's important to note that there must be a ridge entering from one side of the impression and curving back in order to exit on the same side it entered, or at least showing a tendency to exit on that side, for a pattern to be considered for possible classification as a loop. This pattern is a tented arch of the upthrust type. The upthrust is C. There is also an angle at E. D cannot be called a delta, as the ridge to the left of D cannot be considered a type line because it does not diverge from the ridge to the right of D but instead turns and continues in the same direction.

 

Fig. 135

Fig. 135

[Fig. 135]

[Fig. 135]

 

In connection with the types of tented arches, the reader is referred to the third type. This form of tented arch, the one which approaches the loop, may have any combination of two of the three basic loop characteristics, lacking the third. These three loop characteristics are, to repeat:

In relation to the types of tented arches, the reader is directed to the third type. This kind of tented arch, which resembles the loop, may have any combination of two of the three basic loop characteristics, missing the third. These three loop characteristics are, to reiterate:

A sufficient recurve.

A good recurve.

A delta.

A delta.

A ridge count across a looping ridge.

A ridge count over a curved ridge.

It must be remembered that a recurve must be free of any appendage abutting upon it at a right angle between the shoulders, and a true ridge count is obtained only by crossing a looping ridge freely, with a white space intervening between the delta and the ridge to be counted.

It should be noted that a recurve must not have any extra part sticking out at a right angle between the shoulders, and an accurate ridge count is achieved only by crossing a looping ridge freely, with a clear space separating the delta and the ridge being counted.

Figures 136 and 137 are tented arches having loop formations within the pattern area but with deltas upon the loops, by reason of which it is impossible to secure a ridge count. The type lines run parallel from the left in figures 136 and 137. These tented arches have two of the loop characteristics, recurve and delta, but lack the third, the ridge count.[Pg 39]

Figures 136 and 137 show tented arches with loop patterns, but they each have deltas on the loops, making it impossible to get a ridge count. The type lines run parallel from the left in figures 136 and 137. These tented arches possess two loop characteristics: recurve and delta, but they are missing the third one, which is the ridge count.[Pg 39]

 

Figs. 136-137

Figs. 136-137

[Figs. 136-137]

[Figs. 136-137]

 

In figure 138, the reader will note the similarity to the figures 136 and 137. The only difference is that in this figure the type lines are running parallel from the right. It will be noted from these three patterns that the spaces between the type lines at their divergence show nothing which could be considered as delta formations except the looping ridges. Such patterns are classified as tented arches because the ridge count necessary for a loop is lacking.

In figure 138, you'll see it looks similar to figures 136 and 137. The only difference is that in this figure, the type lines run parallel from the right. From these three patterns, it's clear that the spaces between the type lines at their divergence don't show anything that can be considered delta formations, except for the looping ridges. These patterns are classified as tented arches because they lack the ridge count needed for a loop.

 

Fig. 138

Fig. 138

[Fig. 138]

[Fig. 138]

 

Figure 139 is an example of a tented arch. In this pattern, if the looping ridge approached the vertical it could possibly be a one-count loop. Once studied, however, the pattern presents no real difficulty. There are no ridges intervening between the delta, which is formed by a bifurcation, and the core. It will be noted that the core, in this case, is at the center[Pg 40] of the recurve, unlike those loops which are broadside to the delta and in which the core is placed upon the shoulder. This pattern has a recurve and a separate delta, but it still lacks the ridge count necessary to make it a loop.

Figure 139 shows an example of a tented arch. In this pattern, if the looping ridge comes close to vertical, it could possibly be a one-count loop. However, upon closer examination, the pattern isn’t really challenging. There are no ridges in between the delta, which is created by a bifurcation, and the core. It’s worth noting that the core, in this case, is at the center[Pg 40] of the recurve, unlike those loops that are positioned sideways to the delta, where the core is placed on the shoulder. This pattern has a recurve and a separate delta, but it still doesn’t have the ridge count needed to make it a loop.

 

[Fig. 139]

[Fig. 139]

 

Figures 140 and 141 are examples of tented arches. These two figures are similar in many ways. Each of these prints has three abrupt ending ridges but lacks a recurve; however, in figure 141 a delta is present in addition to the three abrupt ending ridges. This condition does not exist in figure 140, where the lower ending ridge is the delta.

Figures 140 and 141 are examples of tented arches. These two figures are similar in many ways. Each of these prints has three sharp ending ridges but doesn’t have a recurve; however, in figure 141, a delta is present in addition to the three sharp ending ridges. This condition does not exist in figure 140, where the lower ending ridge is the delta.

 

Figs. 140-141

Figs. 140-141

[Figs. 140-141]

[Figs. 140-141]

 

When interpreting a pattern consisting of two ending ridges and a delta but lacking a recurve, do not confuse the ridge count of the tented arch with that of the ridge count for the loop. The ridge count of the tented arch is merely a convention of fingerprinting, a fiction designed to facilitate a scientific classification of tented arches, and has no connection with a loop. To obtain a true ridge count there must be a looping ridge which is crossed freely by an imaginary line drawn between the delta and the core. The ridge count referred to as such in connection with the tented arches possessing ending ridges and no recurve is obtained by imagining that the ending ridges are joined by a recurve only for the purpose of locating the core and obtaining a ridge count. If this point is secure in the mind of the classifier, little difficulty will be encountered.

When looking at a pattern that has two ending ridges and a delta but no recurve, don't mix up the ridge count of the tented arch with that of the loop. The ridge count for the tented arch is just a convention in fingerprinting—a construct meant to help categorize tented arches scientifically—and has no relation to a loop. To get an accurate ridge count, there needs to be a looping ridge that is crossed by an imaginary line drawn between the delta and the core. The ridge count mentioned in relation to tented arches with ending ridges and no recurve is obtained by picturing that the ending ridges are connected by a recurve only for the sake of finding the core and getting a ridge count. If the classifier keeps this in mind, they shouldn't face much difficulty.

Figures 140 and 141, then, are tented arches because they have two of the characteristics of a loop, delta and ridge count, but lack the third, the recurve.

Figures 140 and 141 are tented arches because they have two of the features of a loop: delta and ridge count, but they lack the third one, which is the recurve.

Figure 142 is a loop formation connected with the delta but having no ridge count across a looping ridge. By drawing an imaginary line from the core, which is at the top of the rod in the center of the pattern, to the delta, it will be noted that there is no recurving ridge passing between this rod and the delta; and, therefore, no ridge count can result. This pattern is classified as a tented arch. There must be a white space between the delta and the first ridge counted, or it may not be counted. Figure 143 is also a tented arch because no ridge count across a looping ridge can be obtained, the bifurcations being connected to each other and[Pg 41] to the loop in a straight line between delta and core. The looping ridge is not crossed freely. No white space intervenes between the delta and the loop. These patterns are tented arches because they possess two of the characteristics of a loop, a delta and a recurve, but lack the third, a ridge count across a looping ridge.

Figure 142 shows a loop formation that connects with the delta but doesn’t have a ridge count across a looping ridge. If you draw an imaginary line from the core, located at the top of the rod in the center of the pattern, to the delta, you'll see that there isn't a recurving ridge between the rod and the delta; therefore, no ridge count can be determined. This pattern is classified as a tented arch. There must be a white space between the delta and the first ridge counted, or it won’t be counted. Figure 143 is also a tented arch because there’s no ridge count across a looping ridge; the bifurcations connect to each other and[Pg 41] to the loop in a straight line from delta to core. The looping ridge is not crossed freely, and there’s no white space between the delta and the loop. These patterns are considered tented arches because they have two of the characteristics of a loop: a delta and a recurve, but they lack the third characteristic, a ridge count across a looping ridge.

 

Figs. 142-143

Figs. 142-143

[Figs. 142-143]

[Figs. 142-143]

 

Figure 144 is a tented arch combining two of the types. There is an angle formed by ridge a abutting upon ridge b. There are also the elements of the type approaching a loop, as it has a delta and ridge count but lacks a recurve.

Figure 144 shows a tented arch that brings together two types. There’s an angle created by ridge a meeting ridge b. It also has characteristics of a type that’s close to a loop, as it includes a delta and ridge count but doesn’t have a recurve.

 

Fig. 144

Fig. 144

[Fig. 144]

[Fig. 144]

 

Figures 145 to 148 are tented arches because of the angles formed by the abutting ridges at the center of the patterns.

Figures 145 to 148 are tented arches due to the angles created by the adjoining ridges at the center of the patterns.

 

Figs. 145-146

Figs. 145-146

Figs. 147-148

Figs. 147-148

[Figs. 145-148]

[Figs. 145-148]

 

Figure 149 is a tented arch because of the upthrust present at the center of the pattern. The presence of the slightest upthrust at the center of the impression is enough to make a pattern a tented arch.[Pg 42]

Figure 149 is a tented arch because of the upward pressure at the center of the pattern. Even the smallest upward pressure at the center of the impression is enough to classify a pattern as a tented arch.[Pg 42]

 

Fig. 149

Fig. 149

[Fig. 149]

[Fig. 149]

 

An upthrust must be an ending ridge. If continuous as in figure 150, no angle being present, the pattern is classified as a plain arch.

An upthrust has to be an ending ridge. If it’s continuous like in figure 150, with no angle present, the pattern is classified as a plain arch.

 

Fig. 150

Fig. 150

[Fig. 150]

[Fig. 150]

 

Figures 151 to 153 are plain arches. Figure 154 is a tented arch.

Figures 151 to 153 are simple arches. Figure 154 is a tented arch.

 

Figs. 151-152

Figs. 151-152

Figs. 153-154

Figs. 153-154

[Figs. 151-154]

[Figs. 151-154]

 

Figure 155 is a plain arch because it is readily seen that the apparent upthrust A is a continuation of the curving ridge B. Figure 156 is a tented arch because ridge A is an independent upthrust, and not a continuation of ridge B.

Figure 155 is a flat arch because it's clear that the apparent upthrust A continues from the curving ridge B. Figure 156 is a tented arch because ridge A is a separate upthrust and does not continue from ridge B.

 

Figs. 155-156

Figs. 155-156

[Figs. 155-156]

[Figs. 155-156]

 

Figures 157 and 158 are plain arches. Figure 158 cannot be said to be a looping ridge, because by definition a loop must pass out or tend to pass out upon the side from which it entered. This apparent loop passes out upon the opposite side and cannot be said to tend to flow out upon the same side.

Figures 157 and 158 are plain arches. Figure 158 can’t be considered a looping ridge because, by definition, a loop must extend out or tend to extend out from the side where it entered. This seeming loop extends out on the opposite side and can’t be said to tend to flow out from the same side.

 

Figs. 157-158

Figs. 157-158

[Figs. 157-158]

[Figs. 157-158]

 

In figures 159 and 160, there are ending ridges rising at about the same degree from the horizontal plane.

In figures 159 and 160, there are ending ridges rising at roughly the same angle from the horizontal plane.

 

Figs. 159-160

Figs. 159-160

[Figs. 159-160]

[Figs. 159-160]

 

Figure 159, however, is a plain arch, while 160 is a tented arch. This differentiation is necessary because, if the first pattern were printed crookedly upon the fingerprint card so that the ending ridge was nearer the horizontal plane, there would be no way to ascertain the true horizontal plane of the pattern (if the fissure of the finger did not appear). In other words, there would be no means of knowing that there was sufficient rise to be called an upthrust, so that it is safe to classify the print as a plain arch only. In figure 160, however, no matter how it is printed, the presence[Pg 44] of a sufficient rise could always be ascertained because of the space intervening between the ending ridge and the ridge immediately beneath it, so that it is safe to classify such a pattern as a tented arch. The test is, if the ridges on both sides of the ending ridge follow its direction or flow trend, the print may be classified as a plain arch. If, however, the ridges on only one side follow its direction, the print is a tented arch.

Figure 159 is a plain arch, while Figure 160 is a tented arch. This distinction is important because if the first pattern is printed at an angle on the fingerprint card, making the ending ridge closer to the horizontal plane, there's no way to determine the true horizontal plane of the pattern (unless the finger's fissure is visible). In other words, we wouldn't be able to tell if there was enough rise to be considered an upthrust, so it would be safe to classify the print as a plain arch only. In Figure 160, however, regardless of how it’s printed, the presence of a significant rise can always be identified due to the space between the ending ridge and the ridge directly below it, making it safe to categorize this pattern as a tented arch. The test is, if the ridges on both sides of the ending ridge follow its direction or flow trend, the print can be classified as a plain arch. If the ridges on only one side follow its direction, the print is a tented arch.

An upthrust, then, must not only be an ending ridge rising at a sufficient degree from the horizontal plane, but there must also be a space between the ending ridge and the ridge immediately beneath it. This, however, is not necessary for a short upthrust or spike, or any upthrust which rises perpendicularly.

An upthrust, then, must not only be an ending ridge that rises at a steep enough angle from the horizontal plane, but there also needs to be a gap between the ending ridge and the ridge directly below it. This, however, is not required for a short upthrust or spike, or for any upthrust that rises straight up.

In connection with the proper classification to be assigned to those borderline loop-tented arch cases where an appendage or spike is thrusting out from the recurve, it is necessary to remember that an appendage or a spike abutting upon a recurve at right angles in the space between the shoulders of a loop on the outside is considered to spoil the recurve.

In relation to the correct classification for those borderline loop-tented arch cases where an appendage or spike sticks out from the recurve, it's important to keep in mind that an appendage or a spike that touches a recurve at right angles in the space between the shoulders of a loop on the outside is seen as spoiling the recurve.

If the appending ridge flows off the looping ridge smoothly in such a way that it forms a bifurcation and not an abutment of two ridges at a right angle, the recurve is considered as remaining intact. The test is to trace the looping ridge toward the appendage, and if, when it is reached, the tracing may be continued as readily upon the appendage as upon the looping ridge, with no sudden, sharp change of direction, the recurve is sufficient. Figures 161 to 184 should be studied with this in mind.

If the added ridge flows off the looping ridge smoothly, creating a split instead of forming two ridges at a right angle, the recurve is considered to be intact. To test this, follow the looping ridge towards the appendage. If you can easily continue tracing along the appendage just as you did with the looping ridge, without any sudden or sharp changes in direction, then the recurve is adequate. Refer to Figures 161 to 184 while keeping this in mind.

 

Figs. 164-175

Figs. 164-175

Figs. 176-181

Figs. 176-181

Figs. 182-184

Figs. 182-184

[Figs. 161-184]

[Figs. 161-184]

 

Figures 185 to 190 show additional examples of tented arches.

Figures 185 to 190 show more examples of tented arches.

 

Figs. 185-186

Figs. 185-186

Figs. 187-190

Figs. 187-190

[Figs. 185-190]

[Figs. 185-190]

 

The reason that figure 185 is given the classification of a tented arch is because of the presence of all the loop requirements with the exception of one, which is the recurve. In this pattern appear three ending ridges.[Pg 48] The lowest ending ridge provides the delta, and the other two by the convention explained previously, provide the ridge count. It is a tented arch, then, of the type approaching the loop, with two of the characteristics, but lacking the third, a recurve. Figures 186 and 187 are tented arches of the same type. A close examination of these prints will reveal that when the imaginary line is drawn between delta and core no ridge count across a looping ridge can be obtained. It must be remembered that the core of a loop may not be placed below the shoulder line. Lacking one of the three characteristics of a loop, these patterns must be classified as tented arches. When figure 188 is examined, it will be noticed that the recurve is spoiled by the appendage abutting upon it between the shoulders at a right angle, so it must also be classified with the tented arches. In figure 189, the only possible delta must be placed upon the looping ridge, thus preventing a ridge count although delta and recurve are present. Figure 190 is assigned the classification of a tented arch. One of the requirements of a loop type is that the ridge enters on one side, recurves, and makes its exit on the side from which it entered. This, of course, makes it necessary[Pg 49] that the ridge pass between the delta and the core. It will be noted from this figure that although this ridge passes between the delta and the core, it does not show any tendency to make its exit on the side from which it entered, and therefore the loop classification is precluded, and it is a tented arch.

The reason figure 185 is classified as a tented arch is that it meets all the loop criteria except for one, which is the recurve. This pattern shows three ending ridges.[Pg 48] The lowest ending ridge provides the delta, and the other two, as explained earlier, provide the ridge count. So, it is a tented arch type that approaches the loop with two characteristics, but it lacks the third, a recurve. Figures 186 and 187 also show tented arches of this kind. A close look at these prints will show that when a line is drawn between the delta and core, no ridge count can be obtained across a looping ridge. It's important to remember that the core of a loop cannot be placed below the shoulder line. Since they are missing one of the three loop characteristics, these patterns must be classified as tented arches. When figure 188 is examined, it becomes clear that the recurve is affected by the appendage that is positioned at a right angle against it between the shoulders, so it must also be classified as a tented arch. In figure 189, the only possible delta must be placed on the looping ridge, which prevents a ridge count even though the delta and recurve are present. Figure 190 is classified as a tented arch. One requirement for a loop type is that the ridge enters from one side, recurves, and exits on the same side from which it entered. This means that the ridge has to pass between the delta and the core. It can be seen from this figure that although the ridge does pass between the delta and the core, it shows no tendency to exit on the side it entered, so it cannot be classified as a loop, and is therefore a tented arch.

The whorl

The patterns to which numerical values are assigned in deriving the "primary" in the extension of the Henry System of fingerprint classification used by the Federal Bureau of Investigation are the whorl-type patterns, which occur in about 30 percent of all fingerprints.

The patterns that are given numerical values for calculating the "primary" in the Henry System of fingerprint classification used by the FBI are whorl-type patterns, which appear in about 30 percent of all fingerprints.

The whorl is that type of pattern in which at least two deltas are present with a recurve in front in each. Figures 191 to 193 reflect the minimum requirements for the whorl.

The whorl is a pattern that has at least two deltas with a recurve in front of each one. Figures 191 to 193 show the minimum requirements for the whorl.

 

Figs. 191-193

Figs. 191-193

[Figs. 191-193]

[Figs. 191-193]

 

It is important to note that the above definition is very general; however, this pattern may be subdivided for extension purposes in large groups where whorls are predominant. Even though this extension may be used, all types of whorls are grouped together under the general classification of "Whorl" and are designated by the letter "W".

It’s important to point out that the definition above is quite broad; however, this pattern can be broken down for further detail in large groups where whorls are common. Even though this breakdown can be applied, all types of whorls are categorized together under the general label of "Whorl" and are represented by the letter "W".

The aforementioned subdivisions are as follows: The Plain Whorl, The Central Pocket Loop, The Double Loop, and The Accidental.

The mentioned categories are as follows: The Plain Whorl, The Central Pocket Loop, The Double Loop, and The Accidental.

The plain whorl

The "plain whorl" consists of the simplest form of whorl construction and is the most common of the whorl subdivisions. It is designated by the symbol "W" for both general classification and extension purposes.

The "plain whorl" is the most basic type of whorl structure and is the most common among the whorl categories. It's represented by the symbol "W" for both general classification and extension purposes.

The plain whorl has two deltas and at least one ridge making a complete circuit, which may be spiral, oval, circular, or any variant of a circle. An imaginary line drawn between the two deltas must touch or cross at least one of the recurving ridges within the inner pattern area. A recurving ridge, however, which has an appendage connected with it in[Pg 50] the line of flow cannot be construed as a circuit. An appendage connected at that point is considered to spoil the recurve on that side.

The plain whorl has two deltas and at least one ridge forming a complete loop, which can be spiral, oval, circular, or any variation of a circle. An imaginary line drawn between the two deltas must touch or cross at least one of the recurving ridges within the inner pattern area. However, a recurving ridge that has an appendage connected to it in[Pg 50] the direction of flow cannot be seen as a complete loop. An appendage connected at that point is considered to disrupt the recurve on that side.

Figures 194 to 211 are typical examples of the plain whorl type. Figure 212 is, however, a loop, as the circuit is spoiled on one side by an appendage.

Figures 194 to 211 are typical examples of the plain whorl type. Figure 212 is, however, a loop, as the circuit is interrupted on one side by an appendage.

 

Figs. 194-198

Figs. 194-198

Figs. 199-204

Figs. 199-204

Figs. 205-210

Figs. 205-210

Figs. 211-212

Figs. 211-212

[Figs. 194-212]

[Figs. 194-212]

 

Central pocket loop

Within the whorl group, the subclassification type "central pocket loop" is used for extension purposes only. In general classification it is designated by the letter "W". Figures 213 to 236 are central pocket loops.

Within the whorl group, the subclassification type "central pocket loop" is used for extension purposes only. In general classification, it is designated by the letter "W". Figures 213 to 236 are central pocket loops.

 

Figs. 213-218

Figs. 213-218

Figs. 219-224

Figs. 219-224

Figs. 225-230

Figs. 225-230

Figs. 231-236

Figs. 231-236

[Figs. 213-236]

[Figs. 213-236]

 

The central pocket loop type of whorl has two deltas and at least one ridge making a complete circuit, which may be spiral, oval, circular, or any variant of a circle. An imaginary line drawn between the two deltas must not touch or cross any of the recurving ridges within the inner pattern area. A recurving ridge, however, which has an appendage connected with it in the line of flow and on the delta side cannot be construed as a circuit. An appendage connected at that point is considered to spoil the recurve on that side.

The central pocket loop type of whorl has two deltas and at least one ridge that forms a complete circuit, which can be spiral, oval, circular, or any variation of a circle. An imaginary line drawn between the two deltas should not touch or cross any of the recurving ridges within the inner pattern area. However, a recurving ridge that has an appendage connected to it in the direction of flow and on the delta side cannot be considered a circuit. An appendage connected at that point is seen as disrupting the recurve on that side.

In lieu of a recurve in front of the delta in the inner pattern area, an obstruction at right angles to the line of flow will suffice.

Instead of a curve in front of the delta in the inner pattern area, a barrier perpendicular to the flow direction will be enough.

It is necessary that the inner line of flow be fixed artificially. The inner line of flow is determined by drawing an imaginary line between the inner delta and the center of the innermost recurve or looping ridge.

It is necessary to artificially set the inner flow line. The inner flow line is defined by drawing an imaginary line between the inner delta and the center of the innermost curve or looping ridge.

In the central pocket loop, one or more of the simple recurves of the plain loop type usually recurve a second time to form a pocket within the loop. The second recurve, however, need not be a continuation of—or even connected with—the first. It may be an independent ridge.

In the central pocket loop, one or more of the simple recurves of the plain loop type typically recurve again to create a pocket inside the loop. The second recurve, however, doesn't have to be a continuation of—or even connected to—the first. It can be an independent ridge.

If no second recurve is present, an obstruction at right angles to the inner line of flow is acceptable in lieu of it. An obstruction may be either curved or straight. A dot, of course, may not be considered an obstruction.

If there's no second recurve, an obstruction perpendicular to the inner flow line is fine instead. An obstruction can be either curved or straight. A dot, of course, cannot be considered an obstruction.

The definition does not require a recurve to cross the line of flow at right angles. The angle test needs to be applied to obstructions only.

The definition doesn’t require a recurve to meet the flow line at right angles. The angle test should only be applied to obstructions.

The recurve or obstruction of the central pocket loop, as that of the plain whorl, must be free of any appendage connected to it at the point crossed by the line of flow and on the delta side. An appendage at that point is considered to spoil the recurve or obstruction.

The recurve or obstruction of the central pocket loop, like that of the plain whorl, must not have any appendage attached to it at the point where it intersects with the flow line and on the delta side. An appendage at that point is seen as ruining the recurve or obstruction.

Figures 237 and 238 are also central pocket loops despite the appendages connected to the recurves, because they are not connected at the point crossed by the line of flow.

Figures 237 and 238 are also central pocket loops even though they have appendages linked to the recurves, because they aren't connected at the point intersected by the line of flow.

 

Figs. 237-238

Figs. 237-238

[Figs. 237-238]

[Figs. 237-238]

 

Figure 239, although possessing a recurve, is classified as a loop because the second delta is located on the only recurving ridge.

Figure 239, while having a recurve, is categorized as a loop because the second delta is found on the single recurving ridge.

 

Fig. 239

Fig. 239

[Fig. 239]

[Fig. 239]

 

Figures 240 to 244, although possessing one delta and a delta formation, are classified as loops because the obstructions do not cross the line of flow at right angles.

Figures 240 to 244, while having one delta and a delta formation, are categorized as loops since the obstructions don't intersect the flow line at right angles.

 

Fig. 240

Fig. 240

Figs. 241-242

Figs. 241-242

Figs. 243-244

Figs. 243-244

[Figs. 240-244]

[Figs. 240-244]

 

Figures 245 to 254 have two deltas and one or more recurves, but they are classified as loops because each recurve is spoiled by an appendage connected to it at the point crossed by the line of flow.

Figures 245 to 254 have two deltas and one or more recurves, but they are classified as loops because each recurve is affected by an appendage connected to it at the point crossed by the flow line.

 

Figs. 245-248

Figs. 245-248

Figs. 249-254

Figs. 249-254

[Figs. 245-254]

[Figs. 245-254]

 

Double loop

Within the whorl group, the subclassification type "double loop" is used for extension purposes only. In general classification it is designated by the letter "W".

Within the whorl group, the subclassification type "double loop" is used solely for extension purposes. In general classification, it is represented by the letter "W".

The double loop consists of two separate loop formations, with two separate and distinct sets of shoulders, and two deltas.

The double loop includes two separate loop formations, each with its own distinct set of shoulders and two deltas.

The word "separate," as used here, does not mean unconnected. The two loops may be connected by an appending ridge provided that it does not abut at right angles between the shoulders of the loop formation. The appendage rule for the loop applies also to the double loop. An appendage abutting upon a loop at right angles between the shoulders is considered to spoil the loop, while an appendage which flows off smoothly is considered to leave the recurve intact.

The word "separate," as used here, does not mean unconnected. The two loops may be linked by an added ridge as long as it doesn't connect at right angles between the shoulders of the loop formation. The appendage rule for the loop also applies to the double loop. An appendage that connects to a loop at right angles between the shoulders is seen as ruining the loop, while an appendage that flows off smoothly is considered to keep the recurve intact.

The fact that there must be two separate loop formations eliminates from consideration as a double loop the "S" type core, the interlocking type core, and the formation with one loop inside another.

The requirement for two distinct loop formations rules out the "S" type core, the interlocking type core, and the design with one loop inside another as double loops.

The loops of a double loop do not have to conform to the requirements of the loop. In other words, no ridge count is necessary.

The loops of a double loop don't need to meet the requirements of the loop. In other words, there's no need for a ridge count.

It is not essential that both sides of a loop be of equal length, nor that the two loops be of the same size. Neither is it material from which side the loops enter.

It’s not necessary for both sides of a loop to be the same length, nor for the two loops to be the same size. It also doesn’t matter which side the loops enter from.

The distinction between twinned loops and lateral pocket loops made by Henry and adopted by other authors has been abandoned by the Federal Bureau of Investigation because of the difficulty in locating and tracing the loops. Both types have been consolidated under the classification "double loop."

The difference between twinned loops and lateral pocket loops, as defined by Henry and used by other authors, has been dropped by the Federal Bureau of Investigation because it's hard to find and track these loops. Both types have been combined under the classification "double loop."

Figures 255 to 266 are double loops.

Figures 255 to 266 are double loops.

 

Figs. 255-256

Figs. 255-256

Figs. 257-262

Figs. 257-262

Figs. 263-266

Figs. 263-266

[Figs. 255-266]

[Figs. 255-266]

 

Figure 267 is a plain whorl. It is not classified as a double loop as one side of one loop forms the side of the other. Figure 268 is a plain loop. It is not a double loop because all of the recurves of the loop on the right are spoiled by appendages.

Figure 267 is a simple whorl. It's not considered a double loop since one side of one loop makes up part of the other. Figure 268 is a plain loop. It's not a double loop because all the recurves of the loop on the right are disrupted by extra bits.

 

Figs. 267-268

Figs. 267-268

[Figs. 267-268]

[Figs. 267-268]

 

Accidental

Within the whorl group the subdivision type "accidental" is used for extension purposes only. In general classification it is designated by the letter "W" and for extension purposes by the letter "X".

Within the whorl group, the subdivision type "accidental" is used solely for extension purposes. In general classification, it is represented by the letter "W," while for extension purposes, it is denoted by the letter "X."

The accidental whorl is a pattern consisting of a combination of two different types of pattern, with the exception of the plain arch, with two or more deltas; or a pattern which possesses some of the requirements for two or more different types; or a pattern which conforms to none of the definitions. It may be a combination of loop and tented arch, loop and whorl, loop and central pocket loop, double loop and central pocket loop, or other such combinations. The plain arch is excluded as it is rather the absence of pattern than a pattern. Underneath every pattern there are ridges running from one side to the other, so that if it were not excluded every pattern but the plain arch would be an accidental whorl.

The accidental whorl is a pattern made up of a mix of two different types of patterns, excluding the plain arch, with two or more deltas; or a pattern that meets some criteria for two or more different types; or a pattern that doesn’t fit any definitions. It can be a mix of loop and tented arch, loop and whorl, loop and central pocket loop, double loop and central pocket loop, or other combinations like these. The plain arch is excluded because it’s more like a lack of pattern than a true pattern. Beneath every pattern, there are ridges that run from one side to the other, so if we didn’t exclude it, every pattern other than the plain arch would be considered an accidental whorl.

This subclassification also includes those exceedingly unusual patterns which may not be placed by definition into any other classes.

This subclassification also includes those extremely unusual patterns that can't be categorized into any other classes by definition.

Figures 269 to 271 are accidentals combining a loop with a tented arch.[Pg 66] Figures 272 to 276 combine a loop and a plain whorl or central pocket loop. Figure 277 combines a loop and a double loop. Figure 278 combines a loop and a plain arch, so it is classified as a loop. Figure 279 combines a loop and a tented arch.

Figures 269 to 271 show accidentals that combine a loop with a tented arch.[Pg 66] Figures 272 to 276 combine a loop with a plain whorl or central pocket loop. Figure 277 combines a loop with a double loop. Figure 278 combines a loop with a plain arch, so it's classified as a loop. Figure 279 combines a loop with a tented arch.

 

Figs. 269-271

Figs. 269-271

Figs. 272-277

Figs. 272-277

Figs. 278-279

Figs. 278-279

[Figs. 269-279]

[Figs. 269-279]

 

Some whorls may be found which contain ridges conforming to more than one of the whorl subdivisions described. In such cases, the order of preference (if any practical distinction need be made) should be: (1) accidental, (2) double loop, (3) central pocket loop, (4) plain whorl.

Some whorls can be found that have ridges matching more than one of the whorl types described. In these cases, the preferred order (if any practical distinction needs to be made) should be: (1) accidental, (2) double loop, (3) central pocket loop, (4) plain whorl.

Whorl tracing

The technique of whorl tracing depends upon the establishment of the focal points—the deltas. Every whorl has two or more. When the deltas have been located, the ridge emanating from the lower side or point of the extreme left delta is traced until the point nearest or opposite the extreme right delta is reached. The number of ridges intervening between the tracing ridge and the right delta are then counted. If the ridge traced passes inside of (above) the right delta, and three or more ridges intervene between the tracing ridge and the delta, the tracing is designated as an "inner"—I (fig. 280). If the ridge traced passes outside (below) the[Pg 67] right delta, and three or more ridges intervene between the tracing ridge and the right delta, the tracing is designated as an "outer"—O (fig. 281). All other tracings are designated as "meeting"—M (figs. 282 to 287).

The technique of whorl tracing relies on identifying the focal points—the deltas. Every whorl has two or more deltas. Once the deltas are found, the ridge that comes from the lower side or the point of the far left delta is traced until it reaches the point closest to or opposite the far right delta. The number of ridges between the tracing ridge and the right delta are then counted. If the traced ridge goes inside (above) the right delta and three or more ridges are between the tracing ridge and the delta, it is classified as an "inner"—I (fig. 280). If the traced ridge goes outside (below) the right delta and three or more ridges intervene between the tracing ridge and the right delta, it is classified as an "outer"—O (fig. 281). All other tracings are classified as "meeting"—M (figs. 282 to 287).

 

Figs. 280-281

Figs. 280-281

Figs. 282-287

Figs. 282-287

[Figs. 280-287]

[Figs. 280-287]

 

Tracing begins from the left delta. In no instance is a tracing to begin on a type line. In figure 288, tracing begins at the short ridge which is the left delta. It is true that inasmuch as the short ridge ends immediately the type line is next followed, but this is only because the type line is the next lower ridge. Its status as a type line is independent and has no bearing on the fact that it is being traced. This point is illustrated further in figure 289. This pattern shows an inner tracing. It will be noted that the delta is at the point on the first recurve nearest to the center of the divergence of the type lines. It will be further noted that tracing begins at the point of delta on the left and continues toward the right, passing inside of the right delta, with three ridges intervening between the tracing ridge and the right delta. This shows the tracing to be an inner tracing. If, in this case, the type line were traced (which would be the incorrect procedure), only two ridges would intervene between the tracing ridge and the right delta, resulting in an erroneous meeting tracing. Figure 290 is another example of the application of this rule. This illustration is also an inner whorl.

Tracing starts from the left delta. Never should tracing begin on a type line. In figure 288, tracing starts at the short ridge, which is the left delta. It's true that since the short ridge ends right before the type line, the type line is then followed, but this is simply because the type line is the next lower ridge. Its designation as a type line is independent and does not affect the fact that it is being traced. This point is explained further in figure 289. This pattern demonstrates an inner tracing. You’ll notice that the delta is located at the point on the first recurve that is closest to where the type lines diverge. It’s also noted that tracing starts at the delta on the left and moves to the right, passing inside the right delta, with three ridges between the tracing ridge and the right delta. This indicates that the tracing is an inner tracing. If, in this situation, the type line were traced (which would be the wrong approach), only two ridges would be between the tracing ridge and the right delta, leading to an incorrect meeting tracing. Figure 290 is another example of applying this rule. This illustration is also an inner whorl.

 

Figs. 288-289

Figs. 288-289

Fig. 290

Fig. 290

[Figs. 288-290]

[Figs. 288-290]

 

When the ridge traced ends abruptly, and it is determined that the ridge definitely ends, the tracing drops down to the point on the next lower ridge immediately beneath the point where the ridge above ends, continuing from there. Figure 291, therefore, is an outer whorl.

When the ridge ends suddenly, and it's clear that the ridge has definitely finished, the tracing moves down to the point on the next lower ridge directly below where the above ridge ends, continuing from that point. Figure 291, therefore, is an outer whorl.

 

Fig. 291

Fig. 291

[Fig. 291]

[Fig. 291]

 

In this connection it should be noted that the rule for dropping to the next lower line applies only when the ridge definitely ends. Short breaks in a ridge which may be due to improper inking, the presence of foreign matter on the ridges, enlarged pores, disease, or worn ridges should not be considered as definite ridge endings. The determination of what constitutes a definite ending will depend, of course, upon the good judgment of the classifier. When the question arises as to whether a break encoun[Pg 69]tered in the ridge tracing is a definite ending, or whether there has been interference with a natural impression, the whole pattern should be examined to ascertain whether such breaks are general throughout the pattern. If they are found to be common, consideration should then be given to the possibility that the break is not a definite ridge ending. Appropriate reference tracing should be done in all such cases.

In this regard, it’s important to point out that the rule for dropping down to the next lower line only applies when the ridge definitely ends. Short breaks in a ridge, which may be caused by improper inking, foreign material on the ridges, enlarged pores, illness, or worn ridges, shouldn’t be seen as definite ridge endings. Deciding what constitutes a definite ending depends on the classifier’s good judgment. When there’s a question about whether a break seen in the ridge tracing is a definite ending or if it’s just interference with a natural impression, the entire pattern should be reviewed to see if those breaks are common throughout. If they appear to be frequent, then there should be some thought given to the possibility that the break isn’t a definite ridge ending. In all such cases, proper reference tracing should be carried out.

Whenever the ridge traced bifurcates, the rule for tracing requires that the lower limb or branch proceeding from the bifurcation be followed. This is illustrated in 292.

Whenever the ridge line splits, the guideline for following it states that you should follow the lower limb or branch that comes from the split. This is shown in 292.

 

Fig. 292

Fig. 292

[Fig. 292]

[Fig. 292]

 

Accidentals often possess three or more deltas. In tracing them only the extreme deltas are considered, the tracing beginning at the extreme left delta and proceeding toward the extreme right delta, as illustrated in figure 293.[Pg 70]

Accidentals usually have three or more deltas. When tracing them, only the extreme deltas are taken into account, starting from the far left delta and moving toward the far right delta, as shown in figure 293.[Pg 70]

 

Fig. 293

Fig. 293

[Fig. 293]

[Fig. 293]

 

In a double loop or accidental the problem of where to stop tracing is sometimes presented. The rule is, when the tracing passes inside of the right delta, stop at the nearest point to the right delta on the upward trend, as in figure 294. If no upward trend is present, continue tracing until a point opposite the right delta, or the delta itself, is reached (figs. 295 and 296).

In a double loop or accidentally, the issue of when to stop tracing can sometimes come up. The guideline is, when the tracing goes inside the right delta, stop at the closest point to the right delta on the upward trend, as shown in figure 294. If there is no upward trend, keep tracing until you reach a point directly opposite the right delta or the delta itself (figs. 295 and 296).

 

Fig. 294

Fig. 294

Figs. 295-296

Figs. 295-296

[Figs. 294-296]

[Figs. 294-296]


CHAPTER III

Questionable Patterns

 

No matter how definite fingerprint rules and pattern definitions are made, there will always be patterns concerning which there is doubt as to the classification they should be given. The primary reason for this is the fact that probably no two fingerprints will ever appear which are exactly alike. Other reasons are differences in the degree of judgment and interpretation of the individual classifying fingerprints, the difference in the amount of pressure used by the person taking the prints, and the amount or kind of ink used. Nothing can be done about faulty inking or pressure once the prints are taken. The patterns which are questionable merely because they seem to have characteristics of two or more types can be classified by strict adherence to the definitions in deducing a preference. The following section is devoted to such patterns with an explanation of each.

No matter how clear fingerprint rules and pattern definitions are, there will always be patterns that raise questions about how they should be classified. The main reason for this is that it's unlikely any two fingerprints will ever be exactly the same. Other reasons include differences in judgment and interpretation by the individuals classifying the fingerprints, the amount of pressure applied by the person taking the prints, and the type or amount of ink used. Once the prints are taken, there's no fixing issues caused by improper inking or pressure. Patterns that are questionable simply because they exhibit traits of two or more types can still be classified by strictly following the definitions to determine a preference. The next section will discuss these patterns with an explanation of each.

Figure 297 has two loop formations. The one on the left, however, has an appendage abutting upon the shoulders of its recurve at a right angle. The left portion of the impression, therefore, is of the tented arch type. The combination of two different types of patterns would be classified in the whorl group (accidental), but this impression has only the one delta. The right portion of the pattern detail contains a true loop which fulfills all the loop requirements, i.e., a sufficient recurve, a delta, and a ridge count across a looping ridge. In the choice existing between a tented arch and a loop, preference is given to the loop classification and this impression would be classified as a loop.[Pg 72]

Figure 297 shows two loop formations. The one on the left has an extension touching the shoulders of its recurve at a right angle. Therefore, the left part of the impression is a tented arch type. The mix of two different pattern types would usually fall into the whorl group (accidental), but this impression has only one delta. The right side of the pattern detail features a true loop that meets all the loop requirements, meaning it has a sufficient recurve, a delta, and a ridge count across a looping ridge. When choosing between a tented arch and a loop, the loop classification is preferred, so this impression is classified as a loop.[Pg 72]

 

Fig. 297

Fig. 297

[Fig. 297]

[Fig. 297]

 

Figure 298, at a glance, seems to fulfill the requirements of a whorl (two deltas and a ridge making a complete circuit). The part of the circuit in front of the right delta, however, cannot be construed as a recurving ridge because of the appendage abutting upon it in the line of flow. This pattern, therefore, is a one-count loop.

Figure 298, at first glance, appears to meet the criteria for a whorl (two deltas and a ridge forming a complete circuit). However, the section of the circuit in front of the right delta can't be considered a recurving ridge due to the appendage next to it in the direction of flow. Therefore, this pattern is a one-count loop.

 

Fig. 298

Fig. 298

[Fig. 298]

[Fig. 298]

 

Figure 299 is a very difficult and unusual pattern. It has characteristics of three types, the whorl, the loop, and the tented arch. It is given the preference of an accidental type of whorl (loop over a tented arch). This pattern should be referenced both as a loop and as a tented arch.

Figure 299 is a complex and unique pattern. It contains features of three types: the whorl, the loop, and the tented arch. It is categorized as an accidental type of whorl (with a loop preference over a tented arch). This pattern should be described as both a loop and a tented arch.

 

Fig. 299

Fig. 299

[Fig. 299]

[Fig. 299]

 

Figure 300 is shown for the purpose of explaining that in the whorl, as this print is, appendages at the top of the recurve will not spoil or affect the recurve. Hence, the impression is a good whorl of the central pocket loop type and needs no reference.

Figure 300 is shown to explain that in the whorl, as this print is, any appendages at the top of the recurve won’t ruin or impact the recurve. Therefore, the impression is a solid whorl of the central pocket loop type and doesn’t require any reference.

 

Fig. 300

Fig. 300

[Fig. 300]

[Fig. 300]

 

Figure 301 is classified as a whorl of the double loop type. There are present two distinct loops and two deltas (the right delta is not present as the impression was not rolled sufficiently). The pattern is unusual because the loops are side by side and flowing in the same direction. The tracing is an inner tracing.[Pg 73]

Figure 301 is classified as a double loop whorl. It has two distinct loops and two deltas (the right delta is absent because the impression was not rolled enough). The pattern is unusual since the loops are next to each other and flowing in the same direction. The tracing is an inner tracing.[Pg 73]

 

Fig. 301

Fig. 301

[Fig. 301]

[Fig. 301]

 

Figure 302 should present no difficulty. It is classified as a plain arch for its ridge construction follows the rule of a plain arch, i.e., "enter one side and flow or tend to flow to the other."

Figure 302 should be easy to understand. It's categorized as a plain arch because its ridge construction aligns with the principle of a plain arch, meaning, "enter from one side and flow or tend to flow to the other."

 

Fig. 302

Fig. 302

[Fig. 302]

[Fig. 302]

 

Figure 303 is a plain arch. The dot at the center is not elongated enough to be considered an upthrust. A dot, even though as thick and heavy as the surrounding ridges, is not considered for any purpose but ridge counting or fixing a delta.

Figure 303 is a simple arch. The dot in the center isn't long enough to be seen as an upthrust. A dot, even if it's as thick and heavy as the surrounding ridges, is only useful for ridge counting or determining a delta.

 

Fig. 303

Fig. 303

[Fig. 303]

[Fig. 303]

 

Figure 304 is a pattern somewhat similar to the previous illustration. As indicated before, dots are considered as ridges only in ridge counting and fixing a delta. This pattern, therefore, must be classified as a plain arch, rather than a tented arch with two ending ridges and a delta formation.

Figure 304 is a pattern that resembles the previous illustration. As mentioned earlier, dots are seen as ridges only when counting ridges and determining a delta. Therefore, this pattern should be categorized as a plain arch, instead of a tented arch with two ending ridges and a delta formation.

 

Fig. 304

Fig. 304

[Fig. 304]

[Fig. 304]

 

Figure 305, although showing an appendage upon each recurve on the left side, is classified as a whorl of the central pocket loop type, with two deltas and a recurve in front of each. To spoil the recurve of a whorl the appendage must be connected to the recurve at the point of contact with the line of flow.

Figure 305, while showing an appendage on each recurve on the left side, is classified as a whorl of the central pocket loop type, with two deltas and a recurve in front of each. To disrupt the recurve of a whorl, the appendage must be connected to the recurve at the point where it meets the line of flow.

 

Fig. 305

Fig. 305

[Fig. 305]

[Fig. 305]

 

[Pg 74]In figure 306, the impression has two equally good loop formations. As it has but one delta, it cannot be classified as a whorl of the double loop type nor as a loop since it would be difficult to make a preferential choice between the two looping ridges. It is arbitrarily given the classification of a tented arch.

[Pg 74]In figure 306, the impression features two equally valid loop formations. Since it has only one delta, it can't be classified as a double loop whorl or a loop because it would be hard to choose between the two looping ridges. It is therefore assigned the classification of a tented arch.

 

Fig. 306

Fig. 306

[Fig. 306]

[Fig. 306]

 

In figure 307, the difficulty lies in locating the delta. The only ridges answering the definition of type lines (ridges running parallel and then diverging to enclose the pattern area) have three ending ridges between them. The type lines, the delta, and the core are located as indicated. The pattern is classified as a six-count loop.

In figure 307, the challenge is finding the delta. The only ridges that fit the definition of type lines (ridges that run parallel and then diverge to enclose the pattern area) have three ending ridges between them. The type lines, the delta, and the core are positioned as shown. The pattern is classified as a six-count loop.

 

Fig. 307

Fig. 307

[Fig. 307]

[Fig. 307]

 

Figure 308 is classified as a tented arch, although it appears at first glance to be a loop. Closer inspection shows that the looping ridge does not tend to go out the side from which it entered but rather seems to proceed downward ending in an abutment forming a definite angle of 90°.

Figure 308 is known as a tented arch, even though it looks like a loop at first glance. A closer look reveals that the looping ridge doesn’t extend to the side it entered from; instead, it appears to go downward, finishing in a support that creates a clear 90° angle.

 

Fig. 308

Fig. 308

[Fig. 308]

[Fig. 308]

 

In figure 309, an impression is shown which at first appears to be a loop. Closer inspection will show that one of the elements of the loop type is missing, namely, a ridge count across a looping ridge; for it is to be borne in mind that the recurve of the innermost loop should be free of appendages abutting between the shoulders at right angles. The core, in this illustration, therefore, is placed where the appendage of the innermost loop touches the next ridge which is a good recurve. If an imaginary line is placed between delta and core, it will be seen that there are no intervening ridges; hence, there is no ridge count.

In figure 309, you can see a print that initially looks like a loop. However, a closer look reveals that one part of the loop is missing: the ridge count across a looping ridge. It's important to remember that the curve of the innermost loop should not have any extra parts sticking out between the shoulders at right angles. In this illustration, the core is located where the extra part of the innermost loop meets the next ridge, which has a nice curve. If you draw an imaginary line between the delta and the core, you'll notice that there are no ridges in between; therefore, there is no ridge count.

 

Fig. 309

Fig. 309

[Fig. 309]

[Fig. 309]

 

Figure 310 is a pattern which contains two elements of a loop but lacks the third. It is classified as a tented arch. Thus an impression having a delta and a recurve, but not having a ridge count across a looping ridge, falls into this classification.

Figure 310 is a pattern that has two elements of a loop but is missing the third. It is categorized as a tented arch. Therefore, an impression with a delta and a recurve, but without a ridge count across a looping ridge, fits into this category.

 

Fig. 310

Fig. 310

[Fig. 310]

[Fig. 310]

 

It will be noticed that although this pattern has the resemblance of a plain arch, the center of the impression actually contains a partially formed loop. A recurving ridge enters from the right side and exits in the same direction. A delta also appears just below the recurve. In attempting[Pg 76] to obtain a ridge count, it is seen that the imaginary line drawn between the delta and the core runs directly along the ridge emanating from the former and which is joined onto the side of the recurving ridge. For this reason, no ridge count is possible.

It’s noticeable that while this pattern looks like a simple arch, the center of the impression actually has a partially formed loop. A re-curving ridge comes in from the right side and exits in the same direction. A delta is also visible just below the re-curve. In trying[Pg 76] to get a ridge count, we see that the imaginary line drawn between the delta and the core runs directly along the ridge coming from the delta, which is connected to the side of the re-curving ridge. Because of this, a ridge count isn’t possible.

Figure 311 is a tented arch. There are three loop formations, each one of which is spoiled by an appendage abutting upon its recurve between the shoulders at a right angle. It cannot be classified as an accidental as the patterns are all of the same type, i.e., tented arches. An accidental type of whorl is a combination of two or more different types of patterns exclusive of the plain arch.

Figure 311 is a tented arch. There are three loop formations, each one interrupted by an extension hitting its curve at a right angle between the shoulders. It can't be classified as an accidental because all the patterns are the same type, i.e., tented arches. An accidental type of whorl is a mix of two or more different types of patterns apart from the plain arch.

 

Fig. 311

Fig. 311

[Fig. 311]

[Fig. 311]

 

Figure 312 is a loop. It cannot be classified as a whorl of the double loop type because the formation above the lower loop is too pointed and it also has an appendage abutting upon it at a right angle.

Figure 312 is a loop. It can't be categorized as a whorl of the double loop type because the shape above the lower loop is too pointed, and it also has a part sticking out from it at a right angle.

 

Fig. 312

Fig. 312

[Fig. 312]

[Fig. 312]

 

Figure 313 at first glance appears to be a whorl of the double loop type. Upon closer inspection, however, it will be noticed that there are no delta formations other than on the recurves. There are, then, two tented arch formations. As two patterns of the same type cannot form an accidental whorl, the impression must be classified as a tented arch.[Pg 77]

Figure 313 might initially look like a double loop whorl. However, upon closer inspection, it becomes clear that there are no delta formations except on the recurves. Instead, there are two tented arch formations. Since two patterns of the same type can’t create an accidental whorl, the impression should be classified as a tented arch.[Pg 77]

 

Fig. 313

Fig. 313

[Fig. 313]

[Fig. 313]

 

Figure 314 is an accidental whorl, combining a loop and a tented arch. The tented arch is directly beneath the innermost loop, and is of the upthrust type.

Figure 314 shows an accidental whorl that combines a loop and a tented arch. The tented arch is positioned right below the innermost loop and is of the upthrust type.

 

Fig. 314

Fig. 314

[Fig. 314]

[Fig. 314]

 

Figure 315 consists of a loop over a dot with an apparent second delta. This pattern must be classified as a loop, as a dot may not be considered an upthrust unless elongated vertically.

Figure 315 consists of a loop over a dot with an apparent second delta. This pattern must be classified as a loop, since a dot cannot be considered an upthrust unless it is elongated vertically.

 

Fig. 315

Fig. 315

[Fig. 315]

[Fig. 315]

 

Even though a dot may be as thick and heavy as the surrounding ridges, it may be considered only in ridge counting or fixing a delta.

Even if a dot is as thick and heavy as the surrounding ridges, it may only be counted in ridge counting or in establishing a delta.

Figure 316 at first glance appears to be an accidental whorl, but on closer inspection it proves to be a loop. Although there are three delta formations present, it should be observed that recurving ridges appear in front of only one (D-1).

Figure 316 initially looks like a random whorl, but upon closer look, it turns out to be a loop. While there are three delta formations visible, it's important to note that recurving ridges only appear in front of one (D-1).

 

Fig. 316

Fig. 316

[Fig. 316]

[Fig. 316]

 

Figure 317 has the general appearance of a loop. The looping ridge A, at the center, has an appendage B abutting upon its recurve. The abutment is at right angles and therefore spoils the recurve. The pattern is a tented arch.[Pg 78]

Figure 317 looks like a loop. The looping ridge A in the middle has an extension B touching its curve. The touchpoint is at a right angle, which disrupts the curve. The design resembles a tented arch.[Pg 78]

 

Fig. 317

Fig. 317

[Fig. 317]

[Fig. 317]

 

Figure 318 is a tented arch which approaches both the loop and the whorl type patterns. It cannot be considered a whorl, however, as the recurve on the left is spoiled by an appendage (figs. 58 and 59). Nor can it be a loop because there is no ridge count across a looping ridge. The pattern, then, is a tented arch of the type possessing two of the basic characteristics of the loop and lacking the third. The delta and the sufficient recurve are present but the ridge count is missing.

Figure 318 shows a tented arch that is similar to both loop and whorl patterns. However, it can't be classified as a whorl because the recurve on the left is interrupted by an appendage (figs. 58 and 59). It also can't be classified as a loop since there's no ridge count across a looping ridge. Therefore, the pattern is a tented arch that has two basic characteristics of a loop but is missing the third. The delta and the adequate recurve are present, but the ridge count is absent.

 

Fig. 318

Fig. 318

[Fig. 318]

[Fig. 318]

 

Figure 319 seems at first glance to be a double loop. It will be noted, however, that the inner delta formation would be located upon the only looping ridge of the upper loop formation. Since the delta would be located on the only recurve, this recurving ridge is eliminated from consideration. The pattern is classified as a loop.

Figure 319 appears at first to be a double loop. However, it's important to note that the inner delta formation is situated on the only looping ridge of the upper loop formation. Since the delta is found on the only recurve, this recurving ridge is no longer considered. The pattern is classified as a loop.

 

Fig. 319

Fig. 319

[Fig. 319]

[Fig. 319]

 

Figure 320 is a loop of two counts, with the delta at B. There is a ridge making a complete circuit present, but point A cannot be used as a delta because it answers the definition of a type line. It should be considered a delta only if it presented an angular formation. Placing the delta upon the recurve would spoil that recurve.

Figure 320 is a loop of two counts, with the delta at B. There is a ridge making a complete circuit present, but point A cannot be used as a delta because it meets the definition of a type line. It should only be considered a delta if it shows an angular formation. Placing the delta on the recurve would ruin that recurve.

 

Fig. 320

Fig. 320

[Fig. 320]

[Fig. 320]

 

Figure 321 shows two separate looping ridge formations appearing side by side and upon the same side of the delta. The core in such case is placed upon the nearer shoulder of the farther looping ridge from the delta, the two looping ridges being considered as one loop with two rods rising as high as the shoulder. The ridge count would be four (fig. 49).

Figure 321 shows two distinct looping ridge formations side by side on the same side of the delta. In this case, the core is positioned on the closer shoulder of the further looping ridge from the delta, with the two looping ridges regarded as one loop featuring two rods rising as high as the shoulder. The ridge count would be four (fig. 49).

 

Fig. 321

Fig. 321

[Fig. 321]

[Fig. 321]

 

Figure 322 is an accidental whorl. It is classified thus because it contains elements of three different patterns, the loop, the double loop, and the accidental. In such case the order of preference governs. The delta at the left is point A. The delta at the right is point C. This point becomes the delta since it is the point nearest the center of the divergence of the type lines. Point B is eliminated from consideration as a delta since type lines may not proceed from a bifurcation unless they flow parallel after the bifurcation and before diverging.[Pg 79]

Figure 322 is an accidental whorl. It's classified this way because it includes elements from three different patterns: the loop, the double loop, and the accidental. In such cases, the order of preference applies. The delta on the left is point A. The delta on the right is point C. This point becomes the delta because it is closest to the center of the divergence of the type lines. Point B is excluded from being considered as a delta since type lines can't originate from a bifurcation unless they run parallel after the bifurcation and before diverging.[Pg 79]

 

Fig. 322

Fig. 322

[Fig. 322]

[Fig. 322]

 

Figure 323 is a loop. There are two delta formations but the dots cannot be considered as obstructions crossing the line of flow at right angles. This precludes the classification of the central pocket loop type of whorl.

Figure 323 is a loop. There are two delta formations, but the dots cannot be seen as obstacles crossing the flow line at right angles. This prevents the classification of the central pocket loop type of whorl.

 

Fig. 323

Fig. 323

[Fig. 323]

[Fig. 323]

 

Figure 324 is a loop, the two recurving ridges have appendages and are considered spoiled. The pattern cannot, therefore, be a whorl even though two delta formations are present.

Figure 324 is a loop; the two curved ridges have offshoots and are regarded as spoiled. The pattern cannot, therefore, be a whorl even though two delta formations are present.

 

Fig. 324

Fig. 324

[Fig. 324]

[Fig. 324]

 

Figure 325 is classified as a tented arch. If examined closely the pattern will be seen to have an appendage abutting at a right angle between the shoulders of each possible recurve. Thus no sufficient recurve is present.

Figure 325 is classified as a tented arch. If you look closely, you’ll notice that there’s an extra piece sticking out at a right angle between the shoulders of each potential curve. Therefore, there isn’t enough of a curve present.

 

Fig. 325

Fig. 325

[Fig. 325]

[Fig. 325]

 

Figure 326 is a plain arch. There is present no angle which approaches a right angle. Points A, B, and X are merely bifurcations rather than an abutment of two ridges at an angle.

Figure 326 shows a basic arch. There are no angles close to a right angle. Points A, B, and X are just splits instead of an intersection of two ridges at an angle.

 

Fig. 326

Fig. 326

[Fig. 326]

[Fig. 326]

 

Figure 327 is a tented arch, not because of the dot, however, as it cannot be considered an upthrust. The tented arch is formed by the angle made when the curving ridge above the dot abuts upon the ridge immediately under and to the left of the dot.[Pg 81]

Figure 327 shows a tented arch, but not because of the dot, since it doesn’t qualify as an upthrust. The tented arch is created by the angle formed when the curving ridge above the dot meets the ridge directly below and to the left of the dot.[Pg 81]

 

Fig. 327

Fig. 327

[Fig. 327]

[Fig. 327]

 

Figure 328 consists of two separate looping ridge formations in juxtaposition upon the same side of a common delta. This pattern cannot be called a double loop as there is no second delta formation. In order to locate the core, the two looping ridges should be treated as one loop with two rods in the center. The core is thus placed on the far rod (actually on the left shoulder of the far loop), resulting in a ridge count of four (fig. 49).

Figure 328 shows two separate looping ridge formations next to each other on the same side of a shared delta. This pattern can't be labeled a double loop since there isn't a second delta formation. To find the core, the two looping ridges should be seen as one loop with two rods in the center. The core is then positioned on the far rod (actually on the left shoulder of the far loop), leading to a ridge count of four (fig. 49).

 

Fig. 328

Fig. 328

[Fig. 328]

[Fig. 328]

 

Figure 329 is a loop of three counts. It cannot be classified as a whorl as the only recurve is spoiled by the appendage abutting upon it at the point of contact with the line of flow.

Figure 329 is a loop with three counts. It can't be categorized as a whorl because the only recurve is disrupted by the appendage touching it at the point where it meets the line of flow.

 

Fig. 329

Fig. 329

[Fig. 329]

[Fig. 329]

 

Figure 330 is a plain arch as there is no upthrust (an upthrust must be an ending ridge), no backward looping turn, and no two ridges abutting upon each other at a sufficient angle.

Figure 330 is a simple arch since there’s no upthrust (an upthrust has to be an ending ridge), no backward looping turn, and no two ridges touching each other at a steep enough angle.

 

Fig. 330

Fig. 330

[Fig. 330]

[Fig. 330]

 

Figure 331 is a plain arch. The ending ridge at the center does not rise at a sufficient angle to be considered an upthrust, and it does not quite meet the ridge toward which it is flowing and therefore forms no angle.[Pg 82]

Figure 331 is a simple arch. The ending ridge at the center doesn't rise at a steep enough angle to be seen as an upthrust, and it doesn't quite connect with the ridge it flows toward, so it doesn't form an angle.[Pg 82]

 

Fig. 331

Fig. 331

[Fig. 331]

[Fig. 331]

 

Figure 332 is a plain arch. There are two ending ridges, but no separate delta formation is present.

Figure 332 is a simple arch. There are two endpoint ridges, but no distinct delta formation is present.

 

Fig. 332

Fig. 332

[Fig. 332]

[Fig. 332]

 

Figure 333 is a plain arch. The rising ridge at the center is curved at the top forming no angle, and does not constitute an upthrust because it is not an ending ridge.

Figure 333 is a simple arch. The rising ridge at the center curves at the top without forming an angle and does not represent an upthrust because it is not a terminal ridge.

 

Fig. 333

Fig. 333

[Fig. 333]

[Fig. 333]

 

Figure 334 is a whorl of the double loop type. Two loops and two deltas are present. It is unusual because the loops are juxtaposed instead of one flowing over the other, and one delta is almost directly over the other. The tracing is a meeting tracing.

Figure 334 shows a double loop fingerprint pattern. There are two loops and two deltas present. It's unique because the loops are side by side instead of one overlapping the other, and one delta is almost directly above the other. The tracing is a meeting tracing.

 

Fig. 334

Fig. 334

[Fig. 334]

[Fig. 334]

 

Figure 335 is a tented arch. Although there is a looping ridge, no ridge count can be obtained. The core is placed upon the end of the ridge abutting upon the inside of the loop, and so the imaginary line crosses no looping ridge, which is necessary.

Figure 335 is a tented arch. Even though there is a looping ridge, a ridge count cannot be obtained. The core is situated at the end of the ridge touching the inside of the loop, and therefore the imaginary line does not cross any looping ridge, which is essential.

 

Fig. 335

Fig. 335

[Fig. 335]

[Fig. 335]

 

Figure 336 is a plain arch. The ending ridge at the center cannot be considered an upthrust because it does not deviate from the general direction of flow of the ridges on either side. No angle is present as the ending ridge does not abut upon the curving ridge which envelopes it.[Pg 83]

Figure 336 shows a simple arch. The ridge at the center doesn’t count as an upthrust because it aligns with the general flow of the ridges on both sides. There’s no angle since the ending ridge doesn’t touch the curved ridge surrounding it.[Pg 83]

 

Fig. 336

Fig. 336

[Fig. 336]

[Fig. 336]

 

Figure 337 is a plain arch because the dot cannot be considered a delta as it is not as thick and heavy as the surrounding ridges.

Figure 337 is a simple arch because the dot can't be seen as a delta since it isn't as thick and heavy as the surrounding ridges.

 

Fig. 337

Fig. 337

[Fig. 337]

[Fig. 337]

 

Figure 338 is a tented arch consisting of two ending ridges and a delta. The short ending ridge is considered a ridge because it is slightly elongated and not a mere dot.[Pg 84]

Figure 338 is a tented arch made up of two end ridges and a delta. The short end ridge is regarded as a ridge because it is somewhat elongated and not just a small dot.[Pg 84]

 

Fig. 338

Fig. 338

[Fig. 338]

[Fig. 338]

 

In figure 339, the only question involved is where to stop tracing. The rule is: when tracing on a ridge with an upward trend, stop at the point on the upward trend which is nearest to the right delta. X is the point in this pattern.

In figure 339, the only question is where to stop tracing. The rule is: when tracing on a ridge that's going up, stop at the point on the upward path that's closest to the right delta. X is the point in this pattern.

 

Fig. 339

Fig. 339

[Fig. 339]

[Fig. 339]

 

In figure 340, the question involved is also one of tracing. In this pattern, the tracing is not on a ridge with an upward trend. The tracing, therefore, is continued until a point nearest to the right delta, or the right delta itself, is reached. This tracing is a meeting tracing.

In figure 340, the issue at hand is also about tracing. In this pattern, the tracing isn’t following a ridge that’s going up. Instead, the tracing continues until it reaches a point close to the right delta, or the right delta itself. This tracing is a meeting tracing.

 

Fig. 340

Fig. 340

[Fig. 340]

[Fig. 340]

 

There are a few constantly recurring patterns which, though not questionable or doubtful as they appear, present a peculiarly difficult problem in classifying. The patterns referred to are usually double loops, though accidental whorls and loops sometimes present the same problems. The difficulty arises when a loop is so elongated that the recurve does not appear until near the edge of a fully rolled impression or an impression that is rolled unusually far, as in figures 341 to 344.

There are a few patterns that keep showing up, which, even though they seem clear-cut, create a uniquely challenging issue when it comes to classification. The patterns in question are typically double loops, though random whorls and loops can occasionally cause the same confusion. The challenge comes into play when a loop is so stretched out that the recurve doesn't show up until near the edge of a completely rolled impression or an impression that's rolled unusually far, as seen in figures 341 to 344.

 

Figs. 341-342

Figs. 341-342

Figs. 343-344

Figs. 343-344

[Figs. 341-344]

[Figs. 341-344]

 

Figure 341, if classified as it appears, would be an accidental whorl. Figures 342 and 343 would be double loops, and illustration 344, a loop. It will be observed that these prints are rolled more fully than normal. If, however, the next time the prints are taken, they are not rolled quite[Pg 85] so far, the patterns would require a very different classification, and would show no indication of any need for referencing to their true classification. The result would be a failure to establish an identification with the original prints. The only way in which such an error may be avoided is to classify such impressions as they would appear if not so fully rolled, and to conduct a reference search in the classification which would be given to the prints when rolled to the fullest extent. Applying this rule, illustration 341 is a tented arch, referenced to a whorl. Figures 342 and 343 are loops, referenced to whorls. Figure 344 is a plain arch, referenced to a loop.

Figure 341, as it stands, would be classified as an accidental whorl. Figures 342 and 343 would be double loops, and illustration 344 would be a loop. You'll notice that these prints are rolled more completely than usual. However, if the next time the prints are taken, they aren't rolled as far, the patterns would need a completely different classification and would not show any need to refer to their true classification. This would result in an inability to establish an identification with the original prints. The only way to avoid such errors is to classify the impressions as they would appear if not so fully rolled and to conduct a reference search in the classification that corresponds to the prints when rolled completely. Following this guideline, illustration 341 is a tented arch, referenced to a whorl. Figures 342 and 343 are loops, referenced to whorls. Figure 344 is a plain arch, referenced to a loop.

No set rule can possibly be devised to enable a classifier to know with certainty where to draw the line when it is doubtful which classification should be given such a print. Individual judgment is the only standard. The test is: if the pattern, in the opinion of the classifier, is rolled to only a normal width, it should be classified as it appears. If it seems to be rolled to a width beyond the normal degree, it should be classified as if rolled only to the normal degree. Age, weight, size of fingers (as seen in[Pg 86] the plain impressions), heaviness of the ridges, and experience of the technician in taking fingerprints are all factors in arriving at the correct conclusion. The necessity for exercising the utmost care in dealing with this type of pattern cannot be too highly emphasized.

No fixed rule can be created to help a classifier know for sure where to draw the line when it's unclear which classification should be assigned to a print. Individual judgment is the only standard. The test is: if the pattern, in the classifier's opinion, is rolled to just a normal width, it should be classified as it is. If it appears to be rolled to a width beyond what is normal, it should be classified as if rolled only to the normal degree. Age, weight, finger size (as seen in[Pg 86] the plain impressions), ridge heaviness, and the technician's experience in taking fingerprints all play a role in reaching the correct conclusion. The need to exercise extreme care when handling this type of pattern cannot be overstated.

The patterns in figures 345 and 346 also have a second loop near the edge of the impression. In these two patterns, however, the second loop is very near the delta and consequently will almost invariably appear even though not rolled to the fullest extent. The foregoing rule is not applied to this type of impression. Both are classified as a whorl and referenced to a loop to take care of the rare contingency of nonappearance.

The patterns in figures 345 and 346 also have a second loop close to the edge of the impression. In these two patterns, however, the second loop is very close to the delta and will almost always be visible, even if it’s not fully rolled. The previous rule doesn't apply to this type of impression. Both are classified as a whorl and are linked to a loop to cover the rare chance of it not showing up.

 

Figs. 345-346

Figs. 345-346

[Figs. 345-346]

[Figs. 345-346]


CHAPTER IV

The Classification Formula and Extensions

 

The classification formula

At this point it is necessary to mention that when prints are classified, markings are indicated at the bottom of each finger block to reflect the type. The following symbols are used:

At this point, it's important to note that when fingerprints are classified, markings are shown at the bottom of each finger block to indicate the type. The following symbols are used:

● Under the index fingers the appropriate capital letters should be placed for every pattern except the ulnar loop.

● The correct capital letters should be placed under the index fingers for every pattern except the ulnar loop.

● Under all other fingers, the appropriate small letter should be placed for every pattern except the ulnar loop and the whorl as follows:

● Under all other fingers, the correct lowercase letter should be placed for each pattern except for the ulnar loop and the whorl as follows:

Arch   a
Tented Arch   t
Radial Loop   r

● Ulnar loops in any finger are designated by a diagonal line slanting in the direction of the loop.

● Ulnar loops in any finger are marked by a diagonal line slanting toward the direction of the loop.

● Whorls in any finger are designated by the letter "W". The classification formula may be composed of the following divisions:

● Whorls on any finger are labeled with the letter "W". The classification formula may consist of the following divisions:

1. Primary 4. Major
2. Secondary 5. Final
3. Subsecondary 6. Key

The positions in the classification line for these divisions when completely applied are as illustrated:

The positions in the classification line for these divisions when fully applied are as shown:

Key Major Primary Secondary Subsecondary Final
  Divisions Classification Classification Classification  
           
20 M 1 U IOI 10
  L 1 U IOI  
           



Key



Major



Primary



Secondary
Second
subsecondary
classification
Subsecondary



Final
  Divisions Classification Classification Classification  
           



4



O



5



U
SLM
———
MMS
IOI



10
  I 17 U IOI  

 

The primary classification: For the purpose of obtaining the primary classification, numerical values are assigned to each of the ten[Pg 88] finger spaces as shown in figure 347. Wherever a whorl appears it assumes the value of the space in which it is found. Spaces in which types of patterns other than whorls are present are disregarded in computing the primary.

The primary classification: To get the primary classification, numerical values are given to each of the ten[Pg 88] finger spaces, as shown in figure 347. If there’s a whorl, it takes the value of the space it’s located in. Spaces that have patterns other than whorls are ignored when calculating the primary.

The values are assigned as follows:

The values are assigned like this:

Fingers No. 1 and No. 216
Fingers No. 3 and No. 48
Fingers No. 5 and No. 64
Fingers No. 7 and No. 82
Fingers No. 9 and No. 101

 

Fig. 347

Fig. 347

[Fig. 347]

[Fig. 347]

 

In figure 347, it will be observed that the odd fingers (Nos. 1, 3, 5, 7, 9) contain the letter D, and the even fingers (Nos. 2, 4, 6, 8, 10) contain the letter N. The D indicates that the values of these fingers relate to the denominator, the N that they relate to the numerator. The summation of the numerical values of the whorl type patterns, if any, appearing in fingers 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, plus one, is the denominator of the primary. The summation of the values of the whorls, if any, in fingers 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, plus one, is the numerator of the primary. Where no whorl appears in a set of impressions, the primary, therefore, would be 1 over 1. The 1 that is[Pg 89] assigned to the numerator and the denominator when no whorls appear is also added, for consistency, to the value of the whorls when they do appear. It will be understood why it was originally assigned to the no-whorl group when it is considered how easily a zero might be confused with an O, which is the symbol used for an outer whorl tracing.

In figure 347, you'll see that the odd fingers (Nos. 1, 3, 5, 7, 9) have the letter D, while the even fingers (Nos. 2, 4, 6, 8, 10) have the letter N. The D signifies that the values for these fingers pertain to the denominator, while the N signifies that they pertain to the numerator. To find the denominator of the primary, you sum the numerical values of the whorl type patterns—if any—on fingers 1, 3, 5, 7, and 9, and then add one. For the numerator of the primary, you sum the values of the whorls—if any—on fingers 2, 4, 6, 8, and 10, and also add one. If no whorl appears in a set of impressions, the primary would then be 1 over 1. The 1 assigned to the numerator and denominator when no whorls appear is also included in the value of the whorls when they are present, for consistency. It becomes clear why it was initially assigned to the no-whorl group when you consider how easily a zero could be mistaken for an O, which is the symbol for an outer whorl tracing.

To obtain the primary for the prints in figure 347, the number of whorls appearing in the odd fingers is ascertained to be 2. Their positions are noted (1 in No. 1 and 1 in No. 7) and the values assigned to whorls appearing in those fingers are added together (16 plus 2 = 18). To this sum the arbitrary 1 is added, giving us the total of 19, which constitutes the denominator for this set of prints. To get the numerator, it is ascertained that there are 3 whorls appearing in the even fingers (2, 4 and 6), the values of which are added together (16 plus 8 plus 4 = 28). To this sum the 1 is added, giving a numerator of 29, and a complete primary of 29 over 19.

To get the primary for the prints in figure 347, we find that the number of whorls on the odd fingers is 2. Their positions are noted (1 in No. 1 and 1 in No. 7) and the values assigned to the whorls on those fingers are added together (16 plus 2 = 18). Adding the arbitrary 1 to this sum gives us a total of 19, which is the denominator for this set of prints. To calculate the numerator, we find that there are 3 whorls on the even fingers (2, 4, and 6), and the values of these are added together (16 plus 8 plus 4 = 28). By adding the 1 to this sum, we get a numerator of 29, resulting in a complete primary of 29 over 19.

By the word "whorl" is meant all types of whorls, including plain whorls, central pocket loops, double loops and accidentals. The tracing of the whorl does not enter into the determination of the primary.

By the term "whorl," we refer to all kinds of whorls, including plain whorls, central pocket loops, double loops, and accidentals. The tracing of the whorl does not factor into determining the primary.

The method of obtaining the primary can probably be shown best by illustrations. For example, assume that there is a whorl in the right index finger only. The value of a whorl in this finger is 16. When 1 over 1 is added the resulting primary is 17 over 1. If a whorl appears in the right thumb and right index finger, the value is 16 over 16 plus 1 over 1 giving a primary of 17 over 17. If whorls appear in both index fingers, the value is 16 over 2 plus 1 over 1 giving a primary of 17 over 3. When whorls appear in both thumbs and both index fingers, the primary is 21 over 19 and is obtained by the addition 16 plus 4 plus 1 over 16 plus 2 plus 1. If whorls appear in all 10 fingers, the primary is 32 over 32 (16 plus 8 plus 4 plus 2 plus 1 plus 1 over 16 plus 8 plus 4 plus 2 plus 1 plus 1). It will be noted that the primary classifications extend from 1 over 1 in the no-whorl group to 32 over 32 in the all-whorl group, providing 1,024 possible combinations. This does not mean that there are 1,024 even subdivisions of prints according to these primaries. Just as there is a preponderance of loops when the types of patterns are considered, there is also a preponderance of certain primaries, notably: the 1 over 1 primary, or no-whorl group; the 17 denominator; the 19 denominator; the 28 denominator, of which the 31 over 28 group is the largest; and the 32 denominator, including 2 large primary groups namely, 31 over 32 and 32 over 32. As a matter of fact, the 1 over 1 group, as a whole, contains over 25 percent of the total number of prints filed in the FBI. On the other hand, there are a number of primaries which rarely appear. It follows, therefore, that when a print is classified in one of these larger groups it is necessary to complete the classification to a greater extent than is necessary in the more unusual primaries, so that the group to be searched is small enough for convenience.[Pg 90]

The method for obtaining the primary classification is best explained with examples. For instance, if there’s a whorl on the right index finger only, its value is 16. Adding 1 gives a primary of 17. If whorls are present on both the right thumb and right index finger, the value becomes 16 over 16, plus 1 over 1, resulting in a primary of 17 over 17. If whorls are found on both index fingers, the value is 16 over 2, plus 1 over 1, leading to a primary of 17 over 3. When whorls appear on both thumbs and both index fingers, the primary is 21 over 19, derived from the addition of 16 plus 4 plus 1 over 16 plus 2 plus 1. If whorls are present on all 10 fingers, the primary is 32 over 32 (16 plus 8 plus 4 plus 2 plus 1 plus 1 over 16 plus 8 plus 4 plus 2 plus 1 plus 1). The primary classifications range from 1 over 1 in the no-whorl group to 32 over 32 in the all-whorl group, yielding 1,024 possible combinations. This doesn’t mean there are 1,024 even subdivisions of prints based on these primaries. Just as loops are more common among pattern types, certain primaries also dominate: notably, the 1 over 1 primary (no-whorl group), the 17 denominator, the 19 denominator, and the 28 denominator, of which the 31 over 28 group is the largest; and the 32 denominator, which includes two large primary groups, specifically 31 over 32 and 32 over 32. In fact, the 1 over 1 group comprises over 25 percent of all prints filed with the FBI. Conversely, there are some primaries that rarely occur. Consequently, when a print falls into one of these larger groups, it’s essential to complete the classification more thoroughly than with the more unusual primaries, so the search group remains manageable.[Pg 90]

In connection with the counting of whorl values to obtain the primary, it might be noted that when the whorls outnumber the other patterns more speed can be achieved by counting those patterns and subtracting rather than by adding the whorls. This procedure should not be followed until enough experience is acquired so that it may be noted at a glance where whorls are not present.

In relation to counting whorl values to get the primary, it's worth mentioning that when there are more whorls than other patterns, it's quicker to count those patterns and subtract them, instead of adding the whorls. You shouldn't use this method until you have enough experience to easily spot where there aren't any whorls.

The experienced classifier can tell in what fingers whorls are present by a glance at a primary classification. For example, a primary of 5 over 17 could mean that there are whorls in the thumbs only.

The skilled classifier can identify where whorls are located just by looking at a primary classification. For instance, a primary of 5 over 17 might indicate that there are whorls only in the thumbs.

 

Fig. 348

Fig. 348

[Fig. 348]

[Fig. 348]

 

The secondary classification: After the primary classification, the fingerprints are subdivided further by using a secondary classification. Before going into detail, it should be noted that after the primary is obtained the entire remaining portion of the classification formula is based upon the arrangement of the impressions appearing in the right hand as the numerator over the impressions appearing in the left hand as the denominator. The arrangement of the even over the uneven fingers is discarded after the primary is obtained. The secondary classification appears just to the right of the fractional numerals which represent the primary. It is shown in the formula by capital letters representing the basic types of patterns appearing in the index fingers of each hand, that[Pg 91] of the right hand being the numerator and that of the left hand being the denominator (fig. 348). There are five basic types of patterns which can appear.

The secondary classification: After the primary classification, fingerprints are further divided using a secondary classification. Before diving into details, it's important to note that once the primary classification is determined, the remaining part of the classification formula is based on the arrangement of the impressions on the right hand as the numerator over the impressions on the left hand as the denominator. The arrangement of even and odd fingers is ignored after the primary classification is established. The secondary classification is located just to the right of the fractional numerals that represent the primary classification. It is indicated in the formula by capital letters that represent the basic types of patterns found in the index fingers of each hand, with that[Pg 91] of the right hand as the numerator and that of the left hand as the denominator (fig. 348). There are five basic types of patterns that can appear.

1. Arch  A
2. Tented Arch  T
3. Radial Loop  R
4. Ulnar Loop  U
5. Whorl  W

 

Fig. 349

Fig. 349

[Fig. 349]

[Fig. 349]

 

Secondary classification (small-letter group): Prints with an arch or tented arch in any finger or a radial loop in any except the index fingers constitute the small-letter group of the secondary classification. Such "small letters," with the exception of those appearing in the index fingers, are brought up into the classification formula in their proper relative positions immediately adjacent to the index fingers (fig. 349). A dash is used to indicate the absence of each small letter between the index fingers and another small letter or between two small letters, as

Secondary classification (small-letter group): Prints with an arch or tented arch on any finger or a radial loop on any finger except the index fingers make up the small-letter group of the secondary classification. These "small letters," except for those on the index fingers, are incorporated into the classification formula in their correct relative positions right next to the index fingers (fig. 349). A dash is used to show the absence of each small letter between the index fingers and another small letter or between two small letters, as

1 aUa-t and 1 aU-t.
1 R-a 1 1 U-a

Thus, if a radial loop appears in the right thumb,[Pg 92] the small letter "r" would be brought up in the numerator column of the classification formula and placed just to the left of the capital letter representing the index finger. Similarly, if an arch or tented arch or a radial loop would appear in the middle, ring, or little finger of the hand, the small letter representing such a pattern would be placed on the classification line to the right of the secondary in the numerator column if the letter is present in the right hand, and in the denominator column if in the left hand. When two or more small letters of the same type occur immediately adjacent to each other, they are indicated thus:

Thus, if a radial loop appears in the right thumb,[Pg 92] the small letter "r" would be placed in the numerator column of the classification formula, right next to the capital letter for the index finger. Similarly, if an arch, tented arch, or radial loop appears in the middle, ring, or little finger, the small letter for that pattern would be shown on the classification line to the right of the secondary in the numerator column if it’s from the right hand, and in the denominator column if it’s from the left hand. When two or more small letters of the same type are right next to each other, they are indicated like this:

1 rU-2a and 1 aTa-a.
1 tU3a 1 tA2at

The small-letter groups are of vital importance to the classification system, as they are of relatively infrequent occurrence, constituting approximately 7 to 10 percent of all patterns. Generally speaking, since these patterns are of such rare occurrence, their very presence often enables the classifier to dispense with the usual subsecondary classification and the major division which in the majority of cases are used in the larger groups.

The lowercase letter groups are really important to the classification system because they happen relatively rarely, making up about 7 to 10 percent of all patterns. Generally, since these patterns are so uncommon, just their presence often allows the classifier to skip the usual secondary classification and the major division that are typically used in the larger groups.

The subsecondary classification (grouping of loops and whorls): In classifying prints it is necessary to subdivide the secondary groups. This is accomplished by grouping according to the ridge counts of loops and the ridge tracings of whorls. The first of the groups filed in order, which it will be necessary to so subdivide, would ordinarily be the

The subsecondary classification (grouping of loops and whorls): When classifying prints, it’s important to break down the secondary groups. This is done by organizing them based on the ridge counts of loops and the ridge patterns of whorls. The first group that needs to be subdivided in order is usually the

1 R
1 R

group where no small letters appear. The Federal Bureau of Investigation, however, has found it necessary to extend this division to many of the small-letter groups which become cumbersome. The subsecondary is placed on the classification line just to the right of the secondary. Ridge counts are translated into small and large, represented by symbols I and O. The whorl tracings are brought up as I, M, or O denoting inner, meeting or outer ridge tracings of the whorl types. Only six fingers may be involved in the subsecondary—numbers 2, 3, 4, 7, 8, and 9.

group where no lowercase letters appear. The Federal Bureau of Investigation, however, has found it necessary to extend this division to many of the lowercase groups that become cumbersome. The subsecondary is placed on the classification line just to the right of the secondary. Ridge counts are translated into small and large, represented by symbols I and O. The whorl tracings are brought up as I, M, or O denoting inner, meeting, or outer ridge tracings of the whorl types. Only six fingers may be involved in the subsecondary—numbers 2, 3, 4, 7, 8, and 9.

A ridge count of 1 to 9, inclusive, in the index fingers is brought up into the subsecondary formula as I. A count of 10 or more is brought up as O. In the middle fingers a count of from 1 to 10, inclusive, is brought up as I, and 11 or more is O. In the ring fingers a count of from 1 to 13 is brought up as I, and 14 or more is O. A loop subsecondary could appear in the classification formula as

A ridge count of 1 to 9, including both, in the index fingers is categorized as I. A count of 10 or more is categorized as O. In the middle fingers, a count from 1 to 10, including both, is categorized as I, and 11 or more is O. In the ring fingers, a count from 1 to 13 is categorized as I, and 14 or more is O. A loop subsecondary could appear in the classification formula as

OIO.
IIO

Analyzing this example of a subsecondary, one will know that in the index, middle, and ring fingers of the right hand there are counts of over 9, under 11, and over 13, while in the left hand there are in the index, middle, and ring fingers, counts of under 10, under 11, over 13, respectively. The subsecondary classification, therefore, relates to the groupings of the prints, and no difficulty should be experienced in ascertaining whether the I and O arrangement in the[Pg 93] subsecondary relates to loops or whorls when analyzing a classification, because this information can be obtained from the primary classification. Figure 350 is an example illustrating the subsecondary in addition to other divisions of the classification formula.

Analyzing this example of a subsecondary, you'll see that in the index, middle, and ring fingers of the right hand there are counts of over 9, under 11, and over 13, while in the left hand, the index, middle, and ring fingers show counts of under 10, under 11, and over 13, respectively. The subsecondary classification, therefore, relates to the groupings of the prints, and it shouldn’t be difficult to determine whether the I and O arrangement in the[Pg 93] subsecondary corresponds to loops or whorls when analyzing a classification, because this information can be obtained from the primary classification. Figure 350 is an example illustrating the subsecondary along with other divisions of the classification formula.

 

Fig. 350

Fig. 350

[Fig. 350]

[Fig. 350]

 

The chart, figure 351, will illustrate the manner in which the ridge counts are translated into the symbols I and O so they may be grouped and sequenced with the whorl tracings I, M and O.

The chart, figure 351, will show how the ridge counts are converted into the symbols I and O so they can be grouped and arranged with the whorl tracings I, M, and O.

 

Fig. 351

Fig. 351

[Fig. 351]

[Fig. 351]

 

The major division: The major division is placed just to the left of the primary in the classification formula. Where whorls appear in the thumbs the major division reflects the whorl tracings just as the subsecondary does. For example, a major division of I over M in the primary 5 over 17 would reflect an inner-traced whorl over a meeting-traced whorl in the thumbs. Where loops appear in the thumbs, however, a table is used to translate the ridge counts into the small, medium, or large groups, designated by the letters S, M, L. An expanding table is used for the right thumb when large-count loops appear in the left thumb, as shown in the chart (fig. 351). This table is used because it affords a more equitable distribution of prints as a whole, for filing purposes within the groups indicated.[Pg 94]

The major division: The major division is positioned just to the left of the primary in the classification formula. When whorls show up in the thumbs, the major division reflects the whorl patterns just like the subsecondary does. For instance, a major division of I over M in the primary 5 over 17 would indicate an inner-traced whorl over a meeting-traced whorl in the thumbs. When loops appear in the thumbs, a table is used to translate the ridge counts into small, medium, or large groups, labeled as S, M, L. An expanding table is utilized for the right thumb when large-count loops are present in the left thumb, as illustrated in the chart (fig. 351). This table is employed because it provides a more balanced distribution of prints overall, for filing within the designated groups.[Pg 94]

Table for major divisions of loops:

Table for major divisions of loops:

Left thumb denominator Right thumb numerator
1 to 11, inclusive, S (small) { 1  to 11,  inclusive, S (small).
{ 12 to 16, inclusive, M (medium).
{ 17 or more ridges, L (large).
12 to 16, inclusive, M (medium) { 1 to 11, inclusive, S (small).
{ 12 to 16, inclusive, M (medium).
{ 17 or more ridges, L (large).
17 or more ridges, L (large) { 1 to 17, inclusive, S (small).
{ 18 to 22, inclusive, M (medium).
{ 23 or more ridges, L (large).

The fingerprint card appearing in figure 352 shows a major division of L over L, which is obtained by counting the ridges (24 in the right thumb and 18 in the left thumb) which, according to the table, is translated into L in both thumbs.

The fingerprint card in figure 352 shows a major division of L over L, which is determined by counting the ridges (24 in the right thumb and 18 in the left thumb) that, according to the table, corresponds to L in both thumbs.

The final: It is, of course, desirable to have a definite sequence or order of filing the prints within the subdivided groups. This order is attained through the use of the final, which is based upon the ridge count of the loop in the right little finger. It is indicated at the extreme right of the numerator in the classification. Note figure 352. If a loop does not appear in the right little finger, a loop in the left little finger may be used. It is then indicated at the extreme right of the denominator (fig. 353). If no loops appear in the little fingers, a whorl may be used to obtain a final, counting from left delta to core if in the right hand and from right delta to core if in the left hand. If there are two or more cores (usually applies to accidental whorls), the ridge count is made from left delta (right hand)[Pg 95] or right delta (left hand) to the core which is the least number of ridges distant from that delta. An exception is made in the case of the double loop. The double loop is counted from the delta to the core of the upright loop. Where loops of a double loop are horizontal, the nearest core is used. Should both little fingers be a or t, no final is used. The use of a whorl in a little finger for a final is required only in connection with a large group or collection of prints, such as the 32 over 32 primary.

The final: It’s definitely important to have a clear sequence or order for filing the prints within the subdivided groups. This order is achieved using the final, which is based on the ridge count of the loop in the right little finger. It’s shown at the far right of the numerator in the classification. See figure 352. If there’s no loop in the right little finger, you can use a loop from the left little finger. In that case, it’s indicated at the far right of the denominator (fig. 353). If there are no loops in either little finger, a whorl can be used to determine a final, counting from the left delta to the core if it’s the right hand and from the right delta to the core if it’s the left hand. If there are two or more cores (which usually happens with accidental whorls), the ridge count is taken from the left delta (right hand) [Pg 95] or right delta (left hand) to the core that is closest in terms of ridge count to that delta. There’s an exception for the double loop. The double loop is counted from the delta to the core of the upright loop. If the loops of a double loop are horizontal, you use the nearest core. If both little fingers show a or t, no final is used. A whorl in a little finger for a final is only necessary when dealing with a large group or collection of prints, like the 32 over 32 primary.

 

[Fig. 352]

[Fig. 352]

 

The key: The key is obtained by counting the ridges of the first loop appearing on the fingerprint card (beginning with the right thumb), exclusive of the little fingers which are never considered for the key as they are reserved for the final. The key, no matter where found, is always placed to the extreme left of the numerator of the classification formula (fig. 353).

The key: The key is figured out by counting the ridges of the first loop on the fingerprint card (starting with the right thumb), not including the little fingers since those are saved for the final. The key, regardless of where it is found, is always placed at the far left of the numerator of the classification formula (fig. 353).

 

Fig. 353

Fig. 353

[Fig. 353]

[Fig. 353]

 

Extensions

The second subsecondary classification: When a group of fingerprints becomes so large that it is cumbersome and unwieldy, even though fully extended, it can be subdivided further by using a second subsecondary division, which is brought up into the classification formula directly[Pg 96] above the subsecondary, and for which the symbols S, M and L are used. The following table is used:

The second subsecondary classification: When a group of fingerprints gets so big that it’s unwieldy, even when fully extended, it can be further divided using a second subsecondary division, which is incorporated into the classification formula directly[Pg 96] above the subsecondary, and symbols S, M, and L are used for this. The following table is used:

Index Middle Ring
1 to 5, inclusive, S. 1 to 8, inclusive, S. 1 to 10, inclusive, S.
6 to 12, inclusive, M. 9 to 14, inclusive, M. 11 to 18, inclusive, M.
13 or more, L. 15 or more, L. 19 or more, L.

If this table is referred to, a study of figure 352 will demonstrate the use of the second subsecondary.

If you look at this table, a study of figure 352 will show how to use the second subsecondary.

WCDX extension: In the extension used in the Federal Bureau of Investigation for the large whorl groups, the type of whorl is designated by the symbols W, C, D, or X for the index fingers and w, c, d, or x for all other fingers, according to its classification as defined in figure 354. These symbols are used for subclassification purposes only and are brought up into the classification formula directly above the subsecondary in their respective positions, the right hand being the numerator, the left hand being the denominator.

WCDX extension: In the extension used by the Federal Bureau of Investigation for large whorl groups, the type of whorl is marked by the symbols W, C, D, or X for the index fingers and w, c, d, or x for all other fingers, based on the classification defined in figure 354. These symbols are only used for subclassification purposes and are included in the classification formula directly above the subsecondary in their respective positions, with the right hand as the numerator and the left hand as the denominator.

 

Fig. 354

Fig. 354

[Fig. 354]

[Fig. 354]

 

Special loop extension: In the all-loop group

Special loop extension: In the all-loop group

(1R-U)
(1R-U),

the following special loop extension may be used, utilizing the ridge counts in fingers Nos. 2, 3, 4, 7, 8, 9, and, if necessary, No. 10:[Pg 97]

the following special loop extension may be used, utilizing the ridge counts in fingers 2, 3, 4, 7, 8, 9, and, if necessary, 10:[Pg 97]

Ridge CountsValue
1 to 4, inclusive1
5 to 8, inclusive2
9 to 12, inclusive3
13 to 16, inclusive4
17 to 20, inclusive5
21 to 24, inclusive6
25 and over7

The resulting values in this extension are brought up into the classification formula directly above the subsecondary in their respective positions, the right hand being the numerator, the left hand being the denominator.

The resulting values in this extension are brought into the classification formula right above the subsecondary in their respective positions, with the right side being the numerator and the left side being the denominator.

In addition to the extensions already mentioned, fingerprint groups may be divided into male and female, and by age (either by year or by arbitrarily setting an age limit, beyond which a print bearing such an age would be filed separately in a "Reference" or a "Presumptive Dead" file).

In addition to the extensions already mentioned, fingerprint groups can also be categorized into male and female, as well as by age (either by year or by deciding on an age limit, beyond which a print with that age would be stored separately in a "Reference" or a "Presumptive Dead" file).

In the files of the Federal Bureau of Investigation, all prints bearing an age of 55 through 74 are filed in the "Reference" group and all prints bearing an age of 75 years or more are filed in the "Presumptive Dead" file. Persons 75 years of age or older, in regard to crime, may be considered as generally inactive and thus are filed as "Presumptive Dead." Such a group provides for removing from the other files the cards concerning those of whom no notice is ever received as to death.

In the files of the Federal Bureau of Investigation, all fingerprints of individuals aged 55 to 74 are categorized in the "Reference" group, while those aged 75 and older are placed in the "Presumptive Dead" file. Individuals who are 75 or older, in relation to crime, are typically seen as generally inactive and are therefore listed as "Presumptive Dead." This classification helps to eliminate cards from other files for individuals who are never reported as deceased.

A separate file should be maintained for deceased persons, for possible future reference.

A separate file should be kept for deceased individuals for any future reference that may be needed.

A separate file should be maintained for all prints bearing amputations and which have an unequivocal statement or marking from the contributor to that effect.

A separate file should be kept for all prints showing amputations and which have a clear statement or marking from the contributor indicating this.

Permanent scars also may be utilized for this purpose, giving three more groupings: those prints having permanent scars in the right hand, those having a scar in the left, and those in which scars appear in both hands. A separate file may be maintained for mutilated prints whether or not the permanent-scar division is used. This is usually composed of prints so badly mutilated, or so mutilated about the cores and deltas, that intentional mutilation is suspected.

Permanent scars can also be used for this purpose, creating three additional categories: prints with permanent scars on the right hand, those with a scar on the left, and those with scars on both hands. A separate file can be kept for mutilated prints, regardless of whether the permanent-scar classification is applied. This file typically contains prints that are so severely mutilated, or so damaged around the cores and deltas, that intentional mutilation is suspected.


CHAPTER V

Classification of Scarred Patterns—Amputations—Missing at Birth

 

Classification of scarred patterns

Emphasis should be placed upon the necessity for fully referencing all scarred patterns. In connection with their proper classification, the following rules should be observed:

Emphasis should be placed on the need for fully referencing all scarred patterns. Regarding their proper classification, the following rules should be followed:

● When an impression is so scarred that neither the general type of pattern nor the ridge tracing or count can be determined with reasonable accuracy, the impression should be given both the general type value and the subclassification value of the corresponding finger of the other hand.

● When an impression is so damaged that neither the overall pattern type nor the ridge tracing or count can be identified with reasonable accuracy, the impression should be assigned both the overall type value and the subclassification value of the corresponding finger of the opposite hand.

● When an impression is partially scarred, i.e., large scars about the core so that the general type cannot be determined with reasonable accuracy, but the ridges allow reasonably accurate subclassifications by ridge tracings or counting, the impression should be given the primary value of the pattern of the corresponding finger and the subclassification value as indicated by the ridges of partially scarred impressions.

● When an impression is partially scarred, meaning there are large scars around the core that prevent the general type from being identified with reasonable accuracy, but the ridges still allow for reasonably accurate subclassifications through ridge tracings or counting, the impression should be assigned the primary value of the pattern of the corresponding finger and the subclassification value based on the ridges of the partially scarred impressions.

● When an impression is partially scarred and the general type of pattern can be determined with reasonable accuracy, but the ridges cannot be traced or counted so as to fall within the proper subsecondary classification, the impression should be given the ridge count or tracing value of the corresponding finger of the other hand, if the corresponding finger is of the same general type. If the corresponding finger is not of the same general type, the scarred impression should be given the probable value and referenced to all other possibilities.

● When an impression is partially scarred and the overall type of pattern can be identified with reasonable accuracy, but the ridges can't be traced or counted to fit within the correct subsecondary classification, the impression should be assigned the ridge count or tracing value of the matching finger on the other hand, if that finger is of the same general type. If the matching finger isn't of the same general type, the scarred impression should be given a probable value and referenced to all other possibilities.

● When an impression is so scarred that neither the general type of pattern nor the ridge tracing or count can be determined with reasonable accuracy, and it so happens that the corresponding finger of the other hand is similarly scarred, both patterns are given the arbitrary value of whorls with meeting tracings.

● When a fingerprint is so damaged that neither the overall pattern type nor the ridge detail can be determined accurately, and it just so happens that the matching finger on the other hand is also similarly damaged, both patterns are assigned the arbitrary value of whorls with connected lines.

In figure 355, the pattern is entirely obliterated. It could have been a small whorl, a small ulnar or radial loop, an arch, or a tented arch. If the opposite finger were an arch or tented arch or whorl, this impression would be classified as arch, tented arch, or whorl (with the same tracing). If the opposite finger were a small-count loop, this would be classified as a loop of the same count. If the opposite finger were a large-count loop, this impression would be given the count of the opposite finger even though it could never have had that count. If the opposite[Pg 99] finger were scarred in the same fashion or were amputated or missing, both impressions would be classified as whorls with meeting tracings.

In figure 355, the pattern is completely erased. It could have been a small whorl, a small ulnar or radial loop, an arch, or a tented arch. If the opposite finger showed an arch, tented arch, or whorl, this impression would be categorized as an arch, tented arch, or whorl (with the same tracing). If the opposite finger had a small-count loop, this would be classified as a loop of the same count. If the opposite finger had a large-count loop, this impression would take the count of the opposite finger even though it could never have had that count. If the opposite[Pg 99] finger had scars in the same way or was amputated or missing, both impressions would be classified as whorls with matching tracings.

 

Fig. 355

Fig. 355

[Fig. 355]

[Fig. 355]

 

In figure 356, the general type of the pattern could have been loop (ulnar if in the right hand) or whorl. If the opposite finger were a whorl this would be classified as a whorl, and with the same tracing. If a radial loop were opposite, this would be classified as an ulnar loop (if in the right hand). The ridge count can be obtained with a fair degree of accuracy. If an arch or tented arch were opposite, this impression would be classified as a loop because it looks as if it had been a loop.

In figure 356, the general type of the pattern could either be a loop (ulnar if it's on the right hand) or a whorl. If the finger on the opposite side has a whorl, it would be classified as a whorl, following the same tracing. If there's a radial loop on the opposite side, it would be classified as an ulnar loop (if it's on the right hand). You can get the ridge count with a pretty good level of accuracy. If an arch or a tented arch is on the opposite side, this impression would be classified as a loop because it appears to be a loop.

 

Fig. 356

Fig. 356

[Fig. 356]

[Fig. 356]

 

In figure 357, the ridge count cannot be determined accurately but it would be classified as a loop, no matter what the opposite finger might be. If the opposite finger were a loop with a count of from 6 to 17, this[Pg 100] impression would be given that count. If the count of the opposite loop were less or more than 6 to 17, the count for this finger would be given I or O in the subsecondary classification depending upon whether the opposite finger was I or O, but would not be given less than 6 nor more than 17 counts as its possibility is limited to those counts.

In figure 357, the ridge count can’t be determined accurately, but it would still be classified as a loop, regardless of the opposite finger's pattern. If the opposite finger is a loop with a count between 6 and 17, this[Pg 100] impression would match that count. If the count of the opposite loop is less than or more than 6 to 17, this finger would be classified as I or O in the subsecondary classification based on whether the opposite finger was I or O, but it wouldn’t get a count lower than 6 or higher than 17 since those counts are its only possibilities.

 

Fig. 357

Fig. 357

[Fig. 357]

[Fig. 357]

 

A pattern with a scar similar to either scar in figures 358 and 359 would always be given a loop as it could be seen readily that there was no possibility of its having been any other type of pattern.

A pattern with a scar similar to either scar in figures 358 and 359 would always be classified as a loop since it's clear that it couldn't be any other type of pattern.

 

Fig. 358

Fig. 358

Fig. 359

Fig. 359

[Figs. 358-359]

[Figs. 358-359]

 

Classification of amputations and fingers missing at birth

When one or more amputations appear upon a fingerprint card, it may be filed separately from those having no amputations in order to facilitate searching. It is to be noted that before it may be filed in the amputation group, the card must contain a definite and unequivocal statement or marking by the contributor to the effect that a certain finger or fingers have been amputated or were missing at birth. This prevents the appearance on later cards of impressions of fingers thought to have been amputated but which in reality were merely injured and bandaged when previous prints were submitted.

When one or more amputations show up on a fingerprint card, it can be filed separately from those that have no amputations to make searching easier. It's important to note that before it can be filed in the amputation group, the card must have a clear and definite statement or marking from the contributor indicating that a specific finger or fingers have been amputated or were missing at birth. This helps avoid any confusion on later cards where impressions of fingers that were thought to be amputated might actually just be of fingers that were injured and bandaged when previous prints were submitted.

If one finger is amputated, it is given a classification identical with that of the opposite finger, including pattern and ridge count, or tracing, and referenced to every other possible classification.

If a finger is amputated, it’s assigned a classification that matches the opposite finger, including the pattern and ridge count, or tracing, and is compared to every other possible classification.

If two or more fingers are amputated, they are given classifications identical with the fingers opposite, with no additional references.

If two or more fingers are amputated, they are classified the same way as the fingers on the opposite hand, with no extra references.

If two amputated fingers are opposite each other, both are given the classification of whorls with meeting tracings.

If two amputated fingers are facing each other, both are classified as whorls with connecting patterns.

When a fingerprint card bearing a notation of fingers missing at birth is classified, the missing fingers should be treated as amputations in that they are given the identical classifications of the opposite fingers and are filed in the amputation group. As these fingers are missing from a pre[Pg 101]natal cause, they would have always received the identical classification of the opposite finger on any previous occasion.

When a fingerprint card notes that fingers are missing since birth, those missing fingers should be treated like amputations. They are given the same classifications as the fingers on the opposite hand and are filed under the amputation category. Since these fingers are absent due to a prenatal cause, they would have always received the same classification as the corresponding finger in any past instances.

If all 10 fingers are amputated or missing at birth, the classification will be

If all 10 fingers are amputated or missing at birth, the classification will be

M 32 W MMM.
M 32 W MMM

If both hands are amputated or missing at birth, the footprints should be taken as they, too, bear friction ridges with definite patterns. A footprint file is maintained by the FBI for identification purposes in instances where the subject has all fingers amputated or missing at birth.

If both hands are amputated or missing at birth, footprints should be taken since they also have friction ridges with clear patterns. The FBI keeps a footprint file for identification in cases where the person has all fingers amputated or missing at birth.

Partially amputated fingers often present very complex problems and careful consideration should be given to them. The question often arises as to the appropriate groups in which they should be filed, i.e., amputations or nonamputations. As no definite rule may be applied, it is a matter of experience and judgment as to their preferred classification.

Partially amputated fingers often present very complex challenges, and they require careful consideration. It frequently raises the question of which categories they should be classified under, namely amputations or non-amputations. Since there isn't a clear rule that can be applied, it ultimately comes down to experience and judgment regarding their preferred classification.

In those instances in which a partially amputated finger has half or more than half of the pattern area missing, it is given the classification of the opposite finger. It will be filed in the amputation group under the classification of the opposite finger and reference searches should be conducted in all possible classifications in the nonamputation groups. If two or more of the fingers are amputated in this manner, they are given the classification of the opposite fingers only and are governed by the rules concerning amputations.

In cases where a partially amputated finger is missing half or more of its pattern area, it is classified as the opposite finger. It will be filed in the amputation group under the classification of the opposite finger, and reference searches should be conducted in all possible classifications in the nonamputation groups. If two or more fingers are amputated this way, they receive the classification of the opposite fingers only and follow the rules regarding amputations.

Generally, a "tip amputation," or one which has less than half of the first joint amputated, will always be printed in the future. Therefore, a partially amputated finger with less than half of the pattern area missing is classified as it appears and is referenced to the opposite finger. It will be filed in the nonamputation group and reference searches should be conducted under the classification of the opposite finger, and in the amputation group. It must be referenced this way even though it never could have originally had the classification of the opposite finger.

Generally, a "tip amputation," or one where less than half of the first joint is amputated, will always be recorded in the future. Therefore, a partially amputated finger with less than half of the pattern area missing is classified as it appears and is referred to the opposite finger. It will be filed in the nonamputation group, and reference searches should be conducted under the classification of the opposite finger and in the amputation group. It must be referenced this way even though it never could have originally had the classification of the opposite finger.

Classification of bandaged or imprinted fingers

As noted in the chapter pertaining to "Problems in the Taking of Inked Fingerprints," an indication to the effect "recently injured, bandaged" is not sufficient to file a fingerprint card. It is obvious that a fingerprint card bearing these notations cannot be properly classified or filed. If the injury is temporary, and if possible, these prints should not be taken until after healing.

As mentioned in the chapter about "Problems in the Taking of Inked Fingerprints," a note saying "recently injured, bandaged" isn't enough to submit a fingerprint card. It's clear that a fingerprint card with these remarks can't be accurately classified or filed. If the injury is temporary, and if possible, these prints should be taken only after the person has healed.

If fingers are injured to the extent that it is impossible to secure inked impressions by special inking devices, the unprinted fingers are given classifications identical with the classifications of the fingers opposite. If only one finger is lacking, reference searches should be conducted in every possible classification. If more than one finger is lacking, they should be given the classifications of the opposite fingers, but no reference[Pg 102] searches should be conducted. If there are two lacking, opposite each other, they should be classified as whorls with meeting tracings.

If fingers are injured so much that it's impossible to secure inked impressions with special inking devices, the unprinted fingers will receive classifications that match those of the opposite fingers. If just one finger is missing, reference searches should be done in every possible classification. If more than one finger is missing, they should be assigned the classifications of the opposite fingers, but no reference[Pg 102] searches should be carried out. If two fingers are missing and they are opposite each other, they should be classified as whorls with meeting tracings.

If, however, in the case of an injured finger, observation is made of the ridges of the finger itself and indicated on the print, this classification should be, insofar as it is possible, utilized. For example, a missing impression labeled "ulnar loop of about 8 counts" by the individual taking the prints, should be searched in the subsecondary as both I and O but should not be referenced as a pattern other than a loop. If the finger is used as the final, or key, it should be searched enough counts on each side of 8 to allow for possible error in the counting by the contributor using his naked eye.

If there’s an injured finger, and the ridges on that finger are observed and indicated on the print, this classification should be used as much as possible. For instance, if there’s a missing impression labeled "ulnar loop of about 8 counts" by the person taking the prints, it should be searched in the subsecondary as both I and O, but it shouldn’t be labeled as anything other than a loop. If the finger is used as the final or key reference, there should be a search for enough counts on each side of 8 to account for any possible counting errors made by the contributor using their naked eye.


CHAPTER VI

Filing Sequence

 

The sequence must be arranged properly at all times to make possible the most accurate work. Prints are sequenced and filed in this order, according to:

The sequence must always be organized properly to ensure the most accurate work. Prints are arranged and filed in this order, according to:

I. Primary:

I. Main:

1 to 32.
1 32

In the primary classification the denominator remains constant until all numerator figures have been exhausted from 1 to 32. All prints with the primary 1 over 1 are filed together. These are followed by 2 over 1, 3 over 1, 4 over 1, etc., until 32 over 1 is reached. The next primary is 1 over 2, then 2 over 2, etc., until 32 over 2 is reached. Eventually, through the use of each denominator figure and the elimination of each numerator over each denominator, the 32 over 32 primary will be reached.

In the main classification, the denominator stays the same until all numerator figures from 1 to 32 have been used up. All prints with the primary 1 over 1 are grouped together. This is followed by 2 over 1, 3 over 1, 4 over 1, and so on, until reaching 32 over 1. The next primary is 1 over 2, then 2 over 2, and so forth, until getting to 32 over 2. Eventually, using each denominator figure and eliminating each numerator over each denominator, the 32 over 32 primary will be reached.

Even in the smaller collections of fingerprints, it will be found that the groups which are arranged under the individual primaries filed in sequence, from 1 over 1 to 32 over 32, will be too voluminous for expeditious searching.

Even in the smaller collections of fingerprints, it will be found that the groups organized under the individual primaries filed in order, from 1 over 1 to 32 over 32, will be too large for quick searching.

II. Secondary:

II. Secondary:

A. Secondary small-letter group:

A. Secondary lowercase letter group:

A r to W3r.
A r W3r

Most intricate of all the individual sequences is the small-letter sequence. It is less difficult if the following method is used:

Most complex of all the individual sequences is the lowercase letter sequence. It's easier if you use the following method:

1. Sequence according to the patterns in the index fingers, grouped

1. Organize according to the patterns in the index fingers, sorted by category.

A to W.
A W

When small letters are present, there are 25 possible combinations which can appear in the index fingers. They are as follows:

When lowercase letters are used, there are 25 possible combinations that can appear in the index fingers. They are:

A T R U W
- - - - -
A A A A A

A T R U W
- - - - -
T T T T T

A T R U W
- - - - -
R R R R R

A T U R W
- - - - -
U U U U U

A T U R W
- - - - -
W W W W W

2. Within each group sequence:

2. In each group sequence:

a. The denominator, by—

a. The denominator, by—

(1) Count of the small letters (lesser preceding the greater).

(1) Count of the lowercase letters (less than the uppercase).

(2) Position of the small letters (those to the left preceding those to the right).

(2) Positioning the lowercase letters (the ones on the left before those on the right).

(3) Type of small letter (sequence a, t, r).

(3) Type of lowercase letters (sequence a, t, r).

b. The numerator, by—

b. The numerator, by—

(1) Count.

(1) Count.

(2) Position.

(2) Location.

(3) Type.

(3) Type.

Thus

So

A precedes T
A A

 

A precedes A
rAt A3t

 

A precedes A
aA Aa

 

A precedes A
At Ar

 

aA precedes aAa
aAr aAr

 

rA precedes Ar
aA2a aA2a

 

aAtat precedes aAtar
tA3r tA3r

 

The following table represents the full sequence of the denominator of the group having A over A in the index fingers. The full sequence as listed may be used as the numerator for each denominator as set out below. Following the group with A over A in the index fingers is the group with T over A in the index fingers, the sequence being the same otherwise. Then R over A, U over A, A over T to rW3r over rW3r.

The following table shows the complete sequence of the denominator of the group with A over A in the index fingers. The full sequence provided can be used as the numerator for each denominator as outlined below. After the group with A over A in the index fingers comes the group with T over A in the index fingers, with the sequence being the same otherwise. Then it follows with R over A, U over A, A over T, up to rW3r over rW3r.

AtAraaA2attA2tr
aAtArtaA2artAtra
tAtA2raAatatAtrt
rArA2aaAa2ttAt2r
AarAataAatrtAr2a
AtrAaraAaratArat
ArrAtaaAarttArar
aAarA2taAa2rtArta
aAtrAtraAt2atAr2t
aArrAraaAtattArtr
tAarArtaAtartA2ra
tAtrA2raA2tatA2rt
tArA3aaA3ttA3r
rAaA2ataA2trrA3a
rAtA2araAtrarA2at
rArAataaAtrtrA2ar
A2aAa2taAt2rrAata
AatAatraAr2arAa2t
AarAaraaAratrAatr
AtaAartaArarrAara
A2tAa2raArtarAart
AtrAt2aaAr2trAa2r
AraAtataArtrrAt2a
ArtAtaraA2rarAtat
A2rA2taaA2rtrAtar
aA2aA3taA3rrA2ta
aAatA2trtA3arA3t
aAarAtratA2atrA2tr
aAtaAtrttA2arrAtra
aA2tAt2rtAatarAtrt
aAtrAr2atAa2trAt2r
aAraArattAatrrAr2a
aArtArartAararArat
aA2rArtatAartrArar
tA2aAr2ttAa2rrArta
tAatArtrtAt2arAr2t
tAarA2ratAtatrArtr
tAtaA2rttAtarrA2ra
tA2tA3rtA2tarA2rt
tAtraA3atA3trA3r

 

B. Secondary loop and whorl group:

B. Secondary loop and whorl group:

R to W.
R W

When no small letters are present, there are 9 possible combinations which can appear in the index fingers. They are as follows:

When there are no lowercase letters, there are 9 possible combinations that can show up in the index fingers. They are:

R  U  W  
-  -  -  
R  R  R  

R  U  W  
-  -  -  
U  U  U  

R  U  W  
-  -  -  
W  W  W  

At this point it is well to note that it may be preferable in some instances where small files are concerned to use only a portion of the classification formula in the filing sequence. In such cases, only those parts of the filing sequence which are necessary should be used along with the final and key.

At this point, it's important to recognize that in some cases involving small files, it might be better to use just part of the classification formula in the filing order. In these instances, only the necessary sections of the filing order should be used, along with the final key.

III. Subsecondary:

III. Subsecondary:

III to OOO.
III OOO

The sequence of the subsecondary is as follows:

The order of the subsecondary is as follows:

III  IIM  IIO  IMI  IMM  IMO  IOI  
---  ---  ---  ---  ---  ---  ---  
III  III  III  III  III  III  III  

IOM  IOO  MII  MIM  MIO  MMI  MMM  
---  ---  ---  ---  ---  ---  ---  
III  III  III  III  III  III  III  

MMO  MOI  MOM  MOO  OII  OIM  OIO  
---  ---  ---  ---  ---  ---  ---  
III  III  III  III  III  III  III  

OMI  OMM  OMO  OOI  OOM  OOO           OOO,  
---  ---  ---  ---  ---  ---  etc., to ---  
III  III  III  III  III  III           OOO  

each numerator in turn becoming the denominator for the complete sequence of numerators as listed above.

each numerator, in turn, becoming the denominator for the entire sequence of numerators as listed above.

IV. Major:

IV. Degree:

The following sequence is used when loops appear in both thumbs:

The following sequence is used when loops are present in both thumbs:

S  M  L  S  M  L  S  M  L  
-  -  -  -  -  -  -  -  -  
S  S  S  M  M  M  L  L  L  

When whorls appear in both thumbs the sequence is:

When whorls show up on both thumbs, the pattern is:

I  M  O  I  M  O  I  M  O
-  -  -  -  -  -  -  -  -
I  I  I  M  M  M  O  O  O

When a whorl appears in the right thumb and a loop in the left, the sequence is:

When there’s a swirl in the right thumb and a loop in the left, the order is:

I  M  O  I  M  O  I  M  O  
-  -  -  -  -  -  -  -  -  
S  S  S  M  M  M  L  L  L  

When a loop appears in the right thumb and a whorl in the left, the sequence is:

When there's a loop on the right thumb and a whorl on the left, the order is:

S  M  L  S  M  L  S  M  L  
-  -  -  -  -  -  -  -  -  
I  I  I  M  M  M  O  O  O  

V. Second Subsecondary:

V. Second Subsecondary:

SSS to LLL.
SSS LLL

The sequence for filing the second subsecondary is as follows:

The process for submitting the second subsecondary is as follows:

SSS  SSM  SSL  SMS  SMM  SML  
---  ---  ---  ---  ---  ---  
SSS  SSS  SSS  SSS  SSS  SSS  

SLS  SLM  SLL  MSS  MSM  MSL  
---  ---  ---  ---  ---  ---  
SSS  SSS  SSS  SSS  SSS  SSS  

MMS  MMM  MML  MLS  MLM  MLL  
---  ---  ---  ---  ---  ---  
SSS  SSS  SSS  SSS  SSS  SSS  

LSS  LSM  LSL  LMS  LMM  LML  
---  ---  ---  ---  ---  ---  
SSS  SSS  SSS  SSS  SSS  SSS  

LLS  LLM  LLL,          LLL,  
---  ---  ---  etc., to ---  
SSS  SSS  SSS           LLL  

each group of the numerator becoming in turn the denominator for the complete sequence of numerators as listed above.

each group of the numerator becoming, in turn, the denominator for the complete sequence of numerators as listed above.

VI. W C D X Extensions:

VI. W C D X Extensions:

W to xX3x.
W xX3x

The sequence is as follows: Prints with c, d, or x in any finger other than the index fingers constitute the small-letter group. A sample of the sequence follows:

The order is as follows: Prints with c, d, or x on any finger except the index fingers make up the small-letter group. A sample of the order follows:

W   cWc  xWd    Wdx  
cW   cWd  xWx    Wxc  
dW   cWx   W2c   Wxd  
xW   dWc   Wcd   W2x  
 Wc  dWd   Wcx  cW2c  
 Wd  dW    Wdc  cWcd  
 Wx  xWc   W2d  cWcx  

As may be readily seen, the sequence proceeds in the same fashion as the a, t, r, small-letter sequence.[Pg 108]

As you can easily see, the sequence follows the same pattern as the a, t, r, lowercase sequence.[Pg 108]

VII. Special Loop Extension used by the Federal Bureau of Investigation:

VII. Special Loop Extension used by the Federal Bureau of Investigation:

111 to 777.
111 777

The following is a partial sequence for filing this extension:

The following is a partial sequence for submitting this extension:

111  112  113  114  115  116  117  
---  ---  ---  ---  ---  ---  ---  
111  111  111  111  111  111  111  

121  122  123  124  125  126  127  
---  ---  ---  ---  ---  ---  ---  
111  111  111  111  111  111  111  

131  132  133  134  135  136  137  
---  ---  ---  ---  ---  ---  ---  
111  111  111  111  111  111  111  

141  142  143  144  145  146  147  
---  ---  ---  ---  ---  ---  ---  
111  111  111  111  111  111  111  

151  152  153  154  155  156  157  
---  ---  ---  ---  ---  ---  ---  
111  111  111  111  111  111  111  

161  162  163  164  165  166  167  
---  ---  ---  ---  ---  ---  ---  
111  111  111  111  111  111  111  

171  172  173  174  175  176  177          777.  
---  ---  ---  ---  ---  ---  --- etc., to ---  
111  111  111  111  111  111  111          777  

No matter how many of these divisions may be used, the order should remain the same; and no matter how many of these divisions are used, each individual group should be sequenced by:

No matter how many of these divisions are used, the order should stay the same; and regardless of how many divisions are employed, each individual group should be arranged by:

VIII. Final:

VIII. Conclusion:

Filed in numerical sequence from 1 out. For example, assume that there are 15 prints in a group having a final of 14. All of these should be filed together and followed by those prints in the same group having a final of 15, etc.

Filed in numerical order starting from 1. For example, if there are 15 prints in a group with a final of 14, all of these should be filed together and followed by the prints in the same group with a final of 15, and so on.

IX. Key:

IX. Legend:

All prints appearing in a designated final group are arranged by key in numerical sequence from 1 out. For example, assume that there are 5 prints in a group having a key of 14. All of these should be filed together and followed by those prints in the same group having a key of 15, etc.

All prints in the final group are organized by key in numerical order starting from 1. For example, if there are 5 prints in a group with a key of 14, they should all be filed together, followed by the prints in the same group with a key of 15, and so on.


CHAPTER VII

Searching and Referencing

 

Searching

When searching a print through the fingerprint files in order to establish an identification, it should be remembered that the fingerprint cards are filed in such a way that all those prints having the same classification are together. Thus, the print being searched is compared only with the groups having a comparable classification, rather than with the whole file.

When searching a print through the fingerprint files to establish an identification, keep in mind that the fingerprint cards are organized so that all prints with the same classification are grouped together. This way, the print being searched is compared only with groups that have a similar classification, rather than with the entire file.

After locating the proper group classification, the searcher should fix in his mind the one or two most outstanding characteristics of the patterns of the current print and look for them among the prints in file. If a print is found which has a characteristic resembling one upon the current print, the two prints should be examined closely to determine if identical. To avoid making an erroneous identification, the searcher should be exceedingly careful to ascertain that the prints being compared are identical in all respects before identifying one against the other.

After finding the right group classification, the person searching should focus on the one or two most notable characteristics of the current print and look for them among the prints in the collection. If they find a print that has a similar characteristic to the current print, both prints should be carefully examined to see if they are the same. To avoid making a mistake in identification, the searcher must be very careful to ensure that the prints being compared are identical in every detail before concluding that one matches the other.

To establish identity, it is necessary to locate several points of identity among the characteristics of the prints. The number of identical characteristics is left to the discretion of the individual but he should be absolutely certain that the prints are identical before treating them as such. Characteristics need not appear within the pattern area, since any ridge formation is acceptable. Quite often excellent ridge detail appears in the second joint of the finger. The characteristics used to establish an identification are shown in figure 102.

To establish identity, you need to find several matching features in the prints. The number of matching features is up to the individual, but you must be completely sure that the prints are identical before treating them as such. Features don’t have to be inside the pattern area; any ridge formation is acceptable. Often, great ridge detail appears in the second joint of the finger. The features used to confirm an identification are shown in figure 102.

The final and the key may be considered control figures for searching prints. They limit the number of prints it is necessary to search in a group to those prints having finals and keys closely related to the final and key of the print being searched.

The final and the key can be seen as crucial figures for searching prints. They reduce the number of prints needed to search in a group to those prints with finals and keys closely linked to the final and key of the print being searched.

Due to the possibility of visual misinterpretation, distortion by pressure, or poor condition of the ridge detail of the prints in file, it is advisable to allow a margin for such discrepancies. Except in cases where the ridge count of the final and/or key is questionable on the print being searched, the following procedure is used:

Due to the potential for visual misinterpretation, distortion from pressure, or poor condition of the ridge detail of the prints in the file, it’s advisable to allow for some margin of error. Unless the ridge count of the final and/or key is doubtful on the print being examined, the following procedure is used:

Of the prints within any group classification, only those prints are examined which have a final within 2 ridge counts on each side of the final of the print being searched. For example, if the print to be searched has a final of 17, all prints bearing a final 15 through 19 will be compared with it.

Of the prints in any group classification, only those prints are examined which have a final that falls within 2 ridge counts on either side of the final of the print being searched. For example, if the print to be searched has a final of 17, all prints with a final of 15 through 19 will be compared to it.

Within the final of any group classification, only those prints are[Pg 110] examined which have a key within 2 ridge counts on each side of the key of the print being searched. For example, if the print to be searched has a key of 20, all prints bearing a key of 18 through 22 will be compared with it.

Within the final stage of any group classification, only those prints are[Pg 110] examined that have a key within 2 ridge counts on either side of the key of the print being searched. For example, if the print to be searched has a key of 20, all prints with a key of 18 to 22 will be compared to it.

In figure 352, it will be noted that there are 17 ridge counts appearing in the right little finger and this number is used as the final. It will also be noted that there is a loop of 24 ridge counts in the right thumb and this number is used as the key inasmuch as it is the first loop. In this example, the print is searched in the group classification which has finals ranging from 15 through 19. Within this group of finals the prints which have keys ranging from 22 through 26 are examined.

In figure 352, it will be noted that there are 17 ridge counts in the right little finger, and this number is used as the final. It will also be noted that there is a loop with 24 ridge counts in the right thumb, and this number is used as the key since it is the first loop. In this example, the print is checked in the group classification that has finals ranging from 15 to 19. Within this group of finals, the prints with keys ranging from 22 to 26 are examined.

Referencing

Too much stress cannot be placed upon the necessity of referencing questionable patterns, whether it be in the interpretation of the type of pattern, the ridge count, or the tracing.

Too much stress cannot be placed upon the necessity of referencing questionable patterns, whether it be in the interpretation of the type of pattern, the ridge count, or the tracing.

The factors which make it necessary are: variation in individual judgment and eyesight, the amount of ink used, the amount of pressure used in taking the prints, the difference in width of the rolled impressions, skin diseases, worn ridges due to age or occupations, temporary and permanent scars, bandaged fingers, crippled hands, and amputation.

The reasons it’s necessary include: differences in personal judgment and vision, the amount of ink applied, the pressure used when taking the prints, variations in the width of the rolled impressions, skin conditions, worn ridges from age or jobs, temporary and permanent scars, bandaged fingers, injured hands, and amputations.

For the highest degree of accuracy, all rolled impressions should be checked by the plain impressions, which generally are not distorted by pressure. This also helps prevent error caused by the reversal or mixing of the rolled impressions out of their proper order. For the same reason, as much of the counting and tracing should be done in the plain impressions as it is possible to do.

For the best accuracy, all rolled impressions should be checked against the plain impressions, which usually aren’t affected by pressure. This also helps avoid mistakes caused by reversing or mixing the rolled impressions out of their correct order. For the same reason, as much counting and tracing should be done on the plain impressions as possible.

If there is any doubt as to which of two or more classifications should be assigned to a given pattern, it is given the preferred classification and reference searches are conducted in all other possible classifications. For example, if on a print with the preferred classification

If there's any uncertainty about which of two or more classifications should be assigned to a particular pattern, it's assigned the preferred classification, and reference searches are conducted in all other possible classifications. For example, if on a print with the preferred classification

1 A
1 Aa

it is questionable whether the left middle finger should be a plain arch, a tented arch, or a radial loop, the print is searched in the

it’s debatable whether the left middle finger should be a plain arch, a tented arch, or a radial loop; the print is examined in the

1 A
1 Aa

group, and reference searches are conducted in the

group, and reference searches are conducted in the

1 A
1 At

and

and

1 A
1 Ar

groups. For further illustration, a print is given a preferred primary classification of

groups. For further illustration, a print is given a preferred primary classification of

1,
1

although the ridge detail on the right thumb is so formed as to[Pg 111] resemble a whorl. The search is completed first in the preferred

although the ridge detail on the right thumb is shaped to [Pg 111] resemble a whorl. The search is finished first in the preferred

1
1

primary classification and a reference search is then conducted in the

primary classification and a reference search is then conducted in the

1
17

primary.

primary.

All ridge counts that are "line counts," i.e., when one more or one less count would change the designation of the loop from I to O or from S to M, etc., must be searched in both groups. For example, in a print classified

All ridge counts that are "line counts," meaning that one more or one less count could change the classification of the loop from I to O or from S to M, etc., must be checked in both groups. For example, in a print classified

16 M 1 U III 10,
M 1 U III

if the ridge count of the right middle finger is 10 and the count in the right thumb is 16 (as indicated by the key), the print would be searched first as classified, then reference searches would be conducted in the following groups:

if the ridge count of the right middle finger is 10 and the count in the right thumb is 16 (as indicated by the key), the print would be searched first as classified, then reference searches would be conducted in the following groups:

M 1 U IOI,   L 1 U III, and L 1 U IOI
M 1 U III M 1 U III M 1 U III

When there is doubt concerning the tracing of a whorl, it should be treated in the same fashion. For example, if in the classification

When there's uncertainty about identifying a whorl, it should be handled the same way. For instance, if in the classification

O 5 U
I 17 U

doubt existed as to whether the tracing of the right thumb might not be a meeting tracing, the print would be searched as classified, and a reference search would be conducted in

doubt existed as to whether the tracing of the right thumb might not be a meeting tracing, the print would be searched as classified, and a reference search would be conducted in

M 5 U.
I 17 U

If there is no doubt concerning the ridge count used for the final, it is enough to search out of the group only those prints containing a final within 2 ridge counts on each side of the final on the print being searched. When, however, there is doubt concerning the ridge count of the final, the print should be searched 2 ridge counts on each side of the two extremes of possibility. For example, if it were possible for a final to be 6, 7, 8, or 9 ridge counts, the print should be searched through that part of the group bearing finals of from 4 through 11.

If there’s no doubt about the ridge count used for the final, it’s enough to look for prints in the group that have a final within 2 ridge counts on either side of the final being examined. However, if there’s uncertainty about the ridge count of the final, you should search the print 2 ridge counts on each side of the two extremes of possibility. For example, if a final could be 6, 7, 8, or 9 ridge counts, you should check the part of the group that has finals ranging from 4 to 11.

The above explanation pertaining to the final also applies to the key.

The explanation above about the final also applies to the key.

All prints bearing amputations should be referenced to the necessary files containing prints other than amputations for reference searches.

All prints with amputations should be linked to the required files that contain prints without amputations for reference searches.

In instances where only one finger is amputated, reference searches are conducted in all possible classifications, including all possible ridge counts or tracings. For example, a print containing the classification:

In cases where just one finger is amputated, reference searches are done across all possible classifications, including every possible ridge count or tracing. For instance, a print that has the classification:

AMP
 
4 S 1 U III 6
S 1 U III

with the right index finger amputated, the left index finger being an ulnar loop, would be searched first in the amputation group for the classification, then reference searches would be conducted in the following groups in the nonamputation files:[Pg 112]

with the right index finger amputated, the left index finger being an ulnar loop, would be searched first in the amputation group for the classification, then reference searches would be conducted in the following groups in the nonamputation files:[Pg 112]

S 1 U III   S 1 T II   S 17 W III
S 1 U III S 1 U III S 1 U III

 

S 1 U OII   S 1 R III   S 17 W MII
S 1 U III S 1 U III S 1 U III

 

S 1 A II   S 1 R OII   S 17 W OII
S 1 U III S 1 U III S 1 U III

 All prints bearing unprinted or badly crippled fingers are filed in the nonamputation files, and reference searches are conducted in the amputation group.

All prints with unprinted or poorly damaged fingers are kept in the nonamputation files, and reference searches are done in the amputation group.

For the purpose of determining if it is feasible to conduct reference searches in all possible classifications, the method of referencing amputations is applied to completely scarred patterns (Chapter titled "Scarred Patterns—Amputations—Missing at Birth"). For example, a print bearing the preferred classification:

For the purpose of figuring out if it’s possible to conduct reference searches in all potential classifications, the method of referencing amputations is applied to fully scarred patterns (Chapter titled "Scarred Patterns—Amputations—Missing at Birth"). For example, a print with the preferred classification:

13 O 17 W OOO 14
L 17 U OOI

with the left middle finger completely scarred, the right middle finger being an ulnar loop with a ridge count of 13, would be searched first in the group for that classification, then reference searches would be conducted in the following groups:

with the left middle finger completely scarred, the right middle finger featuring an ulnar loop with a ridge count of 13, would be searched first in the group for that classification, then reference searches would be conducted in the following groups:

O 17 W OOO   O 17 W   O 19 W OOO
L 17 U OII L 17 Ur L 17 U OOI

 

O 17 W   O 19 W OOO
L 17 Ua L 17 U OII

 

O 17 W   O 19 W OOO
L 17 Ut L 17 U OMI

The referencing of partial scars is a problem in which many factors are present. A full explanation of the scars, their preferred classifications and their references is made in the chapter, "Classification of Scarred Patterns—Amputations—Missing at Birth."

The issue of partial scars involves many factors. A complete explanation of the scars, their preferred classifications, and their references is provided in the chapter, "Classification of Scarred Patterns—Amputations—Missing at Birth."

When the age extension is utilized and a "Reference" group and a "Presumptive Dead" file are maintained, it is suggested that a general allowance of 5 years be considered to allow for a discrepancy in prints bearing the ages of 50 years or older.

When the age extension is used and a "Reference" group and a "Presumptive Dead" file are kept, it's recommended that an overall allowance of 5 years be taken into account to accommodate discrepancies in prints showing ages of 50 years or older.

In the files of the Federal Bureau of Investigation the various age groups are as follows:

In the files of the Federal Bureau of Investigation, the different age groups are as follows:

1-54 "Regular" file.
55-74 "Reference" file.
75 and over "Presumptive Dead" file.

Reference searches for the preceding groups are conducted in the following manner:[Pg 113]

Reference searches for the previous groups are carried out as follows:[Pg 113]

50-54 Referenced to "Reference" file.
70-74 Referenced to "Presumptive Dead" file and "Regular" file.
75-79 Referenced to "Reference" file and "Regular" file.
80 and older Referenced to "Regular" file only.

If no age is given, it should be searched first in the regular file and reference searches should be conducted in the "Reference" group and the "Presumptive Dead" file.

If no age is provided, it should first be looked up in the regular file, and reference searches should be done in the "Reference" group and the "Presumptive Dead" file.

When separate male and female files are maintained, there may be doubt as to the sex of a subject due to a discrepancy between the sex indicated and the name and the description and picture. In such case try to determine the sex from the description and the size of the prints, then reference the print to the other file. A Photostat copy can be made and placed in the other file until the true sex can be determined.

When separate files for males and females are kept, there might be uncertainty about someone's gender because the gender listed doesn't match their name, description, or photo. In this situation, try to figure out the gender based on the description and the size of the prints, then compare the print with the other file. A photocopy can be made and added to the other file until the correct gender can be confirmed.


CHAPTER VIII

How To Take Inked Fingerprints

 

The equipment required for taking fingerprints consists of an inking plate, a cardholder, printer's ink (heavy black paste), and a roller. This equipment is simple and inexpensive.

The gear needed for taking fingerprints includes an inking plate, a cardholder, printer's ink (thick black paste), and a roller. This gear is straightforward and affordable.

In order to obtain clear, distinct fingerprints, it is necessary to spread the printer's ink in a thin even coating on a small inking plate. A roller similar to that used by printers in making galley proofs is best adapted for use as a spreader. Its size is a matter determined by individual needs and preferences; however, a roller approximately 6 inches long and 2 inches in diameter has been found to be very satisfactory. These rollers may be obtained from a fingerprint supply company or a printing supply house.

To get clear, distinct fingerprints, you need to apply printer's ink in a thin, even layer on a small inking plate. A roller, similar to the ones used by printers for galley proofs, works best for spreading. The size depends on personal needs and preferences; however, a roller around 6 inches long and 2 inches in diameter has proven to be very effective. You can purchase these rollers from a fingerprint supply store or a printing supply shop.

An inking plate may be made from a hard, rigid, scratch-resistant metal plate 6 inches wide by 14 inches long or by inlaying a block of wood with a piece of glass one-fourth of an inch thick, 6 inches wide, and 14 inches long. The glass plate by itself would be suitable, but it should be fixed to a base in order to prevent breakage. The inking surface should be elevated to a sufficient height to allow the subject's forearm to assume a horizontal position when the fingers are being inked. For example, the inking plate may be placed on the edge of a counter or a table of counter height. In such a posi[Pg 115]tion, the operator has greater assurance of avoiding accidental strain or pressure on the fingers and should be able to procure more uniform impressions. The inking plate should also be placed so that the subject's fingers which are not being printed can be made to "swing" off the table to prevent their interfering with the inking process. A fingerprint stand such as that shown in figure 360 may be purchased from fingerprint supply companies. The stand is made of hardwood and measures approximately 2 feet in length, 1 foot in height and width. This stand contains a cardholder and a chrome strip which is used as the inking plate. Two compartments used to store blank fingerprint cards and supplies complete the stand. This equipment should be supplemented by a cleansing fluid and necessary cloths so that the subject's fingers may be cleaned before rolling and the inking plate cleaned after using. Denatured alcohol and commercially available cleaning fluids are suitable for this purpose.

An inking plate can be made from a durable, rigid, scratch-resistant metal plate that measures 6 inches wide by 14 inches long, or by embedding a block of wood with a piece of glass that's one-fourth of an inch thick, 6 inches wide, and 14 inches long. The glass plate on its own would work, but it should be secured to a base to prevent it from breaking. The inking surface should be raised high enough so the subject’s forearm can rest comfortably in a horizontal position while their fingers are being inked. For instance, the inking plate could be set on the edge of a counter or a table that's counter height. In this setup, the operator is less likely to accidentally strain or press down on the fingers, leading to more consistent impressions. The inking plate should also be positioned so that the subject's fingers not being printed can swing off the table to avoid disrupting the inking process. A fingerprint stand, like the one shown in figure 360, can be purchased from fingerprint supply companies. This stand is made from hardwood and is approximately 2 feet long and 1 foot high and wide. It includes a cardholder and a chrome strip that serves as the inking plate. There are also two compartments for storing blank fingerprint cards and supplies. This equipment should be paired with a cleansing solution and necessary cloths to clean the subject's fingers before rolling and to clean the inking plate after use. Denatured alcohol and commercially available cleaning fluids work well for this.

 

Fig. 360

Fig. 360

[Fig. 360]

[Fig. 360]

 

The fingerprints should be taken on 8- by 8-inch cardstock, as this size has generally been adopted by law enforcement because of facility in filing and desirability of uniformity. Figure 361 shows fingerprints properly taken on one of the standard personnel identification cards from the Federal Bureau[Pg 116] of Investigation. From this illustration, it is evident there are two types of impressions involved in the process of taking fingerprints. The upper 10 prints are taken individually—thumb, index, middle, ring, and little fingers of each hand in the order named. These are called "rolled" impressions, the fingers being rolled from side to side in order to obtain all available ridge detail. The smaller impressions at the bottom of the card are taken by simultaneously printing all of the fingers of each hand and then the thumb without rolling. These are called "plain" or "fixed" impressions and are used as a check upon the sequence and accuracy of the rolled impressions. Rolled impressions must be taken carefully in order to insure that an accurate fingerprint classification can be obtained by examination of the various patterns. It is also necessary that each focal point (cores and all deltas) be clearly printed in order that accurate ridge counts and tracings may be obtained.

The fingerprints should be taken on 8- by 8-inch cardstock, as this size is commonly used by law enforcement for easier filing and the need for consistency. Figure 361 shows fingerprints properly taken on one of the standard personnel identification cards from the Federal Bureau[Pg 116] of Investigation. From this illustration, it’s clear that there are two types of impressions involved in the fingerprinting process. The top 10 prints are taken individually—thumb, index, middle, ring, and little fingers of each hand in that order. These are called "rolled" impressions, where the fingers are rolled from side to side to capture all available ridge detail. The smaller impressions at the bottom of the card are taken by pressing all the fingers of each hand at the same time and then the thumb without rolling. These are called "plain" or "fixed" impressions and are used to verify the sequence and accuracy of the rolled impressions. Rolled impressions must be taken carefully to ensure an accurate fingerprint classification can be made by examining the various patterns. It’s also essential that each focal point (cores and all deltas) be clearly printed so that accurate ridge counts and tracings can be obtained.

 

Fig. 361

Fig. 361

[Fig. 361]

[Fig. 361]

 

In preparing to take a set of fingerprints, a small daub of ink should be placed on the inking glass or slab and thoroughly rolled until a very thin, even film covers the entire surface. The subject should stand in front of and at forearm's length from the inking plate. In taking the rolled impressions, the side of the bulb of the finger is placed upon the inking plate and the finger is rolled to the other side until it faces the opposite direction. Care should be exercised so the bulb of each finger is inked evenly from the tip to below the first joint. By pressing the finger lightly on the card and rolling in exactly the same manner, a clear rolled impression of the finger surface may be obtained. It is better to ink and print each finger separately beginning with the right thumb and then, in order, the index, middle, ring, and little fingers. (Stamp pad ink, printing ink, ordinary writing ink, or other colored inks are not suitable for use in fingerprint work as they are too light or thin and do not dry quickly.)

In preparing to take fingerprints, put a small amount of ink on the inking glass or slab and roll it until there’s a very thin, even layer covering the entire surface. The person getting their fingerprints taken should stand about an arm's length away from the inking plate. To capture the rolled impressions, place the side of the finger bulb on the inking plate and roll it to the other side until it faces the opposite direction. Make sure to ink each finger evenly from the tip to just below the first joint. By applying light pressure on the card and rolling in the same way, you can get a clear rolled impression of the finger surface. It’s best to ink and print each finger separately, starting with the right thumb, then proceeding in order with the index, middle, ring, and little fingers. (Stamp pad ink, printing ink, regular writing ink, or other colored inks are not suitable for fingerprint work because they are too light or thin and don't dry quickly.)

If consideration is given the anatomical or bony structure of the forearm when taking rolled impressions, more uniform impressions will be obtained. The two principal bones of the forearm are known as the radius and the ulna, the former being on the thumb side and the latter on the little finger side of the arm. As suggested by its name, the radius bone revolves freely about the ulna as a spoke of a wheel about the hub. In order to take advantage of the natural movement in making finger impressions, the hand should be rotated from the awkward to the easy position. This requires that the thumbs be rolled toward and the fingers away from the center of the subject's body. This process relieves strain and leaves the fingers relaxed upon the completion of rolling so that they may be lifted easily from the card without danger of slipping which smudges and blurs the prints. Figures 362 and 363 show the proper method of holding a finger for inking and printing a rolled impression.

If you consider the anatomical or bony structure of the forearm when taking rolled impressions, you'll get more consistent impressions. The two main bones in the forearm are called the radius and the ulna, with the radius on the thumb side and the ulna on the little finger side. As its name suggests, the radius bone rotates freely around the ulna like a wheel revolves around its hub. To take advantage of the natural movement when making finger impressions, the hand should be turned from an awkward position to a more comfortable one. This means rolling the thumbs toward the center of the subject's body and the fingers away from it. This process reduces strain and keeps the fingers relaxed once the rolling is done, allowing for easy lifting from the card without the risk of slipping, which can smudge and blur the prints. Figures 362 and 363 demonstrate the proper way to hold a finger for inking and printing a rolled impression.

 

Figs. 362-363

Figs. 362-363

[Figs. 362-363]

[Figs. 362-363]

 

The degree of pressure to be exerted in inking and taking rolled impressions is important, and this may best be determined through experience and observation. It is quite important, however, that the subject be cautioned to relax and refrain from trying to help the operator by exerting pressure as this prevents the operator from gaging the amount needed. A method which[Pg 117] is helpful in effecting the relaxation of a subject's hand is that of instructing him to look at some distant object and not to look at his hands. The person taking the fingerprints should stand to the left of the subject when printing the right hand, and to the right of the subject when printing the left hand. In any case, the positions of both subject and operator should be natural and relaxed if the best fingerprints are to be obtained.

The amount of pressure applied during inking and taking rolled impressions is crucial, and this is usually best figured out through experience and observation. However, it's very important to advise the subject to relax and not try to help the operator by applying pressure, as this makes it harder for the operator to gauge the right amount needed. A helpful method[Pg 117] for encouraging the subject to relax their hand is to instruct them to focus on a distant object instead of looking at their hands. The person taking the fingerprints should stand to the left of the subject when printing the right hand, and to the right when printing the left hand. In any case, both the subject and the operator should maintain a natural and relaxed position to ensure the best fingerprints are captured.

To obtain "plain" impressions, all the fingers of the right hand should be pressed lightly upon the inking plate, then pressed simultaneously upon the lower right hand corner of the card in the space provided. The left hand should be similarly printed, and the thumbs of both hands should be inked and printed, without rolling, in the space provided. Figures 364 and 365 show the correct method of taking plain impressions of the fingers and thumbs.

To get "plain" impressions, lightly press all the fingers of your right hand onto the inking plate, then press them at the same time onto the lower right corner of the card in the designated space. Do the same with your left hand, and make sure to ink and print the thumbs of both hands in the space provided, without rolling. Figures 364 and 365 show the proper way to take plain impressions of the fingers and thumbs.

 

Figs. 364-365

Figs. 364-365

[Figs. 364-365]

[Figs. 364-365]


CHAPTER IX

Problems in the Taking of Inked Fingerprints

 

From time to time various problems arise concerning the taking of inked impressions. It is believed that these problems can be divided into four phases:

From time to time, different issues come up regarding the process of taking inked impressions. It's thought that these issues can be categorized into four phases:

● __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

● __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

● __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

● __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Mechanical operation

In order to take good fingerprints, the necessary equipment should be maintained in a neat and orderly manner at all times.

To get clear fingerprints, the required equipment should always be kept clean and organized.

Poor impressions are usually caused by one of the following faults:

Poor impressions are usually caused by one of the following issues:

1. The use of poor, thin, or colored ink, resulting in impressions which are too light and faint, or in which the ink has run, obliterating the ridges. The best results will be obtained by using heavy black printer's ink, a paste which should not be thinned before using. This ink will dry quickly and will not blur or smear with handling.

1. Using poor-quality, thin, or colored ink leads to impressions that are too light and faint, or where the ink has smeared, hiding the details. The best results come from using heavy black printer's ink, a paste that shouldn't be thinned before application. This ink dries quickly and won't smudge or blur when handled.

2. Failure to clean thoroughly the inking apparatus and the fingers of foreign substances and perspiration, causing the appearance of false markings and the disappearance of characteristics. Windshield cleaner, gasoline, benzine, and alcohol are good cleansing agents, but any fluid may be used. In warm weather each finger should be wiped dry of perspiration before printing.

2. Not cleaning the inking equipment and your fingers properly from dirt and sweat can lead to false marks and loss of details. Windshield cleaner, gasoline, benzene, and alcohol are effective cleaning agents, but any liquid can work. In warm weather, make sure to dry each finger of sweat before printing.

3. Failure to roll the fingers fully from one side to the other and to ink the whole area from tip to below the first fissure. The result of this is that the focal points of the impressions (the deltas or cores) do not appear. The whole finger surface from joint to tip and from side to side should appear.

3. Not rolling the fingers completely from one side to the other and not inking the entire area from the tip to just below the first groove can lead to issues. As a result, the focal points of the impressions (the deltas or cores) won't show up. The entire finger surface from joint to tip and side to side should be visible.

4. The use of too much ink, obliterating or obscuring the ridges. If printer's ink is used, just a touch of the tube end to the inking plate will suffice for several sets of prints. It should be spread to a thin, even film by rolling.

4. Using too much ink can hide or cover the ridges. If you’re using printer's ink, just a small amount from the tube end onto the inking plate is enough for several sets of prints. It should be spread into a thin, even layer by rolling.

5. Insufficient ink, resulting in ridges too light and faint to be counted or traced.[Pg 119]

5. Not enough ink, causing lines to be too light and faint to count or trace.[Pg 119]

6. Allowing the fingers to slip or twist, resulting in smears, blurs, and false-appearing patterns. The fingers should be held lightly without too much pressure. The subject should be warned not to try to help but to remain passive.

6. Letting the fingers slip or twist can cause smears, blurs, and misleading patterns. The fingers should be held gently without applying too much pressure. The subject should be advised not to try to assist but to stay passive.

The illustrations numbered 366 through 377 show the results of these faults and show also the same fingers taken in the proper manner.

The illustrations numbered 366 through 377 display the outcomes of these faults and also show the same fingers captured correctly.

Illegible inked prints

A brief review of the problems of classifying and filing a fingerprint card in the FBI will help to clarify the FBI's policy concerning the processing of "bad" inked fingerprints.

A quick look at the issues of classifying and filing a fingerprint card in the FBI will clarify the FBI's policy regarding the processing of "bad" inked fingerprints.

The criminal fingerprint file contains the fingerprints of millions of individuals. The complete classification formula is used. To obtain it, each inked finger must show all the essential characteristics. Because of the immense volume of prints it has become necessary to extend the normal classification formula.

The criminal fingerprint file holds the fingerprints of millions of people. The full classification formula is utilized. To achieve this, every inked finger must display all the key features. Due to the vast number of prints, it has become necessary to expand the standard classification formula.

To illustrate this point:

To make this point clear:

dWdwc
xCdwc
O 32 W OOO 18
I   32 W III

dWdwc
xCdwc
O 32 W OOO 18
I   32 W III

In order to subdivide the 32 over 32 primary still further, the ridge count of the whorl of the right little finger is used to obtain a final classification. The extension above the normal classification formula indicates that each whorl is classified as to the type; namely, plain whorl (W), double loop (D), central pocket loop (C), and accidental (X). Accordingly, it is not enough for the FBI Identification Division to ascertain the general whorl pattern type, but the deltas and core must show in order to obtain the ridge tracing, the type of whorl, and also, in some instances, the ridge count. The complete WCDX extension is outlined in Chapter VI.

To further categorize the 32 over 32 primary patterns, the ridge count of the whorl on the right little finger is used for final classification. The extension beyond the normal classification formula shows that each whorl is classified by type: plain whorl (W), double loop (D), central pocket loop (C), and accidental (X). Therefore, it's not enough for the FBI Identification Division to identify just the general whorl pattern type; the deltas and core must also be visible to obtain the ridge tracing, the type of whorl, and sometimes, the ridge count. The complete WCDX extension is outlined in Chapter VI.

Figures 366 to 377 are some examples of improperly and properly taken inked fingerprints.

Figures 366 to 377 show examples of incorrectly and correctly taken inked fingerprints.

 

Figs. 370-373

Figs. 370-373

Figs. 374-377

Figs. 374-377

[Figs. 366-377]

[Figs. 366-377]

 

An examination of figure 372 shows that it is a whorl. In order to classify the ridge tracing accurately, however, so that the fingerprint card can be placed in the correct classification, the left delta must show. The approximate ridge tracing for the whorl in figure 372 would be Meeting. An examination of the properly taken fingerprint in figure 373 indicates that the correct ridge tracing is Inner. It follows that the pattern in figure 372 would not have been placed in the proper place in file.

An analysis of figure 372 shows that it is a whorl. To accurately classify the ridge tracing, so the fingerprint card can be correctly categorized, the left delta must be visible. The approximate ridge tracing for the whorl in figure 372 would be Meeting. An analysis of the correctly taken fingerprint in figure 373 indicates that the correct ridge tracing is Inside. Therefore, the pattern in figure 372 would not have been filed in the right place.

The correct whorl tracing is needed to obtain the complete subsecondary and the major classifications.

The right whorl tracing is necessary to achieve the full subsecondary and major classifications.

It may be noted that both deltas are present in figure 374. This would enable the technical expert to ascertain the correct ridge tracing, Outer. In the core of the whorl, however, there is a heavy amount of ink which makes it impossible to determine the type of whorl with any degree of accuracy. If one were to hazard a guess, it would appear to be a plain whorl. Actually, the correct type of whorl, a double loop, is clearly visible in figure 375.

It should be noted that both deltas are shown in figure 374. This would allow the technical expert to determine the correct ridge tracing, Outer. However, in the center of the whorl, there's a lot of ink, making it impossible to accurately identify the type of whorl. If I had to guess, it looks like a plain whorl. In reality, the correct type of whorl, a double loop, is clearly visible in figure 375.

It can be ascertained that the pattern in figure 376 is a loop, but an accurate ridge count cannot be obtained because the left delta does not[Pg 122] appear. The approximate ridge count of this loop is 14 to 16. This approximation is sufficient for a fingerprint expert to place this loop in the "O" group of any finger of the subsecondary. The correct ridge count of this loop is 19, and it appears in illustration 377. The approximate ridge count is not sufficient to place this print properly in the large files of the FBI because in certain general complete classification formulas the accurate ridge count is needed to obtain an extension. These extensions use a smaller grouping of ridge counts to form a valuation table, and in this way, differ from the larger grouping of ridge counts which form the basis of the subsecondary classification. These extensions are called the second subsecondary and the special loop extension and are outlined in chapter VI.

It can be determined that the pattern in figure 376 is a loop, but an accurate ridge count can't be obtained because the left delta is not[Pg 122] visible. The approximate ridge count of this loop is 14 to 16. This estimate is enough for a fingerprint expert to categorize this loop in the "O" group of any finger in the subsecondary classification. The correct ridge count for this loop is 19, and it's shown in illustration 377. The approximate ridge count isn't enough to properly classify this print in the FBI's larger files because certain complete classification formulas require the exact ridge count for obtaining an extension. These extensions use a smaller set of ridge counts to create a valuation table, thus differing from the larger grouping of ridge counts that form the basis of the subsecondary classification. These extensions are called the second subsecondary and the special loop extension and are detailed in chapter VI.

There are two additional points which illustrate the FBI's need for the delta, ridges, and core to show clearly in loops. The first point is set forth: the ridge count of the loop may be needed to obtain the key classification. The key classification is an actual ridge count, and no valuation table is used to obtain a subdivision. The key classification is used as an integral part of the fingerprint filing system. The second point is as follows: the ridge count may be needed to obtain the final classification. The final classification is an actual ridge count, and no valuation table is used to obtain a subdivision. The final classification is used as an integral part of the fingerprint filing system.

There are two more points that highlight the FBI's need for the delta, ridges, and core to be clearly visible in loops. The first point is that the ridge count of the loop may be necessary to achieve the key classification. The key classification is based on the actual ridge count, and no valuation table is used for any subdivisions. This key classification plays an essential role in the fingerprint filing system. The second point is that the ridge count may also be required to determine the final classification. The final classification is again based on the actual ridge count, and no valuation table is used for subdivisions. This final classification is also a crucial part of the fingerprint filing system.

The following are just a few examples to illustrate the completeness of the classification formula used in the FBI fingerprint file:[Pg 123]

The following are just a few examples to show how comprehensive the classification formula used in the FBI fingerprint file is:[Pg 123]

12 M 9 R OIO 11
  S 1 R IOI  
Key Major Primary Secondary Subsecondary Final

 

6   17 aW IIO 9
    1 U OII  
Key
 
  Primary
 
Small Letter
Secondary
Subsecondary
 
Final
 

 

8 S 1 Ua II 6
  S 1 U III  
Key
 
Major
 
Primary
 
Small Letter
Secondary
(Subsecondary
Extension)
Final
 

 

        SML
SML
(Second
Subsecondary)
5 0 5 U IOO 14
  I 17 U IOO  
Key Major Primary Secondary Subsecondary Final

 

        245
332
(Special Loop
Extension)
14 M 1 U IOO 16
  S 1 U OII  
Key Major Primary Secondary Subsecondary Final

 

15 I 29 W IOO 19
  I 28 W OOI  
Key Major Primary Secondary Subsecondary Final

 

These several examples should help to illustrate the FBI's extended classification formulas for classifying and filing fingerprints.[Pg 124] The larger collection of fingerprints must of necessity call for a more detailed analysis of all fingerprint characteristic details. The closer examination to obtain further fingerprint subdivisions is dependent on ten legible inked impressions.

These examples should help show the FBI's detailed classification systems for organizing and filing fingerprints.[Pg 124] The larger database of fingerprints requires a more thorough analysis of all fingerprint characteristics. A closer look to get more fingerprint subdivisions relies on ten clear inked impressions.

The identification officer will understand the problems of accurately classifying and filing fingerprint cards. He knows there is little value in placing a fingerprint card in the FBI's files with only an approximate or an inaccurate classification.

The identification officer will understand the challenges of accurately classifying and filing fingerprint cards. He knows that placing a fingerprint card in the FBI's files with only an approximate or inaccurate classification is not very useful.

Every fingerprint card filed in the FBI's file is of value to the particular law enforcement agency which forwarded it, as well as to all other law enforcement agencies which rely on its being correctly classified and filed.

Every fingerprint card in the FBI's files is important to the law enforcement agency that submitted it, as well as to all other agencies that depend on it being accurately classified and filed.

Temporary disabilities

There are temporary disabilities affecting an individual's hand which are sometimes beyond the control of the identification officer. These can be fresh cuts, or wounds, bandaged fingers or finger, occupational (carpenters, bricklayers, etc.) blisters, and excessive perspiration. Children, whose ridges are small and fine, would also come under this heading. Extreme care should be exercised in fingerprinting the aforementioned.

There are temporary disabilities affecting a person's hand that are sometimes out of the identification officer's control. These can include fresh cuts or wounds, bandaged fingers, blisters from work (like from carpenters or bricklayers), and excessive sweating. Children, whose fingerprints have small and fine ridges, also fall into this category. Extra caution should be taken when fingerprinting these individuals.

An indication on the fingerprint card to the effect "fresh cut, bandaged" is not sufficient to file the fingerprint card. It is obvious that a fingerprint card bearing these notations cannot be properly classified and filed. The same situation would occur if there were a blister on an individual's finger. The blister temporarily disfigures the ridge detail. When an injury is temporary, the prints, if at all possible, should not be taken until after the injury has healed.

An indication on the fingerprint card that says "fresh cut, bandaged" isn't enough to process the fingerprint card. It's clear that a fingerprint card with these notes can't be accurately categorized and filed. The same issue would arise if someone had a blister on their finger. The blister makes the ridge detail unclear. When an injury is temporary, prints should ideally be taken only after the injury has healed, if at all possible.

Occupational problems (bricklayers, carpenters, etc.) are definitely a challenge to the identification officer. In some instances, by means of softening agents (oils and creams), it is possible to obtain legible inked impressions. It is further suggested that in these cases a very small amount of ink should be used on the inking plate.

Occupational issues (bricklayers, carpenters, etc.) are definitely a challenge for the identification officer. In some cases, using softening agents (oils and creams) can help get clear inked impressions. It's also recommended that in these situations, only a small amount of ink should be applied to the inking plate.

Excessive perspiration can be controlled to some extent by the identification officer. Excessive perspiration causes the inked impressions to be indistinct. It is suggested in these cases to wipe the finger with a cloth and then immediately ink the finger and roll it on the fingerprint card. This process should be followed with each finger. It is also suggested that possibly the fingers could be wiped with alcohol, benzine, or similar fluid which would act as a drying agent.

Excessive sweating can be partly managed by the identification officer. Excessive sweating makes the inked impressions unclear. In these situations, it's recommended to wipe the finger with a cloth, then immediately ink the finger and roll it on the fingerprint card. This process should be repeated for each finger. It's also suggested that the fingers could be wiped with alcohol, benzene, or a similar fluid that would serve as a drying agent.

In all the above situations, if it is not possible to accurately classify and file the fingerprint card, the name appearing on the card will be searched in the alphabetical files and then returned to the law-enforcement agency.[Pg 125]

In all the situations mentioned above, if it's not possible to accurately classify and file the fingerprint card, the name on the card will be searched in the alphabetical files and then returned to the law enforcement agency.[Pg 125]

Permanent disabilities

Another phase involves permanent disabilities which can in most cases be controlled by the identification officer. These can be lack of fingers (born without), amputations, crippled fingers (bent, broken), deformities (webbed, extra fingers), and old age.

Another phase involves permanent disabilities that can usually be managed by the identification officer. These can include missing fingers (born without), amputations, crooked fingers (bent, broken), deformities (webbed, extra fingers), and age-related issues.

With respect to lack of fingers, it should be noted that some individuals are born without certain fingers. The notation "missing" is not satisfactory because it does not sufficiently explain the correct situation. It is suggested that "missing at birth" or some similar notation be made in the individual fingerprint block on the card. A proper notation concerning this situation will prevent the fingerprint card from being returned. Figures 378 and 379 illustrate temporary and permanent disabilities.

With regard to missing fingers, it's important to mention that some people are born without certain fingers. The term "missing" isn't sufficient because it doesn't clearly explain the situation. It's recommended to use "missing at birth" or a similar phrase in the individual's fingerprint section on the card. A proper note about this will help avoid the fingerprint card being sent back. Figures 378 and 379 show examples of temporary and permanent disabilities.

 

Figs. 378-379

Figs. 378-379

[Figs. 378-379]

[Figs. 378-379]

 

Concerning amputations, it is suggested that a proper notation to this effect appear in the individual fingerprint block or blocks. It is suggested that if a portion of the first joint of a finger is amputated, the finger should be inked and printed. A notation concerning this fact should be made on the fingerprint card in the individual fingerprint block.

Concerning amputations, it's recommended that a proper note about this be recorded in the individual fingerprint block or blocks. If a part of the first joint of a finger is amputated, the finger should be inked and printed. A note about this should be made on the fingerprint card in the individual fingerprint block.

In those cases where all of the fingers are amputated, the inked footprints should be obtained.

In cases where all the fingers are amputated, the inked footprints should be collected.

The handling of crippled fingers and certain deformities can be discussed in a group because they generally present the same problems. It is not sufficient in all cases to indicate "broken," "bent," "crippled." If the fingers are bent or crippled so that they are touching the palm and cannot be moved, a notation to this effect should be on the fingerprint card in the proper individual fingerprint block. However, it is believed that these extreme cases are rare. It is suggested that the special inking devices used for taking the prints of deceased individuals be used in taking inked impressions of bent or crippled fingers.[Pg 126]

The way we handle damaged fingers and certain deformities can be talked about in a group because they usually have the same issues. It's not enough to just say "broken," "bent," or "damaged." If the fingers are bent or damaged to the point where they touch the palm and can't move, that should be noted on the fingerprint card in the correct individual fingerprint block. However, it's thought that these extreme cases are uncommon. It's recommended that the special inking devices used for capturing prints of deceased individuals be utilized to take inked impressions of bent or damaged fingers.[Pg 126]

This equipment, which will be discussed more fully in the section on printing deceased persons, consists of spatula, small roller, and a curved holder for the individual finger block. Figure 380 shows the spatula, roller, and curved holder. It should be further noted in figure 380 that there are a strip of the entire hand of the fingerprint card and also individual finger blocks cut from the fingerprint card. Each of these types can be used in connection with the curved holder.

This equipment, which will be explained in more detail in the section on printing deceased individuals, includes a spatula, a small roller, and a curved holder for the individual finger block. Figure 380 shows the spatula, roller, and curved holder. It's also important to note in figure 380 that there's a strip of the entire hand from the fingerprint card as well as individual finger blocks cut from the fingerprint card. Each of these types can be used with the curved holder.

 

Fig. 380

Fig. 380

[Fig. 380]

[Fig. 380]

 

Each crippled finger is taken as a separate unit and then the finger block pasted on a fingerprint card. In figure 381, note the use of the spatula for applying the ink to a bent or crippled finger; and in figure 382, observe the use of the curved holder for taking the "rolled" impression of a bent or crippled finger.

Each damaged finger is treated as an individual unit, and then the finger block is attached to a fingerprint card. In figure 381, notice the use of the spatula for applying ink to a bent or damaged finger; and in figure 382, check out the use of the curved holder for capturing the "rolled" impression of a bent or damaged finger.

 

Figs. 381-382

Figs. 381-382

[Figs. 381-382]

[Figs. 381-382]

 

Old age has been placed under permanent disability only for discussion purposes. The problem is not encountered frequently in taking the fingerprints of individuals who are arrested. The situation of crippled fingers due to old age may be met, and it can be handled as previously suggested. In most cases the problems arise because of the very faint ridges of the[Pg 128] individual. It is believed that in the majority of cases, legibly inked prints can be taken by using a very small amount of ink on the inking plate and by using little pressure in the rolling of the fingers.

Old age has been categorized as a permanent disability only for discussion purposes. This issue doesn’t often come up when fingerprinting individuals who have been arrested. The problem of fingers that are difficult to fingerprint due to aging can arise, but it can be managed as previously suggested. Most of the time, issues stem from the very faint ridges of the[Pg 128] individual. It's believed that in most cases, clear inked prints can be obtained by using just a small amount of ink on the inking plate and applying minimal pressure while rolling the fingers.

Deformities

If a subject has more than 10 fingers, as occasionally happens, the thumbs and the next 4 fingers to them should be printed, and any fingers left over should be printed on the other side of the card with a notation made to the effect that they are extra fingers. When a person with more than 10 fingers has an intentional amputation performed, it is invariably the extra finger on the little finger side which is amputated.

If a person has more than 10 fingers, which can happen sometimes, the thumbs and the next four fingers should be printed, and any extra fingers should be printed on the other side of the card with a note indicating that they are additional fingers. When someone with more than 10 fingers has a planned amputation, it usually involves removing the extra finger on the little finger side.

It also happens, not infrequently, that a subject will have two or more fingers webbed or grown together, as in figures 383 and 384, making it impossible to roll such fingers on the inside. Such fingers should be rolled, however, as completely as possible, and a notation made to the effect that they are joined.

It also happens, quite often, that a person will have two or more fingers webbed or fused together, as shown in figures 383 and 384, making it impossible to roll those fingers inward. However, those fingers should still be rolled as much as possible, and a note should be made indicating that they are joined.

 

Fig. 383

Fig. 383

Fig. 384

Fig. 384

[Figs. 383-384]

[Figs. 383-384]

 

Split thumbs, i.e., thumbs having two nail joints, as in figure 385, are classified as if the joint toward the outside of the hand were not present. In other words the inner joint is used, and no consideration whatever is given to the outer joint.[Pg 129]

Split thumbs, meaning thumbs with two nail joints, like in figure 385, are treated as if the joint on the outside of the hand doesn't exist. In other words, only the inner joint is used, and the outer joint is completely disregarded.[Pg 129]

 

Fig. 385

Fig. 385

[Fig. 385]

[Fig. 385]

 

General

These problems have dealt with the mechanical or operational processes. However, there are other problems dealing with the completing of the descriptive information. The fingerprint card may be returned because of the lack of information in the spaces provided, such as name, sex, race, height, weight, etc. Any discrepancies in this information may necessitate the return of the fingerprint card.

These issues have focused on the mechanical or operational processes. However, there are other problems related to completing the descriptive information. The fingerprint card might be sent back due to missing information in the provided fields, such as name, sex, race, height, weight, etc. Any inconsistencies in this information could require the return of the fingerprint card.

The success and value of the FBI's fingerprint files to all law enforcement agencies are dependent, in a large measure, on the legibly inked fingerprints taken by law enforcement agencies.

The success and value of the FBI's fingerprint files to all law enforcement agencies largely depend on clearly inked fingerprints collected by these agencies.

Figure 386 shows an enlarged portion of the bulb of a finger revealing the microscopic structure of the friction skin. The epidermis consists of two main layers, namely, the stratum corneum, which covers the surface, and the stratum mucosum, which is just beneath the covering surface. The stratum mucosum is folded under the surface so as to form ridges[Pg 130] which will run lengthwise and correspond to the surface ridges. However, these are twice as numerous since the deeper ridges which correspond to the middle of the surface ridges alternate with smaller ones which correspond to the furrows. The sweat pores run in single rows along the ridges and communicate through the sweat ducts with the coil sweat glands which are below the entire epidermis. The friction ridges result from the fusion in rows of separate epidermic elements, such as the dot shown on the left. Generally speaking, when an individual bruises or slightly cuts the outer layer or stratum corneum of the bulb of the finger, the ridges will not be permanently defaced. However, if a more serious injury is inflicted on the bulb of the finger, thereby damaging the stratum mucosum, the friction skin will heal, but not in its original formation. The serious injury will result in a permanent scar appearing on the bulb of the finger.

Figure 386 shows a close-up view of the tip of a finger, highlighting the microscopic structure of the friction skin. The epidermis has two main layers: the stratum corneum, which is the outer layer, and the stratum mucosum, located just beneath it. The stratum mucosum is folded beneath the surface to create ridges[Pg 130] that run lengthwise and align with the surface ridges. However, there are twice as many of these deeper ridges, which match the middle of the surface ridges, alternating with smaller ones that align with the furrows. The sweat pores are arranged in single rows along the ridges and connect through sweat ducts to the coil sweat glands located beneath the entire epidermis. The friction ridges form from the fusion of separate epidermal elements, like the dot shown on the left. Generally, when a person bruises or lightly cuts the outer layer, or stratum corneum, at the tip of the finger, the ridges usually remain intact. However, if a more serious injury occurs and the stratum mucosum is damaged, the friction skin will heal, but it won't return to its original structure. A serious injury will leave a permanent scar on the tip of the finger.

 

Fig. 386

Fig. 386

[Fig. 386]

[Fig. 386]


CHAPTER X

Problems and Practices in Fingerprinting the Dead

 

Each year new graves are opened in potter's fields all over the United States. Into many of them are placed the unknown dead—those who have lived anonymously or who, through accident or otherwise, lose their lives under such circumstances that identification seems impossible. In a majority of such cases, after the burial of the body, no single item or clue remains to effect subsequent identification. As a result, active investigation usually ceases and the cases are forgotten, unless, of course, it is definitely established that a murder has been committed.

Each year, new graves are dug in potter's fields across the United States. Many of them are for the unknown dead—those who lived without anyone knowing them or who, due to accidents or other events, lose their lives in ways that make identification seem impossible. In most cases, after the body is buried, no trace or clue remains to help identify the person later. As a result, active investigations usually stop, and the cases are forgotten, unless it’s clearly determined that a murder has taken place.

Reliance is too often placed on visual inspection in establishing the identity of the deceased. This includes having the remains viewed by individuals seeking to locate a lost friend or relative. The body is often decomposed. If death was caused by burning, the victim may be unrecognizable. As a result of many fatal accidents the deceased is often mutilated, particularly about the face, so that visual identification is impossible. Yet, in many cases, the only attempt at identification is by having persons view the remains and the personal effects.

Reliance is too often placed on visual inspection to confirm the identity of the deceased. This includes having people look at the remains in hopes of finding a missing friend or family member. The body is often decomposed. If death was caused by fire, the victim may be unrecognizable. Due to many fatal accidents, the deceased is often badly damaged, especially around the face, making visual identification impossible. Still, in many cases, the only effort made to identify the person is by having individuals view the remains and their personal belongings.

The recorded instances of erroneous visual identifications are numerous. In one case a body, burned beyond recognition, was identified by relatives as that of a 21-year-old man; yet fingerprints later proved that the corpse was that of a 55-year-old man.

The recorded instances of mistaken visual identifications are numerous. In one case, a body burned beyond recognition was identified by family members as that of a 21-year-old man; however, fingerprints later confirmed that the corpse actually belonged to a 55-year-old man.

Fingerprints have frequently been instrumental in establishing the correct identity of persons killed in airplane crashes and incorrectly "identified" by close relatives.

Fingerprints have often been crucial in confirming the true identity of individuals who died in airplane crashes and were mistakenly "identified" by their family members.

In one instance a woman found dead in a hotel room was "positively" identified by several close friends. The body was shipped to the father of the alleged deceased in another state where again it was "identified" by close friends. Burial followed. Approximately one month later the persons who had first identified the body as that of their friend were sitting in a tavern when the "dead" woman walked into the room. Authorities were immediately advised of the error; they in turn advised the authorities in the neighboring state of the erroneous identification and steps were taken immediately to rectify the mistake. After permission had been granted by the State Health Board to exhume the body of the dead woman, fingerprints were taken and copies were forwarded to the FBI Identification Division. The finger impressions were searched through the fingerprint files and the true identity of the deceased was established.

In one case, a woman found dead in a hotel room was "definitely" identified by several close friends. Her body was sent to her father's home in another state, where it was again "identified" by those same friends. She was buried shortly after. About a month later, the individuals who had first identified the body as their friend were sitting in a bar when the "dead" woman walked in. Authorities were promptly notified of the mistake; they then informed the authorities in the neighboring state about the incorrect identification, and steps were quickly taken to correct the error. After the State Health Board granted permission to exhume the body of the deceased woman, fingerprints were collected and sent to the FBI Identification Division. The fingerprints were cross-checked with the fingerprint databases, and the true identity of the deceased was confirmed.

During a 12-month period, the FBI Identification Division received the[Pg 132] fingerprints of 1,708 unknown dead. Of these, 1,298, or almost 76 percent, were identified. The remaining 410 were not identified simply because fingerprints of these individuals were not in the FBI files. It should be noted that in these 1,708 cases, it was possible to secure legible fingerprints of the deceased in the usual manner by inking the fingers in those instances in which decomposition had not injured the ridge detail.

During a 12-month period, the FBI Identification Division received the[Pg 132] fingerprints of 1,708 unidentified deceased individuals. Of these, 1,298, or nearly 76 percent, were identified. The remaining 410 were not identified simply because their fingerprints were not in the FBI's files. It's important to note that in these 1,708 cases, it was possible to obtain clear fingerprints of the deceased in the usual way by inking the fingers when decomposition hadn't damaged the ridge detail.

 

Fig. 387

Fig. 387

[Fig. 387]

[Fig. 387]

 

In addition to the fingerprints of 1,708 unknown dead, the Identification Division received the fingers and/or the hands of 85 unknown dead individuals. In these cases, decomposition was so far advanced that it was not possible to secure inked fingerprints in the regular manner. Of these, 68 bodies, or 80 percent of the group, were identified. Of the 17 unidentified, the fingerprints of 14 were not in the FBI files. In three cases decomposition was so far advanced that all ridge detail had been destroyed.

In addition to the fingerprints of 1,708 unidentified deceased individuals, the Identification Division received the fingers and/or hands of 85 unknown dead people. In these situations, decomposition was so advanced that it wasn't possible to obtain inked fingerprints using standard methods. Of these, 68 bodies, or 80 percent of the group, were identified. Of the 17 unidentified, the fingerprints of 14 were not in the FBI files. In three cases, decomposition was so severe that all ridge detail had been destroyed.

In order to emphasize what can be accomplished, it is pointed out that in those cases in which hands and fingers were submitted, the time which elapsed from death until the specimens were received ranged from a week to 3 years. Incredible as it may seem, it has been possible to secure identifiable impressions 3 years after death.

To highlight what can be achieved, it's noted that in cases where hands and fingers were submitted, the time from death to when the specimens were received varied from one week to three years. As unbelievable as it sounds, it's been possible to obtain identifiable impressions even three years after death.

These statistics of achievement in the field of identifying unknown dead re-emphasize the fact that in all cases involving the identification of a deceased person, fingerprints should be used as the medium for establishing a conclusive and positive identification.[Pg 133]

These success rates in identifying unknown deceased individuals highlight the importance of using fingerprints to make a definitive and positive identification in all cases involving the identification of a deceased person.[Pg 133]

Generally speaking, in the course of their work fingerprint operators find it necessary to take the impressions of three classes of deceased persons.

Generally speaking, fingerprint operators often need to take the impressions of three types of deceased individuals during their work.

They are:

They are:

● Those who have died recently, in which cases the task is relatively simple.

● Those who have recently passed away, in which cases the task is fairly straightforward.

● Those dead for a longer period, in which cases difficulty is experienced due to pronounced stiffening of the fingers, the early stages of decomposition, or both.

● Those who have been dead for a longer time may present challenges due to significant stiffness of the fingers, early signs of decomposition, or both.

● Those cases in which extreme difficulty is encountered because of maceration, desiccation, or advanced decay of the skin.

● Those situations where extreme difficulty arises due to softening, drying out, or advanced decomposition of the skin.

These problems will be considered separately.

These issues will be looked at individually.

1. Fingerprinting the Newly Dead.

1. Fingerprinting the Recently Deceased.

When the fingers are flexible it is often possible to secure inked fingerprint impressions of a deceased person through the regular inking process on a standard fingerprint card. Experience has proved that this task can be made easier if the deceased is laid face down and palms down on a table (fig. 388).

When the fingers are flexible, it's often possible to get inked fingerprint impressions of a deceased person using the regular inking process on a standard fingerprint card. Experience has shown that this task can be easier if the deceased is placed face down and palms down on a table (fig. 388).

 

Fig. 388

Fig. 388

[Fig. 388]

[Fig. 388]

 

In all cases where inked impressions are to be made, care should be exercised to see that the fingers are clean and dry before inking. If necessary, wash the digits with soap and water and dry thoroughly.

In every situation where inked impressions need to be made, make sure to keep the fingers clean and dry before applying ink. If needed, wash your fingers with soap and water and dry them completely.

In the event difficulty is encountered in trying to procure fingerprints by the regular method, it may prove more convenient to cut the 10 "squares" numbered for the rolled impressions from a fingerprint card. After the finger is inked, the square is rolled around the finger without letting it slip. Extreme caution should be exercised to see that each square bears the correct fingerprint impression. After all the inked impressions are properly taken, the ten squares bearing the impressions are pasted or stapled to a standard fingerprint card in their proper positions, i.e., right thumb, right index, right middle, etc. Whenever possible the "plain" or "simultaneous" impressions should also be taken.

If there are challenges in getting fingerprints using the standard method, it might be easier to cut the 10 "squares" labeled for the rolled impressions from a fingerprint card. After inking the finger, roll the square around the finger without letting it slip. It's important to make sure that each square accurately reflects the correct fingerprint impression. Once all the inked impressions are collected properly, the ten squares with the impressions should be pasted or stapled to a standard fingerprint card in the correct order, i.e., right thumb, right index, right middle, and so on. Whenever possible, the "plain" or "simultaneous" impressions should also be taken.

In some cases it will be found necessary to obtain or improvise a tool similar to a broad-bladed putty knife or spatula to be used as an inking instrument. The ink is rolled evenly and thinly on the knife or spatula and applied to the finger by passing the inked knife or spatula around it. The tool, of course, replaces the usual glass inking slab or plate, the use of which is extremely difficult or awkward when printing a deceased person.[Pg 134]

In some cases, it will be necessary to find or create a tool similar to a broad-bladed putty knife or spatula to use as an inking instrument. The ink is evenly and thinly rolled onto the knife or spatula and applied to the finger by running the inked tool around it. This tool replaces the usual glass inking slab or plate, which is very difficult or awkward to use when printing a deceased person.[Pg 134]

2. Fingerprinting the Dead, Where Stiffening of the Fingers and/or Early Decomposition Are Present.

2. Fingerprinting the Deceased, Where Rigor Mortis in the Fingers and/or Early Decomposition Is Present.

This second group consists of cases in which the hands of the deceased are clenched, or the finger tips are wrinkled, or decomposition has begun, and/or where there are combinations of these three conditions. Cases of this sort may necessitate cutting off the skin. Legal authority is necessary before cutting a corpse. Such authority may be granted by state law or by an official having authority to grant such a right.

This second group includes cases where the deceased's hands are clenched, the fingertips are wrinkled, decomposition has started, and/or there are combinations of these three conditions. In such cases, it may be necessary to remove the skin. Legal permission is required before cutting into a corpse. This permission may be granted by state law or by an official authorized to provide such rights.

In cases where rigor mortis (stiffening of the muscles) has set in and the fingers are tightly clenched, the fingers may be forcibly straightened by "breaking the rigor." This is done by holding the hand of the deceased person firmly with one hand, grasping the finger to be straightened with the four fingers of the other hand and placing the thumb, which is used as a lever, on the knuckle of the finger and forcing it straight (fig. 389). The inking tool and "squares," as previously explained, are then used to secure the fingerprint.

In situations where rigor mortis (muscle stiffness) has occurred and the fingers are tightly clenched, the fingers can be forcibly straightened by "breaking the rigor." This involves holding the deceased person's hand firmly with one hand, grasping the finger to be straightened with the four fingers of the other hand, and using the thumb as a lever on the knuckle of the finger to force it straight (fig. 389). The inking tool and "squares," as explained earlier, are then used to capture the fingerprint.

 

Fig. 389

Fig. 389

[Fig. 389]

[Fig. 389]

 

In the event the rigor cannot be completely overcome, it will be most helpful to improvise or secure a spoon-shaped tool for holding the cut squares or cut strips while printing the fingers, similar to the tool mentioned[Pg 135] briefly in the discussion of crippled fingers. This tool, somewhat resembling a gouge without the sharp edge, should have a handle, a concave end, and a frame or clamp to hold the cardboard squares or strips. In Figure 390, one type of tool is illustrated. This tool eliminates the necessity of rolling the deceased's finger, since the "square" assumes the concave shape of the tool, and the gentle pressure applied to the inked finger when it is brought in contact with the square results in a "rolled" impression without actually rolling the finger.

If the stiffness can't be fully overcome, it would be very helpful to improvise or get a spoon-shaped tool to hold the cut squares or strips while printing the fingers, similar to the tool briefly mentioned[Pg 135] in the discussion about crippled fingers. This tool looks somewhat like a gouge but without a sharp edge, and it should have a handle, a curved end, and a frame or clamp to hold the cardboard squares or strips. One type of tool is illustrated in Figure 390. This tool makes it unnecessary to roll the deceased's finger, since the "square" takes on the curved shape of the tool, and the gentle pressure applied to the inked finger when it touches the square creates a "rolled" impression without actually rolling the finger.

 

Fig. 390

Fig. 390

[Fig. 390]

[Fig. 390]

 

Another problem encountered in this second group includes cases in which the tips of the fingers are fairly pliable and intact, yet due to the presence of wrinkles in the skin, complete impressions cannot be obtained. This condition can be corrected by the injection of a tissue builder, procurable from a dealer in undertaker's supplies. If this is not available, glycerin or water may be used.

Another issue found in this second group involves situations where the tips of the fingers are soft and whole, but due to wrinkles in the skin, complete impressions can't be acquired. This issue can be fixed by injecting a tissue builder, which can be obtained from a supplier of funeral supplies. If that isn't available, glycerin or water can be used.

The method is simple. Injection of the tissue builder, glycerin, or water, is accomplished by the use of a hypodermic syringe. The hypodermic needle is injected at the joint of the finger up into the tip of the finger, care being used to keep the needle below the skin surface (fig. 391). The solution is injected until the finger "bulbs" are rounded out, after which they are inked and printed.[Pg 136]

The method is straightforward. You inject the tissue builder, glycerin, or water using a hypodermic syringe. The hypodermic needle is inserted at the joint of the finger and pushed up into the tip of the finger, making sure to keep the needle just beneath the skin’s surface (fig. 391). The solution is injected until the finger "bulbs" are rounded out, and then they are inked and printed.[Pg 136]

 

Fig. 391

Fig. 391

[Fig. 391]

[Fig. 391]

 

Occasionally, in stubborn cases, entry of the needle at the joint and injection of the fluid will not completely fill the finger bulb. It may be necessary, therefore, to inject the fluid at other points of the finger such as the extreme tip or sides, until suitable results are achieved (fig. 392). The tissue builder has a distinct advantage over glycerin or water, inasmuch as the builder hardens after a short time and is not lost, whereas glycerin and water sometimes seep out when pressure is applied in printing. To offset seepage at the point where the hypodermic needle is injected, whenever possible, tie a piece of string tightly around the finger just above the point of entry of the needle.

Occasionally, in tough cases, inserting the needle at the joint and injecting the fluid won’t completely fill the finger bulb. So, it might be necessary to inject the fluid at other spots on the finger, like the very tip or the sides, until the desired results are achieved (fig. 392). The tissue builder has a clear advantage over glycerin or water because the builder hardens after a short time and doesn’t get lost, while glycerin and water can sometimes leak out when pressure is applied during printing. To prevent leakage where the hypodermic needle is inserted, whenever possible, tie a piece of string tightly around the finger just above where the needle enters.

 

Fig. 392

Fig. 392

[Fig. 392]

[Fig. 392]

 

When the tissue builder is purchased, a solvent for cleaning the hypodermic syringe and needle should be acquired, inasmuch as the builder will harden in the syringe and needle.

When you buy the tissue builder, make sure to get a solvent for cleaning the hypodermic syringe and needle, since the builder will harden inside the syringe and needle.

Those cases in which decomposition in its early stage is present belong in this group also. Frequently, the outer layer of skin has begun to peel from the fingers. A careful examination should be made to determine if the peeling skin is intact or if a part of it has been lost. If the skin is in one piece, an effort should be made to secure prints just as though it were attached normally to the finger. Or, if it is deemed advisable, the skin may be peeled off in one piece, placed over the finger of the operator, and inked and printed as though it were his own finger.

Those cases where early-stage decomposition is present also fall into this category. Often, the outer layer of skin has started to peel off the fingers. A careful examination should be conducted to check if the peeling skin is intact or if some of it is missing. If the skin is whole, an attempt should be made to capture prints just as if it were normally attached to the finger. Alternatively, if deemed necessary, the skin can be peeled off in one piece, placed over the operator's finger, and inked and printed as if it were his own finger.

Occasionally the first layer of skin is missing. There remains the dermis or second layer of skin which is also of value for identification purposes. This second layer would be dealt with as though it were the outside skin, using the techniques described above. The ridge detail of the second layer of skin is less pronounced than that of the outer skin, however, and more attention and care are needed in order to obtain suitable impressions.

Occasionally, the top layer of skin is missing. What’s left is the dermis, or the second layer of skin, which is also useful for identification. This second layer would be treated as if it were the outer skin, using the techniques mentioned earlier. However, the ridge detail in the second layer is less distinct than that of the outer skin, so more attention and care are required to get suitable impressions.

So far this discussion has dealt with the taking of impressions of fingers when the flesh is fairly firm and the ridge detail intact. A different problem arises when the fingers are in various stages of decay. The techniques of treating the fingers in such cases vary greatly, depending upon the condition of the fingers with respect to decomposition, desiccation, or maceration.

So far, this discussion has focused on taking fingerprints when the skin is relatively firm and the ridge detail is clear. A different issue comes up when the fingers are at different stages of decay. The methods for handling the fingers in these situations vary significantly, depending on their condition in terms of decomposition, drying out, or breaking down.

3. Fingerprinting the Dead in Difficult Cases.

3. Fingerprinting the Dead in Challenging Cases.

In cases involving badly decomposed bodies the first thing to do is to examine the fingers to see if all are present. If they are not, an effort should be made to determine whether the missing finger or fingers or even a hand was amputated during the person's lifetime, or whether the loss was due to other causes such as destruction by animal or marine life. Deductions from this examination should be noted on the fingerprint record. This point is made in view of the fact that in the fingerprint files of the FBI and some police departments, the fingerprint cards reflecting amputations are filed separately. Noting amputations may lessen to a great extent a search through the fingerprint files.

In cases with badly decomposed bodies, the first step is to check the fingers to see if all of them are present. If any are missing, efforts should be made to figure out whether the lost finger(s) or even a hand was amputated during the person’s life, or if the loss was caused by other factors like damage from animals or marine life. Findings from this examination should be recorded on the fingerprint record. This is important because in the fingerprint databases of the FBI and some police departments, fingerprint cards indicating amputations are filed separately. Noting any amputations can significantly reduce the time spent searching through the fingerprint files.

In making the initial examination, attention should be given to the removal of dirt, silt, grease and other foreign matter from the fingers. Soap and water are good cleansing agents. So is xylene, a chemical which will readily clean grease and fatty matter from the fingers. Good results can be achieved by utilizing a child's soft-bristled toothbrush in cases where the skin is fairly firm. The brushing should be done lightly and the strokes should follow the ridge design in order to clean not only the ridges but the depressions as well. In the event that the skin is not firm enough to use the toothbrush, a cotton swab may be used. The fingers should be wiped very lightly with either soap and water or xylene, always following the ridge contours.

In the initial examination, it’s important to remove dirt, silt, grease, and any other foreign materials from the fingers. Soap and water are effective cleaning agents. Xylene is also useful as it easily removes grease and fatty substances from the fingers. You can achieve good results by using a child's soft-bristled toothbrush if the skin is relatively firm. Brush lightly, following the ridge pattern to clean both the ridges and the valleys. If the skin is too soft for a toothbrush, you can use a cotton swab instead. Always wipe the fingers gently with either soap and water or xylene, following the ridge contours.

At this point the fingers are again examined to determine the condition[Pg 139] they are in, based upon the circumstances in which the body was found. Study and actual experience have shown that there are three general types of conditions to be considered: Decomposition or putrefaction, prevalent in bodies found in brush or buried in earth; desiccation or mummification (that is, dried out), noted in bodies which have been found in the open (ridge detail not in contact with the ground) in dry protected places, or bodies subjected to severe heat; and the group involving maceration (water soaking), which ordinarily results from being immersed in water.

At this point, the fingers are examined again to assess their condition[Pg 139], based on the environment where the body was discovered. Research and real-life experience indicate that there are three main types of conditions to consider: Decomposition or rot, common in bodies found in brush or buried in dirt; desiccation or mummification (meaning dried out), observed in bodies found in the open (elevated details not touching the ground) in dry, sheltered areas, or bodies exposed to intense heat; and the group involving maceration (water soaking), which usually occurs from being submerged in water.

The degree of decomposition, desiccation, or maceration varies from a comparatively early stage to an extremely advanced stage. Accordingly, each case must be considered individually. For example, what is done successfully in one case of desiccation may not show favorable results in another. Hence, the techniques outlined below point out generally what can be done, and has been done, with success.

The level of breakdown, drying out, or softening ranges from a relatively early stage to a very advanced stage. Therefore, each case needs to be looked at on its own. For instance, what works well in one case of drying out may not have good results in another. So, the methods described below generally indicate what can be done, and what has been done successfully.

When a body is found, the hands usually will be tightly clenched. The first problem will be to straighten the fingers. If rigor mortis has set in and an effort to straighten the fingers as previously explained fails, the difficulty can be overcome easily. Using a scalpel, make a deep cut at the second joint on the inner side of each of the four fingers. They can now be straightened with the application of force (fig. 393). The thumb, if it is cramped or bent, can generally be straightened by making a deep cut between the thumb and the index finger. These incisions are made for the obvious purpose of examining the fingers to determine if there is any ridge detail. Before this fact can be definitely ascertained it may be necessary to cleanse the pattern areas with soap and water or xylene, as previously explained.[Pg 140]

When a body is found, the hands are usually tightly clenched. The first challenge is to straighten the fingers. If rigor mortis has set in and efforts to straighten the fingers as explained before fail, this issue can be resolved easily. Using a scalpel, make a deep cut at the second joint on the inner side of each of the four fingers. They can now be straightened with some force (fig. 393). The thumb, if it’s cramped or bent, can usually be straightened by making a deep cut between the thumb and the index finger. These cuts are made to check for any ridge detail on the fingers. Before this can be confirmed, it may be necessary to clean the pattern areas with soap and water or xylene, as mentioned before.[Pg 140]

 

Fig. 393

Fig. 393

[Fig. 393]

[Fig. 393]

 

Advanced decomposition

If the case is one involving decomposition, the operator is confronted with the problem of dealing with flesh which is rotted or putrefied. The flesh may be soft or flabby and very fragile. If this is so, an examination is made of the finger tips to see if the outer skin is present. If the outer skin is present and intact, it may be possible, using extreme care, to ink and print in the regular manner. Sometimes, the outer skin, although present, will be too soft and fragile to ink and roll in the regular way. In such cases, when the ridge detail is discernible, the skin, if it is easily removed from the finger, or the finger itself may be cut off at the second joint and placed in a 10- to 15-percent solution of formaldehyde for approximately an hour to harden it. Skin placed in a formaldehyde solution usually turns a grayish white and becomes firm. However, it will[Pg 141] be brittle and may split if not handled carefully. The skin is placed in the solution only until it hardens sufficiently, after which it is removed and carefully wiped dry with a piece of cloth. Then the skin, placed over the operator's own thumb or index finger and held in place by his other hand, is inked and rolled as though the operator were printing his own finger. If a legible print is not obtainable in this manner, the operator should examine the underside of the skin.

If the case involves decomposition, the operator faces the issue of handling flesh that is decayed or spoiled. The flesh may be soft, flabby, and very fragile. If that's the case, they check the fingertips to see if the outer skin is still intact. If the outer skin is present and undamaged, it might be possible, with great care, to ink and print it as usual. Sometimes, even if the outer skin is there, it may be too soft and delicate to ink and roll normally. In those situations, when the ridge detail is visible, the skin, if it can be easily removed from the finger, or the finger itself may be cut off at the second joint and placed in a 10- to 15-percent formaldehyde solution for about an hour to harden it. Skin placed in formaldehyde usually turns a grayish white and becomes firm. However, it will[Pg 141] be brittle and could crack if not handled carefully. The skin is left in the solution only until it hardens enough, after which it is removed and gently dried with a cloth. Then the skin, positioned over the operator's thumb or index finger and held in place by the other hand, is inked and rolled just like the operator printing their own finger. If a clear print can't be obtained this way, the operator should check the underside of the skin.

In many instances, where the ridge detail on the outer surface has been destroyed or is not discernible, the ridge detail is clearly visible on the underside (fig. 394). If this is the case, the skin is inverted (turned inside out) very carefully to prevent splitting or breaking and then is inked and printed in the usual way. It must be borne in mind, however, that when the underside of the skin is printed the resulting impression will be in reverse color and position; that is, the ink is actually adhering to what would be furrows of the pattern when viewed from the proper or outer side. If it is deemed inadvisable to try to invert or turn the skin inside out for fear of damaging it, a photograph of the inner ridge detail is made and the negative is printed to give an "as is" position photograph for proper classification and comparison purposes. In order to secure good photographs of the ridge detail it may be advisable to trim the skin, flatten it out between two pieces of glass, and photograph it in that position (fig. 395).

In many cases, when the ridge detail on the outer surface is damaged or hard to see, the ridge detail is clearly visible on the underside (fig. 394). If that's the situation, the skin is carefully turned inside out to avoid splitting or breaking, and then it’s inked and printed as usual. However, it's important to remember that printing on the underside of the skin will result in a reversed color and position; the ink will actually be on what would be the grooves of the pattern when looking at the correct outer side. If it's not a good idea to invert or turn the skin inside out due to the risk of damage, a photo of the inner ridge detail is taken, and the negative is printed to create an "as is" photograph for accurate classification and comparison. To get clear photos of the ridge detail, it may be helpful to trim the skin, flatten it between two pieces of glass, and photograph it in that position (fig. 395).

 

Fig. 394

Fig. 394

Fig. 395

Fig. 395

[Figs. 394-395]

[Figs. 394-395]

 

When the entire finger is placed in the solution during the hardening process, the skin, in absorbing the formalin solution, may swell and come[Pg 142] loose from the finger. Should this occur, the skin must be removed carefully and the procedure outlined above followed. If, however, the skin still adheres to the finger and is not too wrinkled, ink is applied and prints made. Should the skin be too wrinkled to secure a satisfactory impression, consideration is given to the injection of the tissue builder under the skin as previously mentioned, in order to distend the pattern area. If successful, the finger is inked and printed. This, of course, can be done only when the skin is intact.

When the whole finger is immersed in the solution during the hardening process, the skin may absorb the formalin solution, causing it to swell and separate[Pg 142] from the finger. If this happens, the skin needs to be removed carefully, and the steps outlined above should be followed. However, if the skin remains attached to the finger and isn't too wrinkled, ink can be applied, and prints can be made. If the skin is too wrinkled to get a clear impression, consideration may be given to injecting a tissue builder under the skin, as mentioned earlier, to stretch out the pattern area. If it works, the finger can be inked and printed. This can only be done when the skin is still intact.

Should part of the skin be destroyed to the extent that tissue builder cannot be injected effectively, while examination discloses that the pattern area is present but wrinkled, cut off the entire pattern area from the joint to the tip of the finger (fig. 396). Care must be exercised to insure getting the complete fingerprint pattern as well as cutting deep enough to avoid injury to the skin.

Should part of the skin be damaged to the point where tissue builder can't be effectively injected, and an examination shows that the fingerprint pattern is still there but wrinkled, remove the entire pattern area from the joint to the tip of the finger (fig. 396). Be careful to ensure you get the complete fingerprint pattern and cut deep enough to prevent injuring the skin.

 

Fig. 396

Fig. 396

[Fig. 396]

[Fig. 396]

 

After excision, the flesh is carefully and meticulously removed from the inside by scraping, cutting, and trimming until only the skin remains, or until the specimen is so thin it can be flattened out to remove most of the wrinkles. If the skin is fairly pliable, the operator should attempt to place it over one of his own fingers and try several prints. If the prints secured are not suitable, the piece of skin (exert care to avoid breaking or splitting) is flattened out between two pieces of glass and photographed (figs. 397, 398, 399).[Pg 143]

After removal, the tissue is carefully cleaned from the inside by scraping, cutting, and trimming until only the skin is left, or until the specimen is so thin that it can be flattened out to get rid of most of the wrinkles. If the skin is relatively flexible, the operator should try to place it over one of their fingers and make several prints. If the prints are not suitable, the piece of skin (handle with care to avoid breaking or splitting) is flattened between two pieces of glass and photographed (figs. 397, 398, 399).[Pg 143]

 

Figs. 397-399

Figs. 397-399

[Figs. 397-399]

[Figs. 397-399]

 

The foregoing outline covers the procedures followed in cases involving decomposition in which the outer skin is still present. In many instances of decomposition the outer skin has been destroyed or is in such a condition as to be of no value. It must be emphasized again that the second layer of skin possesses the same ridge detail as the outer layer and this, though finer and less pronounced, is just as effective for identification purposes.

The outline above details the procedures used in cases of decomposition where the outer skin is still intact. In many cases of decomposition, the outer skin has been damaged or is in such poor condition that it holds no value. It’s important to note again that the second layer of skin has the same ridge patterns as the outer layer, and although these are finer and less noticeable, they are just as useful for identification purposes.

If, from examination, it is apparent that the outer layer of skin is missing and the second layer is intact, the finger should be cleansed, dried, inked, and printed in the usual manner. If the specimen is wrinkled but pliable it may be possible to inject tissue builder, as previously mentioned, to round out the finger, then ink and print it.[Pg 144]

If, upon examination, it’s clear that the top layer of skin is gone and the second layer is intact, the finger should be cleaned, dried, inked, and printed as usual. If the sample is wrinkled but flexible, it might be possible to inject a tissue builder, as mentioned earlier, to shape the finger, and then ink and print it.[Pg 144]

Occasionally, some of the outer skin is still attached but is of no value. This skin should be removed by carefully picking or prying it off with a scalpel in such a manner as not to destroy or injure the ridge detail of the second layer. After the outer fragments have been removed, the second layer is cleaned, inked, and printed. In the event the resultant impressions are not suitable for classification and identification purposes, the most likely reason for it is that the ridge detail is too fine to print even though there are few if any wrinkles in it. If this is the case, the finger should be cut off at the second joint and photographed. Should wrinkles which cannot be removed by injecting tissue builder, and which also preclude the taking of suitable photographs, be present, the pattern area is cut off with a scalpel from the first joint to the tip. The flesh is then cut and scraped out as previously described, until the specimen is thin enough to flatten out between two pieces of glass which may be held together by scotch tape. The skin is then photographed.

Occasionally, some of the outer skin may still be attached, but it has no value. This skin should be removed by gently picking or prying it off with a scalpel, making sure not to damage the ridge detail of the second layer. Once the outer fragments are removed, the second layer is cleaned, inked, and printed. If the resulting impressions aren't suitable for classification and identification, it's likely because the ridge detail is too fine to print, even if there are few, if any, wrinkles. In this case, the finger should be cut off at the second joint and photographed. If there are wrinkles that can't be removed by injecting tissue builder, which also prevent suitable photographs from being taken, the pattern area should be cut off with a scalpel from the first joint to the tip. The flesh is then cut and scraped out as described earlier until the specimen is thin enough to flatten between two pieces of glass, which can be held together with scotch tape. Finally, the skin is photographed.

Occasionally, even after the flattening process it will be noted in the ground glass of the camera that the skin may be seen plainly but the ridge detail is very poor. This difficulty may be due to the poor contrast of the ridges and furrows when using direct lighting. If so, it can be overcome by scraping the skin to transparency and then photographing it by transmitted light (i.e., passing light through the skin). Sometimes, due to the condition of the skin, even though it is tissue thin, it will not be transparent. This can be overcome by soaking the skin in xylene for a few minutes and then photographing it by transmitted light while it is still impregnated with the xylene. If the substance dries too fast to permit proper photographing, the skin should be photographed while immersed in the xylene. (See subtopic of this chapter pertaining to "general photography.") Of course, after the skin has been photographed the negative should be printed to give a reverse position so that the print will be comparable with inked impressions on fingerprint cards.

Occasionally, even after the flattening process, you may notice on the ground glass of the camera that the skin is clearly visible, but the ridge detail is quite poor. This problem might arise from the low contrast of the ridges and furrows when using direct lighting. If that's the case, you can fix it by scraping the skin until it's transparent and then photographing it with transmitted light (i.e., shining light through the skin). Sometimes, due to the condition of the skin, even if it's very thin, it won't be transparent. You can fix this by soaking the skin in xylene for a few minutes and then photographing it with transmitted light while it's still soaked in xylene. If the substance dries too quickly for proper photographing, the skin should be photographed while it’s still immersed in the xylene. (See the subtopic of this chapter regarding "general photography.") After the skin has been photographed, be sure to print the negative to create a reverse image so that the print will match inked impressions on fingerprint cards.

Desiccation and charring

The problem confronting the fingerprint examiner in treating fingers which are desiccated or dried and shriveled is that of distending and softening the skin. Desiccated fingers are generally found to have the outer layer of skin intact and the ridge detail fairly clear. However, due to the shrinking, numerous wrinkles will be present, and as the drying process continues the skin and flesh harden until the fingers become almost as hard as stone.

The challenge facing the fingerprint examiner when dealing with fingers that are dried out and shriveled is how to stretch and soften the skin. Dried fingers usually have the outer layer of skin intact and the ridge detail fairly clear. However, because of the shrinkage, there will be many wrinkles, and as the drying process goes on, the skin and flesh harden until the fingers become almost as hard as stone.

It is sometimes possible to distend or swell the flesh by utilizing a 1- to 3-percent solution of sodium hydroxide or potassium hydroxide, sometimes referred to as caustic potash. As a matter of caution, this process should be tried with one finger before using it for the remaining[Pg 145] fingers. This point of caution is made because of the reaction of the potassium or sodium hydroxide, which is actually one of destruction. While absorption and swelling of the flesh occur, the disintegrating action of the fluid may result in total destruction of the flesh.

It’s sometimes possible to expand or inflate the skin by using a 1- to 3-percent solution of sodium hydroxide or potassium hydroxide, which is also known as caustic potash. As a precaution, this procedure should first be tested on one finger before applying it to the others[Pg 145]. This warning is important because potassium or sodium hydroxide produces a destructive reaction. While the skin may absorb the solution and swell, the breakdown effect of the fluid can lead to complete destruction of the tissue.

The finger to be distended is cut from the hand at the second joint and placed in the hydroxide. When it has resumed its normal size by the absorption of the solution, it is inked and printed. There is no set time for this process. The procedure may require a few hours or as much as several days until suitable results are obtained.

The finger that needs to be enlarged is cut off from the hand at the second joint and placed in the hydroxide. Once it returns to its normal size by absorbing the solution, it is inked and printed. There isn't a specific time frame for this process. It may take a few hours or even several days to achieve the desired results.

After the finger has been in the solution for about 30 minutes, it should be removed and examined in order to note the extent of the swelling and the reaction of the flesh to the solution. If no material change is noted, the finger is returned to the solution. A close watch is maintained and the finger is examined from time to time.

After the finger has been in the solution for about 30 minutes, it should be taken out and checked to see how much it has swollen and how the skin is reacting to the solution. If there are no noticeable changes, the finger goes back into the solution. It's important to keep a close eye on it, checking the finger periodically.

The solution may cause thin layers of skin to peel from the finger. Should this occur, the loose skin is carefully scraped off and the finger rinsed in water for a few minutes. It is then returned to the hydroxide for continuation of the process.

The solution may cause thin layers of skin to peel from the finger. If this happens, gently scrape off the loose skin and rinse the finger in water for a few minutes. Then, return it to the hydroxide to continue the process.

If, during the course of an inspection, it is seen that the flesh is becoming too soft, the finger should be placed in a 1- to 3-percent solution of formaldehyde or alcohol for several minutes in order to harden it.

If, during an inspection, it’s noticed that the flesh is getting too soft, the finger should be put in a 1- to 3-percent solution of formaldehyde or alcohol for several minutes to firm it up.

If, after several hours in the hydroxide, the finger has not reached its normal size, it should be placed in water for an hour or two. This has a tendency to hasten the swelling. When the finger is removed, it will be noted that a film has coated the surface. This coating is carefully scraped off and the finger is replaced in the hydroxide solution for an hour or so, again scraped if coated, soaked in clean water, etc. This process of alternating from solution to water, scraping, and replacing in hydroxide is continued until desirable results are obtained. The finger is then inked and printed.

If, after several hours in the hydroxide, the finger hasn't returned to its normal size, it should be placed in water for an hour or two. This tends to speed up the swelling. When the finger is taken out, you'll notice that a film has formed on the surface. This coating is carefully scraped off, and the finger is put back in the hydroxide solution for about an hour, again scraped if coated, soaked in clean water, and so on. This process of switching between the solution and water, scraping, and returning to the hydroxide continues until the desired results are achieved. The finger is then inked and printed.

The above process will so saturate the finger with solution that it may be too wet to print properly. Accordingly, the finger may be dipped into acetone for several seconds, removed, and be permitted to dry, after which it is inked and printed.

The above process will soak the finger with solution to the point that it might be too wet to print correctly. Therefore, the finger can be dipped in acetone for a few seconds, taken out, and allowed to dry, after which it can be inked and printed.

The complete process may take from several hours to as much as 10 days to secure suitable results. If the final results of the above procedure are satisfactory with the one finger being tested, the remaining fingers are given the same treatment. Care must be taken to identify each finger properly as to right index, right middle, etc., to avoid any mixup.

The whole process can take anywhere from a few hours to up to 10 days to get good results. If the final outcome of the procedure for the tested finger is satisfactory, the same treatment is applied to the other fingers. It's important to label each finger correctly, like right index, right middle, etc., to prevent any mix-ups.

In the event that the reaction of the solution on the first finger treated is not satisfactory and the operator feels that it would be futile to continue the process, the finger should be removed from the solution immediately, washed carefully in water, and placed in formaldehyde to harden sufficiently for it to be handled without causing injury to the ridges. The[Pg 146] pattern area is cut off in such a manner that sufficient surrounding surface permits the skin to be trimmed. Then from the cut side the skin is carefully scraped and cut to remove the excess flesh. While the cutting and scraping are being done, from time to time the skin should be soaked in xylene and massaged for purposes of softening to remove wrinkles. When the skin is thin enough and sufficiently pliable, the operator places the skin on his own finger, inks and prints it in the usual manner.

If the reaction of the solution on the first finger treated is not satisfactory and the operator feels it would be pointless to continue, the finger should be removed from the solution immediately, washed carefully in water, and placed in formaldehyde to harden enough to handle without damaging the ridges. The[Pg 146] pattern area is cut off in a way that leaves enough surrounding surface for the skin to be trimmed. Then, from the cut side, the skin is carefully scraped and cut to remove the excess flesh. While this cutting and scraping is happening, the skin should be soaked in xylene and massaged from time to time to soften it and remove wrinkles. When the skin is thin enough and flexible, the operator places the skin on their own finger, inks it, and prints it as usual.

If the results are satisfactory, the same procedure is followed with the remaining fingers. In the event the resultant inked prints are not suitable, the skin should be scraped until it is sufficiently thin to be flattened between two pieces of glass and photographed.

If the results are good, the same process is repeated for the other fingers. If the inked prints are not acceptable, the skin should be scraped until it's thin enough to be pressed between two pieces of glass and photographed.

Here again it is pointed out that should there be a poor contrast between the ridges and furrows when using direct lighting, the skin is scraped as thin as possible without tearing and it is then photographed by transmitted light.

Here again it is noted that if there is a poor contrast between the ridges and grooves when using direct lighting, the skin is scraped as thin as possible without tearing, and then it is photographed using transmitted light.

There are also included, as cases of desiccation, bodies which have been burned or subjected to severe heat. Often there are cases where the skin has become loose but is hard and crisp, or where the finger has been severely burned and is reduced almost to carbon, yet is firm. In these instances the ridge detail usually has not been destroyed.

There are also cases of drying out that include bodies that have been burned or exposed to extreme heat. Often, you'll find situations where the skin has become loose but feels hard and crispy, or where the finger has been badly burned and is nearly turned to carbon, yet remains firm. In these cases, the detail in the fingerprints is usually still intact.

When a body which has been severely burned is located, the problems of identification should be anticipated. Accordingly, before the body is removed, a careful examination of the fingers should be made in order to determine if the removal would, in any way, cause damage to the fingers. Should it be felt that because of the condition of the body removal would cause injury to the ridge detail, securing of fingerprints at the scene, or possibly the cutting off of the hands or fingers to avoid destruction of the skin, should be considered. An examination of the fingers may disclose that the outer skin is hardened and is partially loosened from the flesh. It is sometimes possible, by twisting back and forth, to remove this outer skin intact. If this is done, the operator may place the skin on his own finger, ink and print in the usual way.

When a body that has been badly burned is found, the challenges of identification should be expected. Therefore, before the body is moved, a thorough inspection of the fingers should be conducted to see if removing the body would harm the fingers in any way. If it’s believed that moving the body could damage the fingerprint ridges, securing fingerprints at the scene or even amputating the hands or fingers to prevent damage to the skin should be considered. Examining the fingers may reveal that the outer skin is hardened and partially detached from the flesh. Sometimes, by twisting back and forth, it’s possible to carefully remove this outer skin intact. If this is successful, the examiner can place the skin on their own finger, ink it, and print as usual.

If the skin is intact on the finger and is not wrinkled, of course there is no problem and the usual method is employed to secure impressions.

If the skin on the finger is undamaged and smooth, then there’s no issue, and the standard method is used to capture fingerprints.

Should wrinkles be present and the skin pliable, tissue builder is injected into the bulbs, which are then inked and printed.

Should wrinkles be present and the skin soft, tissue builder is injected into the bulbs, which are then inked and printed.

In the event the wrinkles cannot be removed in this fashion, the pattern area is cut off and the excess flesh scraped out as before. While the scraping and cutting are being accomplished, the skin should be soaked and massaged in xylene to soften. The skin is then placed on the operator's finger, inked and printed. Should prints made in this manner be unsatisfactory, the next recourse is photography.

In case the wrinkles can't be removed this way, the patterned area is cut off and the extra flesh is scraped out as it was done before. While scraping and cutting are happening, the skin should be soaked and massaged in xylene to soften it. The skin is then placed on the operator's finger, inked, and printed. If the prints made this way are not satisfactory, the next option is photography.

In some instances the fingers of burned bodies will be charred. Such cases require very careful handling as there is a probability of destroying[Pg 147] or disturbing the ridge detail through mistreatment. In these instances the procedure is determined by the degree of charring. In extreme cases the only method of recording is by photographing, using side lighting to secure the proper contrast of ridges and depressions. Obviously, no attempt should be made to ink and roll as the pressure necessary to secure the prints would cause the skin to crumble.

In some cases, the fingers of burned bodies may be charred. These situations require very careful handling because there’s a risk of destroying[Pg 147] or disturbing the ridge detail through mishandling. In these cases, the procedure is based on how much charring there is. In severe cases, the only way to record the details is by taking photographs, using side lighting to ensure the right contrast between ridges and depressions. Clearly, no attempt should be made to ink and roll the prints, as the pressure needed to capture the prints would cause the skin to crumble.

In instances where the charring has not reached the extreme stage the procedures previously set forth should be applied; that is, treatment of the skin by cleaning, softening, inking and printing, or, finally, by photographing (fig. 400).

In cases where the burning hasn't gone too far, the methods mentioned earlier should be used; that is, treating the skin by cleaning, softening, inking, and printing, or, finally, by photographing (fig. 400).

 

Fig. 400

Fig. 400

[Fig. 400]

[Fig. 400]

 

Water-soaked fingers

The third and final type of case which may confront the identification officer concerns the problem of maceration, that is, long immersion of the fingers in water.

The third and final type of case that may face the identification officer is the issue of maceration, which refers to the prolonged soaking of fingers in water.

One of the cardinal rules for securing legible impressions is that the fingers must be dry. Accordingly, in these cases it becomes a matter of drying the fingers in addition to contending with other difficulties. Usually the skin on the fingers absorbs water, swells and loosens from the flesh within a few hours after immersion.

One of the key rules for getting clear fingerprints is that your fingers need to be dry. So, in these situations, it’s important to dry your fingers on top of dealing with other challenges. Typically, the skin on your fingers soaks up water, swells, and separates from the flesh within a few hours after being in water.

If an examination discloses the skin to be water-soaked, wrinkled and pliable, but intact, the first step is to cleanse the skin carefully as previously described. Next, wipe the fingertip with alcohol, benzine or acetone, waiting a few seconds for it to dry. The skin is pulled or drawn tight[Pg 148] across the pattern area so that a large wrinkle is formed on the back of the finger, then the bulb is inked and printed.

If an examination shows the skin to be waterlogged, wrinkled, and flexible but still intact, the first step is to clean the skin thoroughly as described earlier. Next, wipe the fingertip with alcohol, benzene, or acetone, and wait a few seconds for it to dry. The skin is stretched across the pattern area to create a large wrinkle on the back of the finger, after which the bulb is inked and printed.[Pg 148]

If the skin is broken and hanging loose, but its pattern area is intact, it should be removed from the finger, cleansed and placed in alcohol or benzine (not acetone) for about a minute, then stretched carefully over the operator's finger so as to remove any wrinkles. It may then be printed.

If the skin is torn and hanging loose, but its patterned area is intact, it should be taken off the finger, cleaned, and placed in alcohol or benzene (not acetone) for about a minute. Then, it should be carefully stretched over the operator's finger to eliminate any wrinkles. It can then be printed.

Sometimes the skin is intact on the finger but so wrinkled and hard that it is not possible to draw it tight for inking. In this case it may be advisable to inject tissue builder to round out the bulbs for inking and printing. Should this fail, the ridge detail is photographed on the finger; or the skin is cut off, flattened between two pieces of glass and then photographed. Here, again, it must be pointed out that when the ridge detail does not show on the surface of the outer skin the underside should be examined, for many times the detail can be seen clearly. Should this be true, of course, the underside is photographed.

Sometimes the skin on the finger is intact but so wrinkled and hard that it can't be stretched tight for inking. In this case, it may be a good idea to inject a tissue builder to round out the pads for inking and printing. If that doesn’t work, the ridge detail can be photographed on the finger, or the skin can be removed, flattened between two pieces of glass, and then photographed. Again, it’s important to note that if the ridge detail isn’t visible on the outer skin, the underside should be checked, as often the detail can be seen clearly there. If that’s the case, the underside should be photographed.

In cases where it is noted that the outer skin is gone and the finger is not saturated with water, it is possible to dry the surface sufficiently for inking and printing purposes by rolling the finger on a blotter. If this fails, the finger is wiped off with a piece of cloth which has been saturated with alcohol, benzine or acetone, after which it may be inked and printed.

In situations where the outer layer of skin is missing and the finger isn't wet, you can dry the surface enough for inking and printing by rolling the finger on a blotter. If that doesn't work, wipe the finger with a cloth soaked in alcohol, benzene, or acetone, and then it can be inked and printed.

Drying the fingers

In many instances it will be found that the outer skin is gone and the fingers themselves are saturated with water. A quick method of drying out the fingers is to place them in full strength acetone for approximately 30 minutes. The fingers are then placed in xylene for about an hour or until the xylene has overcome the reaction of the acetone. After removal from the xylene the fingers should be placed on a blotter until the surface of the fingers appears dry. They are then ready to be inked and printed.

In many cases, you'll notice that the outer skin is missing and the fingers are soaked with water. A fast way to dry the fingers is to soak them in full-strength acetone for about 30 minutes. Then, put the fingers in xylene for around an hour or until the xylene neutralizes the acetone’s effect. Once you take the fingers out of the xylene, lay them on a blotter until the surface looks dry. They are then ready to be inked and printed.

It will be noted in this procedure that when the fingers are removed from the acetone they dry and harden in a matter of seconds. The purpose of the xylene is to resoften the fingers. After this treatment, should the resulting inked impressions be unsuitable for classification purposes, the ridge detail should be photographed.

It will be noted in this procedure that when the fingers are taken out of the acetone, they dry and harden within seconds. The purpose of the xylene is to soften the fingers again. After this treatment, if the resulting inked impressions aren’t suitable for classification, the ridge detail should be photographed.

X-ray photography

The use of X-ray photographs (radiography) has been advocated by some for purposes of recording the ridge details in decomposed, desiccated, or macerated cases. Briefly, the procedure involves the covering of the fingers with heavy salts such as bismuth or lead carbonate, in a thin, even film over the pattern area and then, by the use of the X-ray, reproducing the[Pg 149] ridge detail. This procedure necessitates the use of X-ray equipment and a technician skilled in making radiographs. It is, therefore, an expensive operation. The results of the radiograph in no way compensate for the expense, time, and skill required inasmuch as in those cases where many wrinkles and creases appear in the fingers, especially desiccated specimens, the results have been very poor. In instances where there are no wrinkles or only a few, and where the creases are not too deep, the ridge detail is reproduced very well in the radiograph. In these cases, however, it is usually possible to secure impressions by inking and rolling in the regular way or, should this fail, ordinary photography will certainly give satisfactory results. For economical and practical purposes the use of the X-ray is not recommended.

The use of X-ray photographs (radiography) has been suggested by some for recording ridge details in cases that are decomposed, dried out, or processed. Simply put, the method involves coating the fingers with heavy salts like bismuth or lead carbonate in a thin, even layer over the pattern area and then using X-rays to capture the[Pg 149] ridge detail. This process requires X-ray equipment and a technician who is skilled in taking radiographs, making it a costly operation. The results from the radiograph do not justify the expense, time, and expertise involved because, in cases where there are many wrinkles and creases in the fingers, particularly in dried specimens, the results have been quite poor. In situations where there are few wrinkles or only slight ones and the creases aren’t too deep, the ridge detail is captured well in the radiograph. However, in these instances, it’s usually possible to get impressions by inking and rolling in the standard way or, if that fails, regular photography will definitely provide satisfactory results. For practical and cost-effective reasons, the use of X-rays is not recommended.

General photography

In the foregoing instances in which it has been impossible to obtain suitable inked impressions it will be noted that the last resort has always been photography. In all probability in advanced cases of decomposition, desiccation, and maceration it may not be possible to secure inked impressions which can be properly classified. Hence, it will be necessary to photograph the ridge detail. Accordingly, there are outlined below several methods of photographing the ridges which have been used with success.

In the previous cases where it has been impossible to get suitable inked impressions, it’s important to note that photography has always been the last option. In advanced cases of decomposition, drying out, and breakdown, it may not be possible to get inked impressions that can be properly classified. So, it will be necessary to photograph the ridge detail. Below are several successful methods for photographing the ridges that have been used.

In photographing the ridge detail on fingers it has been determined to be most practicable to photograph the finger natural, or 1/1, size inasmuch as comparisons will usually be made with inked impressions which are natural size. Any camera built or adjusted to taking 1/1 size pictures, and with which the lighting may be arranged to best advantage, may be used.

In photographing the ridge details on fingers, it has been found to be most practical to take photos of the finger at its natural size, or 1/1, since comparisons are usually made with inked impressions that are also natural size. Any camera designed or set up to take 1/1 size pictures, along with proper lighting arranged for optimal effect, can be used.

There is a wide choice of film which can be used for this purpose. The so-called soft films are all good for photographing ridge detail on fingers. Process film is not recommended inasmuch as the film presents too much of a contrast. Consequently, if it is used, some of the ridge detail will be lost, especially if wrinkles are present in the skin.

There are plenty of films available for this purpose. The so-called soft films work well for capturing ridge details on fingers. Process film is not recommended since it has too much contrast. As a result, if it's used, some of the ridge details can get lost, especially if there are wrinkles in the skin.

Lighting is accomplished by the use of gooseneck lamps, floodlights, or a spotlight. If a fingerprint camera is used, its lights may be sufficient.

Lighting is done using gooseneck lamps, floodlights, or a spotlight. If a fingerprint camera is used, its lights might be enough.

The manner of lighting may be by direct light, side light, transmitted light or reflected light, depending upon the prevailing condition of the finger or skin.

The way to provide lighting can be through direct light, side light, transmitted light, or reflected light, depending on the current condition of the finger or skin.

Direct light is used in those cases in which the ridge detail is fairly clear and there are no wrinkles present; or, if wrinkles are present, they are not deep enough to interfere with photographing the ridges.

Direct light is used when the ridge detail is pretty clear and there are no wrinkles present; or, if there are wrinkles, they aren't deep enough to interfere with photographing the ridges.

Side lighting is used when there are no wrinkles of any consequence and the ridge detail is clear but because of discoloration the ridges[Pg 150] are not readily seen in the ground glass as there is lack of contrast between ridges and depressions. Accordingly, the lights, instead of being focused directly on the skin or finger, are placed to the side of the object so that the light is directed across the skin or finger, thus highlighting the ridges and shading the depressions.

Side lighting is used when there aren’t any significant wrinkles, and the ridge details are clear. However, due to discoloration, the ridges[Pg 150] aren’t easily visible on the ground glass because there’s not enough contrast between the ridges and depressions. Therefore, the lights are positioned to the side of the object instead of directly on the skin or finger, allowing the light to sweep across the skin or finger. This technique highlights the ridges while creating shadows in the depressions.

In side lighting, two lights may be used. Better results are often obtained, however, by using only one light, such as a spotlight, the beam of which can be controlled to best advantage.

In side lighting, two lights can be used. However, better results are often achieved by using just one light, like a spotlight, as its beam can be adjusted for optimal effect.

Transmitted light is used in cases in which the skin has peeled off or in which the dermis has been removed, cut, and scraped thin so that light will go through. The prepared skin is placed between two pieces of glass pressed together in order to flatten the skin or dermis and remove creases. By trimming some of the surplus skin or dermis, especially at the top, it may be more easily flattened. After the glass is properly mounted in front of the camera, the lights are placed behind it and light is directed through the skin. The ridge detail is brought into focus on the ground glass. Before the picture is actually taken it is suggested that the ground glass be checked by first using one light and then two lights to see which is more effective.

Transmitted light is used when the skin has peeled away or when the dermis has been cut, removed, or scraped thin enough for light to pass through. The prepared skin is placed between two pieces of glass that are pressed together to flatten the skin or dermis and to eliminate creases. By trimming some of the excess skin or dermis, especially at the top, it can be flattened more easily. Once the glass is properly mounted in front of the camera, the lights are positioned behind it, directing light through the skin. The ridge detail is focused on the ground glass. Before taking the picture, it's recommended to check the ground glass by first using one light and then two lights to determine which setup is more effective.

There will be instances in which the second layer of skin, cut and scraped thin enough to flatten out, fails when dry to have a sufficient contrast between ridges and depressions for purposes of photographing. The same piece of skin when soaked in xylene will show a marked contrast, which it loses on drying. This difficulty is overcome by photographing the skin while in solution, which can be done by placing the skin in a test tube or a small bottle of a size to keep the skin upright and the ridges toward the camera. The test tube or bottle is then filled with xylene.

There will be times when the second layer of skin, cut and scraped thin enough to flatten out, doesn't provide a clear contrast between the ridges and depressions when it's dry, making it difficult to photograph. However, the same piece of skin, when soaked in xylene, shows a strong contrast, which it loses once it dries. This issue can be solved by photographing the skin while it's still in solution, which can be done by placing the skin in a test tube or a small bottle that's sized to keep the skin upright and the ridges facing the camera. The test tube or bottle is then filled with xylene.

If the skin is sufficiently thin, transmitted light may be used. Should it be found, however, that transmitted light is not effective, then direct light may be tried and the results checked in the ground glass (fig. 401).

If the skin is thin enough, you can use transmitted light. However, if transmitted light doesn't work, then you can try direct light and check the results on the ground glass (fig. 401).

 

Fig. 401

Fig. 401

[Fig. 401]

[Fig. 401]

 

When photographing a small curved surface such as a test tube, direct lighting will usually create a high light. If the high light as shown in the ground glass is over the ridge detail on the skin, a poor photograph will result. If the high light cannot be removed by rearranging the lights, then reflected light should be tried.

When taking pictures of a small curved surface like a test tube, direct lighting often creates a bright spot. If that bright spot, as seen on the ground glass, is over the ridge detail on the surface, the photo will turn out badly. If you can’t eliminate the bright spot by adjusting the lights, then try using reflected light instead.

In order to effect reflected light a large piece of white paper, cardboard, or similar material is used. A hole is cut in the center of the paper or cardboard. This must be big enough for the camera lens to protrude through. The ends of the paper or board are curved toward the skin or finger to be photographed. The lamps which are to be used are placed facing the curved paper or cardboard in such fashion that the light will strike the paper or board and be reflected by the curved surface to the object.

To create reflected light, use a large piece of white paper, cardboard, or a similar material. Cut a hole in the center of the paper or cardboard that is large enough for the camera lens to fit through. The edges of the paper or board should be curved toward the skin or finger that you’re photographing. Position the lamps facing the curved paper or cardboard so that the light hits it and reflects onto the object.

The lamps should be close enough to the paper or board to give the[Pg 151] maximum light. Care should be exercised, however, not to place them too close, because of the fire hazard.

The lamps should be positioned near the paper or board to provide the[Pg 151] maximum amount of light. However, care should be taken not to place them too close due to the risk of fire.

Any arrangement of lamps and reflectors giving a similar effect as the above should prove suitable.

Any setup of lamps and reflectors that creates a similar effect as mentioned above should work well.

Fingers or skin which have a mottled, reddish-brown color because of decomposition, exposure to severe heat, or diffusion with blood present a problem of lack of contrast between ridges and depressions for photographic purposes. This lack of contrast can be overcome to a large extent by the use of a yellow or light red filter. Sometimes, in those cases where the discoloration is due to the diffusion of blood throughout the tissues, the blood can be washed out by saturating and rinsing the specimen in a 10- to 20-percent solution of citric acid. If, of course, the blood is not removed satisfactorily, the photographing should be done with the filter.

Fingers or skin that have a mottled reddish-brown color due to decomposition, exposure to high heat, or mixing with blood create a challenge because of the low contrast between the ridges and grooves for photography. This issue can largely be addressed by using a yellow or light red filter. In some cases where the discoloration results from blood spreading through the tissues, the blood can be removed by soaking and rinsing the specimen in a 10% to 20% citric acid solution. If the blood isn’t removed properly, the photography should be done using the filter.

As previously stated, the fingerprint camera can be readily adapted to the use of photographing fingers or skin specimens for ridge detail. Sometimes it is possible to photograph the skin or finger in the same manner as one does a latent print. There will be instances, however, in which the standard use of the fingerprint camera will not be possible or effective, such as for side light, reflected light, and sometimes transmitted light, or instances in which it is not possible to get the finger or skin flush with the opening of the camera. In these instances the lights of the camera are not used, so the batteries should be removed and gooseneck lamps or other[Pg 152] suitable lighting equipment and ground glass utilized when the finger or skin is prepared for photographing (fig. 402).

As mentioned earlier, the fingerprint camera can easily be adapted for taking photos of fingers or skin samples to capture ridge details. Sometimes, you can photograph the skin or finger just like you would a latent print. However, there will be situations where using the fingerprint camera in the usual way won’t work well, such as with side lighting, reflected light, and occasionally transmitted light, or when it's hard to position the finger or skin flush with the camera opening. In these cases, the camera’s lights shouldn’t be used, so remove the batteries and use gooseneck lamps or other[Pg 152] appropriate lighting equipment along with ground glass when preparing the finger or skin for photography (fig. 402).

 

Fig. 402

Fig. 402

[Fig. 402]

[Fig. 402]

 

The camera is opened either at the point where the lights are housed or at the lens point, whichever is most effective. Then, opening the shutter, the operator moves the camera either toward or away from the finger or skin to the point where the ridge detail is sharpest in the ground glass. The camera is held firmly, the ground glass is removed, the film is inserted and the photograph taken.

The camera is opened either at the point where the lights are housed or at the lens point, whichever is most effective. Then, after opening the shutter, the operator moves the camera either closer to or farther from the finger or skin until the ridge detail is sharpest on the ground glass. The camera is held steadily, the ground glass is removed, the film is inserted, and the photograph is taken.

With respect to exposure time, it is possible only to generalize and point out that each case will have its own individual aspects. Controlling features for consideration will be the type of film, the type and size of lights, the method of lighting (direct, side, transmitted or reflected) and also whether or not filters are used. Accordingly, there may be a wide variation of exposure time in different cases.

With regard to exposure time, we can only make generalizations and note that each situation will have its unique characteristics. Key factors to consider include the type of film, the kind and size of lights, the lighting method (direct, side, transmitted, or reflected), and whether filters are used. As a result, exposure times can vary significantly in different scenarios.

The best approach for arriving at the proper exposure time is merely to make a test exposure, develop the film, and from an examination determine if it is underexposed or overexposed. Time the next exposure accordingly, until satisfactory results are obtained.

The best way to figure out the right exposure time is to do a test exposure, develop the film, and then check to see if it's underexposed or overexposed. Time the next exposure based on that, and keep adjusting until you get good results.

As has been mentioned previously, when photographing the ridges on fingers or skin, the ridge detail will be in reverse position, the opposite from an inked impression made from the same skin or finger. (This is true except in those cases in which the underside of the epidermis is photo[Pg 153]graphed.) Accordingly, when the negative is printed, it should be printed gloss side to sensitive side of paper to give the position comparable to an inked print made from the same skin or finger. In order to avoid error or confusion a notation should be made on the photograph of each finger, or, if they are cut and mounted on a fingerprint card, point out that the position has been reversed and that the prints are in their correct position for classifying and searching. Otherwise, it is possible that the right hand may be mistaken for the left hand and vice versa.

As mentioned earlier, when photographing the ridges on fingers or skin, the ridge details will appear in reverse, opposite to an inked impression taken from the same skin or finger. (This is the case unless the underside of the epidermis is photographed.) Therefore, when printing the negative, it should be printed glossy side to the sensitive side of the paper to match the position of an inked print from the same skin or finger. To avoid any errors or confusion, a note should be added on the photograph of each finger, or if they are cut and attached to a fingerprint card, indicate that the position has been reversed and that the prints are correctly positioned for classification and searching. Otherwise, it’s possible for the right hand to be mistaken for the left hand and vice versa.

If the underside of the epidermis or outer skin is being photographed, the negative should be printed in the normal manner, that is, emulsion side of negative to sensitized side of paper. Here, reversal of position is not necessary for when the ridge detail is viewed from the underside it appears to be in the same position as the inked impression normally is reflected on a fingerprint card.

If the underside of the skin or outer layer is being photographed, the negative should be printed in the usual way, meaning the emulsion side of the negative should face the sensitized side of the paper. In this case, reversing the position isn't necessary because when the ridge detail is viewed from underneath, it looks to be in the same position as the inked impression usually appears on a fingerprint card.

Care should be taken to see that each photograph is labeled correctly to indicate the finger it represents, such as right thumb, right index, right ring, etc. It is imperative that no error occurs in such labeling, inasmuch as it is highly probable that the resultant classification would be incorrect and failure to make an identification might very easily follow.

Care should be taken to ensure that each photograph is labeled correctly to indicate which finger it represents, such as right thumb, right index, right ring, etc. It’s crucial that there are no mistakes in this labeling, as any errors could lead to incorrect classification and make identification more difficult.

Deceased infants

The foregoing has dealt with the securing of fingerprints of unknown deceased persons for identification purposes. The basis for such action is the presumptive possibility that the unknowns had been fingerprinted previously and through this medium might be identified.

The previous discussion focused on obtaining fingerprints from unidentified deceased individuals for identification purposes. The rationale for this approach is the potential that these unknown individuals may have been fingerprinted before, and this method could help identify them.

Another type of problem, however, arises with the finding of a deceased infant. It can be safely assumed that the possibility of there being in existence a set of known fingerprints of the infant is extremely remote. Nevertheless, in view of the fact that many hospitals throughout the country, as part of the general routine of recording a birth, secure the infant's footprints, it would follow that there could be a remote possibility of identifying the deceased infant through its footprints. The foregoing principles and procedures would then apply in securing the foot impression of a deceased infant. It is fully realized that in practically all cases involving the finding of an abandoned infant corpse the infant is probably illegitimate issue and delivery did not occur in a hospital, but there have been instances where such was not the case.

Another type of problem, however, comes up when finding a deceased infant. It's safe to say that the chances of there being a set of known fingerprints for the infant are extremely low. However, since many hospitals across the country routinely take the footprints of newborns, there’s a slight chance of identifying the deceased infant through its footprints. The principles and procedures mentioned earlier would then apply to obtaining the foot impression of a deceased infant. It's important to acknowledge that in almost all cases involving the discovery of an abandoned infant’s body, the infant is likely to be illegitimate and the birth didn’t happen in a hospital, but there have been cases where that wasn’t true.

The importance of securing footprints of deceased infants killed in a common disaster cannot be overemphasized. Such disasters may involve the death of infants of lawful issue, and in many instances there are hospital footprint records available which may prove of value as a positive means of identification.[Pg 154]

The importance of securing the footprints of deceased infants who died in a common disaster cannot be overstated. Such disasters may involve the deaths of infants born to legal parents, and often, there are hospital footprint records available that can serve as valuable positive identification.[Pg 154]

Technical consideration

The methods described are intended to record, either by printing with ink or by photographing as legibly as possible, the ridge details of the tips of the fingers of unknown dead for identification purposes. The securing of the impressions enables the fingerprint examiner to classify and search them through a file. This "search," of course, means merely to make a comparison of the deceased's prints with the prints of known individuals.

The methods outlined are meant to capture, either by printing with ink or by photographing as clearly as possible, the ridge details of the fingertips of unidentified deceased individuals for identification purposes. Obtaining these impressions allows the fingerprint examiner to classify and search them through a database. This "search" simply involves comparing the deceased's prints with those of known individuals.

It is well to bear in mind the fact that the dermis or epidermis may have undergone certain physical changes and that in order for the fingerprint examiner to make a proper comparison he must know the changes which can and do occur. Otherwise, he may fail to make an identification (fig. 403).

It’s important to remember that the dermis or epidermis might have gone through some physical changes, and for the fingerprint examiner to make an accurate comparison, he needs to be aware of the changes that can happen. Otherwise, he might not be able to make a proper identification (fig. 403).

 

Fig. 403

Fig. 403

[Fig. 403]

[Fig. 403]

 

Consider first the epidermis or outer layer of skin in cases of maceration (the skin is water soaked). There may be considerable swelling. The ridges become broader and are more distinct. An inked impression in such an instance may show a pattern larger in area than a print made from the same finger when the person was alive. Also, if the skin is on the finger but is loose, inking and rolling could distort the impression so that some of the ridge formations would seem to be in a different alignment from corresponding details in a print made during life. When decomposition commences, what are really solid ridges may be broken, giving rise to the possibility that there appear to be more characteristics than there actually are (figs. 404 and 405).[Pg 155]

Consider first the epidermis, or outer layer of skin, in cases of maceration (when the skin is soaked in water). There could be significant swelling. The ridges become wider and are more defined. An inked impression in this case might show a pattern that’s larger in area than a print taken from the same finger when the person was alive. Additionally, if the skin on the finger is loose, inking and rolling could distort the impression, making some ridge formations appear misaligned compared to the corresponding details in a print made during life. When decomposition starts, what are actually solid ridges may become fragmented, leading to the possibility that there appear to be more characteristics than there really are (figs. 404 and 405).[Pg 155]

 

Fig. 404-405

Fig. 404-405

[Figs. 404-405]

[Figs. 404-405]

 

The existence of wrinkles may also cause the impression to acquire an appearance of dissimilarity when compared with the original inked print.

The presence of wrinkles can also make the impression look different compared to the original inked print.

With respect to cases of desiccation, there will probably be shrinkage, hence, the impressions made may appear smaller than in life and the ridges will be finer. In cases in which the epidermis has been lost and there remains only the dermis or second layer, there will usually be shrinkage with the same results. Here also, wrinkles, if present, may cause a difference in appearance from the normal print.

Regarding cases of drying out, there will likely be shrinkage, so the impressions may look smaller than in real life and the ridges will be finer. In cases where the outer skin layer is lost and only the dermis or second layer remains, there will usually be shrinkage with similar results. Additionally, if there are wrinkles present, they may cause the appearance to differ from a normal print.

In addition to shrinkage and wrinkles in cases involving the second layer of skin, there is a radical change in the appearance of the ridges themselves. The second or dermal layer of skin is composed of what are called dermal papillae which have the appearance of minute blunt pegs or nipples. The dermal papillae are arranged in double rows (fig. 406). Each double row lies deep in a ridge of the surface or epidermal layer and presents the same variations of ridge characteristics as are on the outer layer of skin except that they are double. Accordingly, when the second layer of skin is printed or photographed, the ridge detail will appear in double. That is, the ridges will appear as though they were split. This may well confuse the fingerprint examiner in that what may be a loop having 10 ridge counts may appear to be a loop having 20 ridge counts[Pg 157] when the impression is made from the second or dermal layer of skin. These double rows of ridges are finer and not as sharp as the detail on the outer skin, which adds to the difficulty of arriving at a correct classification and making a proper comparison.

In addition to shrinkage and wrinkles in cases involving the second layer of skin, there is a significant change in the appearance of the ridges themselves. The second or dermal layer of skin is made up of what are called dermal papillae that look like tiny blunt pegs or nipples. The dermal papillae are arranged in double rows (fig. 406). Each double row sits deep within a ridge of the surface or epidermal layer and shows the same variations in ridge characteristics as those on the outer layer of skin, except they are doubled. As a result, when the second layer of skin is printed or photographed, the ridge detail will appear doubled. This means the ridges may seem split. This can confuse the fingerprint examiner, as what might appear to be a loop with 10 ridge counts could look like a loop with 20 ridge counts when the impression comes from the second or dermal layer of skin. These double rows of ridges are finer and not as sharp as the detail on the outer skin, making it more challenging to reach a correct classification and perform an accurate comparison.[Pg 157]

 

Fig. 406

Fig. 406

[Fig. 406]

[Fig. 406]

 

FBI aid

The above techniques and procedures have been dealt with upon the basis that the law enforcement officers would, when a corpse has been found, attempt to secure a set of finger impressions in an effort to identify the unknown dead. If, however, the officer feels that the job is too difficult or is beyond his scope, consideration should be given to cutting off the hands or fingers of the deceased and forwarding them to the Identification Division of the FBI for processing. If this course is decided upon, it is reiterated that local statutes governing the cutting of the dead must be complied with and proper authorization must be secured.

The techniques and procedures mentioned above are based on the assumption that law enforcement officers will try to obtain a set of fingerprints when a body is found in order to identify the deceased. However, if the officer finds the task too challenging or thinks it's beyond their expertise, they should consider amputating the hands or fingers of the deceased and sending them to the FBI's Identification Division for processing. If this decision is made, it’s important to follow local laws regarding the handling of the deceased and to obtain the necessary permissions.

In order to facilitate the transmission of such specimens to the FBI the following suggestions are made:

To help send these specimens to the FBI, here are some suggestions:

First, it is deemed most desirable, when possible, to have both of the hands, severed at the wrist, forwarded in their entirety (fig. 407). It is[Pg 158] desired that the hands, rather than each separate finger, be sent inasmuch as it eliminates the possibility of getting the fingers mixed up or incorrectly labeled. If, however, it is not possible to send the hands for some reason, then, of course, the fingers should be cut off and forwarded. In cutting, the fingers should be cut off at the palm beginning with the right thumb, then the right index, ring, etc., just as though they were to be printed. As soon as each finger is cut off it should be placed in an individual container, such as a small glass jar, and immediately marked as to which particular finger it is.

First, it’s most desirable, when possible, to send both hands, severed at the wrist, in their entirety (fig. 407). It’s preferred that the hands, rather than each separate finger, be sent since this eliminates the chance of mixing up or mislabeling the fingers. However, if it’s not possible to send the hands for some reason, then the fingers should be cut off and sent instead. When cutting, the fingers should be cut off at the palm, starting with the right thumb, then the right index, ring, etc., just as if they were going to be printed. As soon as each finger is cut off, it should be placed in an individual container, like a small glass jar, and immediately marked to indicate which finger it is.

 

Fig. 407

Fig. 407

[Fig. 407]

[Fig. 407]

 

In the event that the hands or fingers of more than one dead are being transmitted, it is absolutely necessary that not only the fingers be properly labeled but that each body also be given an identifying number or symbol which must be indicated on the hands or fingers cut from that body as well, in order to avoid the embarrassing situation of identifying the hands and not knowing from which body they were cut.

In cases where the hands or fingers from more than one deceased person are being transferred, it’s crucial that not only are the fingers clearly labeled, but each body also needs to be assigned a unique identification number or symbol. This should be marked on the hands or fingers removed from that body to prevent the awkward situation of being able to identify the hands but not knowing which body they came from.

In shipping, the hands, fingers, or skins may be placed in preserving solutions such as 5-percent solution of formaldehyde, 5-percent solution of alcohol, or embalming fluid. When hands or fingers are desiccated (dried out), however, it is most desirable that they be placed in airtight containers and sent without any preservative. If glass containers are used, the specimens should be packed in such a manner as to avoid breakage. Dry ice is a suitable preservative for transmitting such specimens but it should not be used when shipping will take more than 24 hours.

In shipping, hands, fingers, or skins can be put in preserving solutions like a 5% formaldehyde solution, a 5% alcohol solution, or embalming fluid. However, when hands or fingers are dried out, it's best to put them in airtight containers and send them without any preservative. If glass containers are used, the specimens should be packed to prevent breakage. Dry ice is a good option for preserving these specimens during transit, but it shouldn't be used if the shipping takes more than 24 hours.

In making up a package using dry ice, the hands or fingers, properly tagged, should be placed in cellophane or paper bags. A material such as sawdust, shavings or similar packing which acts as an insulation is placed around the specimens. A sufficient amount of dry ice is then placed in the package which is then packed tight with more sawdust or shavings. The dry ice should not be in direct contact with the cellophane or paper bags which contain the hands or fingers.

In preparing a package with dry ice, the hands or fingers, properly labeled, should be placed in cellophane or paper bags. An insulating material like sawdust, shavings, or similar packing is placed around the specimens. Then, a sufficient amount of dry ice is added to the package, which is tightly packed with more sawdust or shavings. The dry ice should not be in direct contact with the cellophane or paper bags containing the hands or fingers.

A letter covering transmittal of the specimens should be prepared in duplicate. It should, of course, indicate the sender. The names of any probable victims, sex, race and approximate age of the deceased should, if such information is available, be secured from the coroner or medical examiner and be included in the letter. A copy of the letter should be placed in the package. The original should be mailed separately. Both letter and package should be addressed as follows:

A letter detailing the transmission of the specimens should be created in two copies. It should clearly show who the sender is. The names of any possible victims, along with their gender, race, and estimated age, should be obtained from the coroner or medical examiner and included in the letter, if that information is available. One copy of the letter should be placed in the package, while the original should be sent separately. Both the letter and the package should be addressed as follows:

Director
Federal Bureau of Investigation
U.S. Department of Justice
Washington 25, D.C.

Director Federal Bureau of Investigation U.S. Department of Justice Washington, D.C. 20225

Attention: Identification Division—Latent Fingerprint Section.

Attention: ID Division—Latent Fingerprint Section.

If the package contains glass jars it should be marked "Fragile" to insure careful handling in transit.

If the package contains glass jars, it should be labeled "Fragile" to ensure careful handling during shipping.

The package should be sent railway express, prepaid, or, where there is need for speed, by air express, prepaid. When they are received by the Identification Division, the specimens will undergo various treatments which may necessitate further cutting, scraping, etc. In all cases, regardless of condition, the specimens will be returned after examination.

The package should be sent via railway express, prepaid, or, if speed is required, by air express, also prepaid. Once received by the Identification Division, the samples will go through various treatments that may involve additional cutting, scraping, etc. In all situations, no matter the condition, the samples will be returned after examination.

All of the foregoing matter has dealt with instances in which it has been assumed that all ten fingers are available, or a sufficient number of the fingers of a deceased have been secured and impressions suitable for searching through the fingerprint files of the FBI have been recorded.

All the previous information has discussed situations where it’s assumed that all ten fingers are usable, or a sufficient number of the deceased's fingers have been obtained and high-quality impressions suitable for searching through the FBI's fingerprint files have been recorded.

There will be cases, however, where only a few, or possibly only one, of the fingers has sufficient ridge detail for identification. In such instances a search through the FBI files would be impractical. This, however, does not preclude the possibility of making a positive identification by the use of the one finger. Though a search through the file is not possible, a comparison can be made with the fingerprints of individuals who it is thought the deceased may be or, in some instances, with the fingerprints of missing persons.

There will be situations where only a few, or maybe just one, of the fingers have enough ridge detail for identification. In these cases, searching through the FBI files would be impractical. However, this doesn't rule out the possibility of making a positive identification using that one finger. Even though a file search isn't feasible, a comparison can be made with the fingerprints of individuals believed to be the deceased or, in some cases, with the fingerprints of missing persons.

In this connection, where one or only a few fingers are forwarded to the FBI, the names of all possible victims should also be submitted. The fingerprints of those individuals, if available, will then be taken out of file and compared with the ridge detail on the finger of the deceased in an endeavor to establish a positive identification. Many such identifications have been effected.

In this context, when one or just a few fingerprints are sent to the FBI, the names of all potential victims should also be provided. The fingerprints of those individuals, if available, will then be retrieved from the files and compared with the ridge patterns on the finger of the deceased in an effort to confirm their identity. Many such identifications have been made.

In conjunction with the usual services afforded authorized law enforcement agencies, the services of an FBI fingerprint expert are also made available in those cases where expert testimony is necessary to establish the identity of the deceased through fingerprints, providing, of course, such an identification has been made.

In addition to the standard services provided to authorized law enforcement agencies, the expertise of an FBI fingerprint specialist is also available in cases where expert testimony is needed to confirm the identity of the deceased through fingerprints, as long as such identification has been established.

Extreme caution should be exercised in the case of the chemicals previously mentioned in this article. Acetone, alcohol, benzine, and xylene are highly inflammable and should neither be used near open flames nor while the operator is smoking. The fumes given off by acetone, benzine, xylene, and formaldehyde are toxic and may cause sickness. They should be used in a well-ventilated room only. It is also suggested that the fingerprint examiner wear rubber gloves when using acetone, benzine, xylene, formaldehyde, potassium hydroxide, or sodium hydroxide. These chemicals will cause the skin to peel. Strong concentrations may cause burns.

Extreme caution should be taken with the chemicals mentioned in this article. Acetone, alcohol, benzene, and xylene are highly flammable and should not be used near open flames or while smoking. The fumes released by acetone, benzene, xylene, and formaldehyde are toxic and can make you sick. They should only be used in a well-ventilated area. It’s also recommended that the fingerprint examiner wear rubber gloves when handling acetone, benzene, xylene, formaldehyde, potassium hydroxide, or sodium hydroxide. These chemicals can cause skin peeling, and strong concentrations may lead to burns.

In conclusion, it is pointed out that the procedures and techniques which have been described are those currently being used by the fingerprint experts of the FBI. These methods are fast and the results have been most satisfactory. This Bureau does not claim, however, that satisfactory results cannot be achieved through variations thereof or different methods.

In conclusion, it should be noted that the procedures and techniques described are those currently employed by fingerprint experts at the FBI. These methods are quick, and the results have been very satisfactory. However, the Bureau does not claim that satisfactory results cannot be achieved through variations or different methods.


CHAPTER XI

Establishment of a Local Fingerprint Identification Bureau

 

For the information and assistance of officials who desire to establish a local fingerprint identification bureau, the following suggestions are being made to indicate the principal materials necessary to equip such a bureau:

For the information and assistance of officials who want to set up a local fingerprint identification bureau, here are some suggestions outlining the main materials needed to equip such a bureau:

Fingerprinting equipment

For the purpose of taking fingerprints there should be a stand with a clamp for holding the fingerprint cards steady. This latter item is necessary to prevent smudging the prints. A tube of printer's ink is used. The ink is applied by a roller to a glass plate upon which the fingers are inked before being rolled on the cards. The complete equipment for the above process may be secured from a number of commercial sources or it can be made. Figure 408 depicts an inking stand.

For fingerprinting, there should be a stand with a clamp to hold the fingerprint cards in place. This is important to avoid smudging the prints. A tube of printer's ink is used, which is applied with a roller to a glass plate where the fingers are inked before being rolled onto the cards. The complete equipment for this process can be purchased from various commercial sources or can be made. Figure 408 shows an inking stand.

 

Fig. 408

Fig. 408

[Fig. 408]

[Fig. 408]

 

Fingerprint files

It is suggested that the fingerprint card be white, light cardboard, 8 by 8 inches, slightly glazed. This size is convenient, as it allows all the space necessary for recording the classification of the prints and general descriptive information concerning the individual. In the event the new bureau desires to contribute copies of its fingerprints to the Federal Bureau of Investigation, the latter will, upon request, gladly furnish fingerprint cards for the purpose together with envelopes and instructions on how to take fingerprints. It is suggested that the new bureau design its cards similar to those furnished by the Federal Bureau of Investigation, as these have been designed after special study and have been found to be satisfactory over a long period of time. Figures 409 and 410 show the fingerprint side and reverse side of the criminal fingerprint card used by the Federal Bureau of Investigation.

It’s recommended that the fingerprint card be made of white, light cardboard, measuring 8 by 8 inches, with a slight gloss. This size works well, providing enough space to record the classification of the prints and general information about the individual. If the new bureau wants to send copies of its fingerprints to the Federal Bureau of Investigation, the FBI will, upon request, happily provide fingerprint cards along with envelopes and instructions on how to take fingerprints. It’s advised that the new bureau design its cards similarly to those provided by the FBI, as these have been created after careful study and have proven to be effective over a long time. Figures 409 and 410 show the front and back of the criminal fingerprint card used by the Federal Bureau of Investigation.

 

Fig. 409

Fig. 409

[Fig. 409]

[Fig. 409]

 

Fig. 410

Fig. 410

[Fig. 410]

[Fig. 410]

 

In classifying and comparing fingerprints it is necessary to use a magnifying or fingerprint glass. Such instruments can be obtained from various commercial sources. Figure 411 shows the type of magnifying glass used by the Federal Bureau of Investigation.[Pg 161]

In classifying and comparing fingerprints, it's essential to use a magnifying glass specifically designed for fingerprints. These tools can be found from different commercial suppliers. Figure 411 shows the kind of magnifying glass used by the Federal Bureau of Investigation.[Pg 161]

 

Fig. 411

Fig. 411

[Fig. 411]

[Fig. 411]

 

The fingerprint cards should be filed according to fingerprint classification sequence in cabinets, preferably steel. It is further suggested that the cabinets be three drawers high, with each drawer divided into three rows for filing. Such cabinets or similar ones can be obtained from various commercial sources. Figure 412 shows the type of fingerprint cabinet used in the Federal Bureau of Investigation.

The fingerprint cards should be organized by fingerprint classification sequence in cabinets, ideally made of steel. It's also recommended that the cabinets be three drawers tall, with each drawer divided into three sections for filing. These cabinets or similar ones can be purchased from various commercial suppliers. Figure 412 shows the type of fingerprint cabinet used by the Federal Bureau of Investigation.

 

Fig. 412

Fig. 412

[Fig. 412]

[Fig. 412]

 

In order to facilitate the location of classification groups, it is suggested that guide cards be placed in the rows of fingerprint cards at[Pg 162] frequent intervals. These guide cards should be slightly longer and heavier than the fingerprint cards and should have small tabs on the top to hold classification identifying symbols. Figure 413 shows the type of guide card used by the Federal Bureau of Investigation.

To make it easier to find classification groups, it's recommended to place guide cards in the rows of fingerprint cards at[Pg 162] regular intervals. These guide cards should be a bit longer and thicker than the fingerprint cards and should have small tabs at the top for displaying classification identifying symbols. Figure 413 shows the type of guide card used by the Federal Bureau of Investigation.

 

Fig. 413

Fig. 413

[Fig. 413]

[Fig. 413]

 

A practice which has been of the utmost benefit in the Federal Bureau of Investigation is as follows: When a fingerprint card is taken out of its regular file for any reason, a substitute card is put in its place, to remain until the return of the card. This substitute card, or "charge-out" card, is of a different color from the fingerprint card and slightly longer. On it are recorded the name, the classification formula, and peculiar characteristics, such as scars and peculiar pattern formations, appearing on the original card. By indicating the date and reason for charging out the original card, the Bureau is able to keep an accurate check on the whereabouts of all prints at all times. It is suggested that the local bureaus adopt a practice of this kind whenever a fingerprint card is drawn from the files and it is known that it may be out for a period of[Pg 163] time longer than the remainder of the day on which it is drawn. Figure 414 shows the type of charge-out card used in the FBI.

A practice that has been extremely helpful in the Federal Bureau of Investigation is as follows: When a fingerprint card is removed from its regular file for any reason, a substitute card is placed in its spot, remaining there until the original card is returned. This substitute card, or "charge-out" card, is a different color from the fingerprint card and slightly longer. It records the name, the classification formula, and distinctive features, such as scars and unique pattern formations, noted on the original card. By documenting the date and reason for removing the original card, the Bureau can accurately track the location of all prints at all times. It is recommended that local bureaus implement a similar practice whenever a fingerprint card is taken from the files and it's expected to be out for a period of[Pg 163] time longer than the rest of the day on which it was withdrawn. Figure 414 shows the type of charge-out card used in the FBI.

 

Fig. 414

Fig. 414

[Fig. 414]

[Fig. 414]

 

Each fingerprint card handled by the bureau should receive a fingerprint number and these numbers can be assigned in consecutive order.

Each fingerprint card processed by the bureau should be assigned a fingerprint number, and these numbers can be given in consecutive order.

As the bureau increases in size, it will be found a source of much convenience to have fingerprints of males and females kept in separate files.

As the bureau grows, it will be very helpful to have the fingerprints of men and women stored in separate files.

Name files

There will be times when it may be necessary to locate an individual's fingerprints when no current fingerprints are available, but the name with a police number or the classification is known. In order to facilitate work of this nature, as well as to keep a complete record and check on each set of fingerprints, it is necessary that the files be indexed in a manner similar to that in which books in a library are indexed.

There will be times when it's necessary to find a person's fingerprints when no current fingerprints are available, but the name or police number or classification is known. To make this work easier and to maintain a complete record and check for each set of fingerprints, the files need to be organized in a way similar to how books are organized in a library.

In this connection, for each fingerprint card there is prepared an index card. On this the name of the individual is placed, with all known aliases,[Pg 165] the fingerprint classification formula, the police or arrest number, the date of arrest or other action. It is desirable, also, to have on this card such general information as age, height, weight and race. Figure 415 shows the front of a suggested type of 3- by 5-inch index card.

In this regard, an index card is created for every fingerprint card. This card includes the individual's name along with any known aliases,[Pg 165] the fingerprint classification formula, the police or arrest number, and the date of arrest or other action. It’s also helpful to include general information such as age, height, weight, and race on this card. Figure 415 displays the front of a proposed design for a 3-by-5-inch index card.

 

Fig. 415

Fig. 415

[Fig. 415]

[Fig. 415]

 

Figure 416 shows the reverse side of the 3- by 5-inch index card. These are filed alphabetically in special cabinets. An index card also should be made for every alias which an individual has used. Figure 417 shows an electrically operated file cabinet in which the index cards are filed. It is suggested that the alias cards be of a different color from the one bearing the correct name, known as the "Master." Each alias card also should have typed on it the correct name of the individual, for purposes of reference and cross-checking. For convenience and accuracy these files, as in the fingerprint files, should also have suitable guide cards.[Pg 166]

Figure 416 shows the back side of the 3- by 5-inch index card. These are organized alphabetically in special cabinets. An index card should also be created for every alias that a person has used. Figure 417 shows an electrically operated filing cabinet where the index cards are stored. It's recommended that the alias cards be a different color than the one for the correct name, referred to as the "Master." Each alias card should also have the correct name of the individual typed on it for reference and cross-checking. For convenience and accuracy, these files, like the fingerprint files, should also include appropriate guide cards.[Pg 166]

 

Fig. 416

Fig. 416

[Fig. 416]

[Fig. 416]

 

Fig. 417

Fig. 417

[Fig. 417]

[Fig. 417]

 

It is advisable to make use of charge-out cards when original index cards are drawn from the files. Figure 418 shows a charge-out card.

It’s a good idea to use charge-out cards when taking original index cards out of the files. Figure 418 shows a charge-out card.

 

Fig. 418

Fig. 418

[Fig. 418]

[Fig. 418]

 

To supplant the 3- by 5-inch index cards mentioned above, many law enforcement agencies have found it desirable to use a separate sheet,[Pg 167] sometimes referred to as a "History Sheet" or "Information Sheet," containing the complete case history of the subject involved. These separate sheets can be filed by fingerprint number sequence and contain not only the data such as the known aliases, the fingerprint classification formula, the arrest number, and other essential items which are set out on the 3- by 5-inch cards as heretofore described, but also contain a concise summary of the subject's arrest history, particularly with reference to his criminal activities in the particular city. They may also contain a summarized case history with respect to each arrest or commitment, including such items as the date and place of arrest, complete home address, relatives, the essential facts concerning the prosecution of charges, and the ultimate disposition.

To replace the 3- by 5-inch index cards mentioned earlier, many law enforcement agencies have found it useful to use a separate sheet, [Pg 167] sometimes called a "History Sheet" or "Information Sheet," that contains the complete case history of the individual involved. These separate sheets can be organized by fingerprint number sequence and include not only information like known aliases, fingerprint classification, arrest number, and other important details found on the 3- by 5-inch cards as previously described, but they also provide a brief summary of the individual's arrest history, especially regarding their criminal activities in that specific city. They may also include a summarized case history for each arrest or commitment, such as the date and location of the arrest, full home address, relatives, key facts about the prosecution of charges, and the final outcome.

Jacket folder file

When an identification bureau receives prints of individuals on whom it already has prints, it is not practical to keep more than one set of prints per person in what may be called the active fingerprint file. In these[Pg 168] instances the better print should be designated a "Master" print by having the word "Master" stamped thereon. It should be given a number, to be known as the master number, which number should also be placed on all other sets of prints which may be found to be identical with the "Master" print. The "Master" print is placed in the active files. The extra prints are placed together in a heavy folder with their master number stamped thereon. This jacket folder is then filed in a separate cabinet. Also, if copies of all information regarding an individual, photographs, and FBI transcript of record are kept in this folder, his complete record will always be assembled in an easily accessible unit. The "Master" number should also be placed on the index card and all the alias cards of the individual. Also, each new alias and arrest number should be placed on the original index card. The additional records are kept in folders which are arranged in numerical order, beginning with Nos. 1, 2, 3, and so on.

When an identification bureau gets fingerprints of individuals it already has on file, it's not practical to maintain more than one set of prints per person in the active fingerprint file. In these[Pg 168] cases, the best print should be labeled a "Master" print by stamping the word "Master" on it. It should be assigned a number known as the master number, which should also be marked on all other sets of prints that match the "Master" print. The "Master" print is kept in the active files. The extra prints are gathered in a sturdy folder with their master number stamped on it. This folder is then stored in a separate cabinet. Additionally, if copies of all the information about an individual, including photographs and FBI transcripts, are kept in this folder, their complete record will always be organized in an easily accessible format. The "Master" number should also be marked on the index card and all alias cards for that individual. Moreover, each new alias and arrest number should be noted on the original index card. The additional records are stored in folders arranged in numerical order, starting with Nos. 1, 2, 3, and so on.

A further suggestion in connection with the maintenance of this folder file, besides the use of a separate "Master" numbering system, is the use of the arrest fingerprint number. As indicated previously, each person arrested and fingerprinted is assigned a number. This number appears on the fingerprint card, name-index card, and photograph. The practice of handling every new arrest fingerprint card in the bureau should include searching the fingerprint card in the fingerprint file to ascertain if the subject has a previous record. If the subject does not have a previous record, a new number should be assigned. In this connection it is noted that only one copy of the fingerprint card should be maintained in the file by fingerprint classification. To indicate the new arrest on the old[Pg 169] index card, the date of the new arrest can be shown. Whether the bureau follows the "Master" numbering system or the "previous arrest" numbering system should make very little difference in the ultimate purpose. All extra copies of fingerprint cards, complete record sheets, photographs, and all information pertaining to the individual are filed away in the folder file. This complete record is readily accessible at all times. It will now be found that the bureau has a complete record of each individual who has an arrest record on file, with provision made for accurate cross-referencing and checking between names and fingerprints.

A further suggestion regarding the management of this folder file, in addition to using a separate "Master" numbering system, is to utilize the arrest fingerprint number. As mentioned earlier, each person who is arrested and fingerprinted is given a number. This number appears on the fingerprint card, name-index card, and photograph. The process of handling every new arrest fingerprint card in the bureau should include searching the fingerprint card in the fingerprint file to see if the person has a previous record. If the person does not have a previous record, a new number should be assigned. In this context, it is noted that only one copy of the fingerprint card should be kept in the file by fingerprint classification. To indicate the new arrest on the old [Pg 169] index card, the date of the new arrest can be noted. Whether the bureau adopts the "Master" numbering system or the "previous arrest" numbering system should not significantly impact the ultimate goal. All extra copies of fingerprint cards, complete record sheets, photographs, and any information related to the individual are stored in the folder file. This complete record is always easily accessible. It will now be found that the bureau has a complete record of each individual with an arrest record on file, ensuring accurate cross-referencing and checking between names and fingerprints.

Dispositions

It is important to the bureau to have complete information concerning the ultimate disposition on each arrest fingerprint card. If the disposition of a charge is known at the time the person is fingerprinted, this fact should be indicated in the space provided on the fingerprint card. For example, in the case of an individual who is arrested, fingerprinted, and turned over to the county jail, this disposition can be indicated on the fingerprint card which is forwarded to the Federal Bureau of Investigation. The fingerprint card should not be held by the bureau pending final disposition of the charge.

It’s important for the bureau to have complete information about the final outcome of each arrest fingerprint card. If the outcome of a charge is known when a person is fingerprinted, this should be noted in the space provided on the fingerprint card. For example, if someone is arrested, fingerprinted, and then taken to the county jail, this outcome can be noted on the fingerprint card that is sent to the Federal Bureau of Investigation. The fingerprint card should not be kept by the bureau while waiting for the final outcome of the charge.

In those cases where the disposition is pending prosecutive or court action, a separate 3- by 5-inch disposition file can be maintained. On these cards information concerning the name, fingerprint number, race, sex, charge, name of the arresting officers, and the fingerprint classification should appear. These cards are filed in a pending-disposition file. The 3- by 5-inch disposition cards are made at the time the fingerprints of the person are taken. When the final disposition is obtained it should be noted on the card. In those cases where there is only one fingerprint card in the bureau, the disposition can be noted on the name-index card or the reverse side of the bureau's fingerprint card. In those cases where there is a jacket-folder file for the individual this disposition card can then be placed in the folder.

In cases where the case is still waiting for prosecution or court action, a separate 3- by 5-inch disposition file can be kept. These cards should contain information such as the name, fingerprint number, race, sex, charge, names of the arresting officers, and fingerprint classification. These cards are stored in a pending-disposition file. The 3- by 5-inch disposition cards are created at the time the person's fingerprints are taken. Once the final disposition is received, it should be recorded on the card. In cases where there is only one fingerprint card in the bureau, the disposition can be noted on the name-index card or the back of the bureau's fingerprint card. If there is a jacket-folder file for the individual, this disposition card can then be placed in that folder.

"Disposition Sheets" (No. R-84) can be obtained from the Federal Bureau of Investigation for forwarding this information so that the files of the FBI will have complete information concerning the arrests. At the time the final disposition is obtained, these disposition sheets can be completed and forwarded to the Federal Bureau of Investigation.

"Disposition Sheets" (No. R-84) can be requested from the Federal Bureau of Investigation to send this information so that the FBI's files have complete details about the arrests. Once the final disposition is received, these disposition sheets can be filled out and sent to the Federal Bureau of Investigation.

Death notices

When persons whose fingerprints are on file are reported as deceased, the prints should be taken from the active file and assembled with any[Pg 170] other prints of the person concerned. These should be plainly marked "Dead" and filed in a separate cabinet or section. All the index cards on this individual should also be marked "Dead" and filed in a separate section. These should be retained for possible future reference.

When people whose fingerprints are on file are reported as deceased, the prints should be taken from the active file and gathered with any[Pg 170] other prints of the individual. These should be clearly labeled "Dead" and stored in a separate cabinet or section. All the index cards for this person should also be labeled "Dead" and filed in a separate section. These should be kept for any potential future reference.

In this connection, "Death Notice" forms (No. R-88) can be obtained from the Federal Bureau of Investigation so that information concerning these deaths can be properly noted in its fingerprint file.

In this regard, "Death Notice" forms (No. R-88) are available from the Federal Bureau of Investigation so that details about these deaths can be accurately recorded in its fingerprint file.

Record of additional arrest

It is not necessary for a bureau to send a regular fingerprint card to the Identification Division of the Federal Bureau of Investigation on individuals who have been arrested repeatedly and whose previous records are known to the local law enforcement agency. In such cases the "Record of Additional Arrest" form should be used.

It’s not necessary for a department to send a regular fingerprint card to the Identification Division of the Federal Bureau of Investigation for individuals who have been arrested multiple times and whose prior records are known to the local law enforcement agency. In these situations, the "Record of Additional Arrest" form should be used.

Complete information must be given on this form. It is imperative that the FBI number and the finger impressions be placed on this form. The Identification Division of the Federal Bureau of Investigation will send no answer upon receipt of this form.

Complete information must be provided on this form. It is essential that the FBI number and finger impressions are included on this form. The Identification Division of the Federal Bureau of Investigation will not send a response upon receiving this form.

The form will be placed in the FBI number folder on the individual and later when a regular fingerprint card is received the arrest information from all the forms will be compiled and included on the subject's record as "supported by fingerprints."

The form will be added to the FBI number folder for the individual, and later, when a standard fingerprint card is received, the arrest information from all the forms will be gathered and included in the subject's record as "backed by fingerprints."

"Record of Additional Arrest" forms (No. 1-1) can be obtained from the Federal Bureau of Investigation.

"Record of Additional Arrest" forms (No. 1-1) are available from the Federal Bureau of Investigation.

Wanted notices

All wanted notices containing fingerprints, including the wanted notices inserted in the FBI Law Enforcement Bulletin, should be filed in the fingerprint file by classification formula, and the names appearing on these wanted notices should be indexed and placed in the name files. Concerning the small wanted notices inserted in the FBI Law Enforcement Bulletin, a suggested procedure would be to paste each individual notice on a blank 8- by 8-inch white card. The wanted notices are filed by the fingerprint classification and the names indexed and placed in the name file. When an apprehension notice is received concerning the wanted notice, a proper notation should be made on the name card and the wanted notice in the fingerprint file. If these canceled wanted notices endanger the efficiency of the file, it is suggested that the name-index card and the fingerprint-wanted notice be destroyed. Should the bureau[Pg 171] adopt this practice it is suggested that the 8- by 8-inch cards be used again for other wanted notices. In this manner it would be possible to use the blank card for eight of these notices.

All wanted notices that include fingerprints, including those published in the FBI Law Enforcement Bulletin, should be organized in the fingerprint file according to a classification system, and the names listed on these notices should be indexed and added to the name files. For the smaller wanted notices in the FBI Law Enforcement Bulletin, a recommended approach is to attach each notice to a blank 8- by 8-inch white card. The wanted notices are sorted by fingerprint classification, and the names are indexed and placed in the name file. When an apprehension notice is received about a wanted notice, a proper note should be made on the name card and in the fingerprint file for that wanted notice. If these canceled wanted notices disrupt the efficiency of the file, it's recommended that the name-index card and the fingerprint wanted notice be destroyed. If the bureau[Pg 171] adopts this practice, it’s suggested that the 8- by 8-inch cards be reused for other wanted notices. This way, the blank card could be utilized for eight of these notices.

The Federal Bureau of Investigation will make available to law enforcement agencies a special "Wanted Notice" form (No. 1-12) in order that they can place wanted notices against the fingerprints in the files of the FBI.

The Federal Bureau of Investigation will provide law enforcement agencies with a special "Wanted Notice" form (No. 1-12) so they can file wanted notices against the fingerprints in the FBI's records.

Photographs

Arrangements should be made to procure a camera for taking photographs of the persons fingerprinted. This is known as a "mugging" camera and various types are on the market. It is believed that the photographs should include a front and side view of the person. In most instances a scale for indicating height can be made a part of the picture even though only the upper portion of the individual photographed is taken. Of course, if the scale is used, the person photographed should be standing even though only the upper portion of the body appears in the photograph. The necessary lights should be provided for obtaining photographs. A standard set of scales should be obtained in order that the correct weight can be ascertained.

Arrangements should be made to get a camera for taking photos of the people being fingerprinted. This is referred to as a "mugging" camera, and there are various types available on the market. It’s recommended that the photos include both a front and side view of the person. In most cases, a scale to indicate height can be included in the picture, even if only the upper part of the individual is captured. Of course, if the scale is used, the person being photographed should be standing, even though only the upper body will be visible in the photo. The necessary lighting should be provided to get good photographs. A standard set of scales should be obtained to ensure the correct weight can be determined.

The negatives and photographs can be filed by fingerprint number in a separate file. In those cases where the individual has more than one arrest all the photographs can be placed in the jacket-folder number file. The negatives, in these instances, can remain in the photograph file.

The negatives and photos can be organized by fingerprint number in a separate file. If the person has multiple arrests, all the photos can be stored in the jacket-folder number file. In these cases, the negatives can stay in the photo file.

Latent fingerprints

To adequately develop the latent prints at crime scenes, it is necessary that the proper equipment be provided. This equipment includes latent fingerprint powders, brushes, lifting tape, fingerprint camera, searchlight, and scissors. All of this equipment can be obtained from commercial fingerprint supply companies. Figure 419 shows some of the equipment used by the FBI. The techniques of developing latent fingerprints and their uses are more fully explained in the following chapters.

To effectively develop latent prints at crime scenes, it's important to have the right equipment. This includes latent fingerprint powders, brushes, lifting tape, a fingerprint camera, a searchlight, and scissors. All of this gear can be sourced from commercial fingerprint supply companies. Figure 419 shows some of the equipment used by the FBI. The methods for developing latent fingerprints and their applications are explained in more detail in the following chapters.

 

Fig. 419

Fig. 419

[Fig. 419]

[Fig. 419]

 

It is believed that by following the basic ideas outlined, the officials of law enforcement agencies can be assured of best results in establishing and maintaining a small identification bureau. For further information, the Federal Bureau of Investigation will furnish to duly constituted law enforcement officials any additional data which may be of material assistance in the maintenance of such a bureau.

It’s thought that by following the basic principles outlined, law enforcement officials can achieve the best outcomes in setting up and running a small identification bureau. For more information, the Federal Bureau of Investigation will provide any additional data that could help with maintaining such a bureau to properly authorized law enforcement officials.


CHAPTER XII

Latent Impressions

 

Each ridge of the fingers, palms, and soles bears a row of sweat pores which in the average person constantly exude perspiration. Also, the ridges of the fingers and palms are in intermittent contact with other parts of the body, such as the hair and face, and with various objects, which may leave a film of grease or moisture on the ridges. In touching an object, the film of moisture and/or grease may be transferred to the object, thus leaving an outline of the ridges of the fingers or palm thereon. This print is called a latent impression, the word "latent" meaning hidden, that is, the print many times is not readily visible.

Each ridge on the fingers, palms, and soles has a set of sweat pores that in an average person constantly release perspiration. Additionally, the ridges on the fingers and palms frequently come into contact with other body parts, like hair and the face, as well as various objects, which can leave a film of grease or moisture on these ridges. When touching an object, this film of moisture and/or grease can be transferred to it, leaving behind an outline of the ridges from the fingers or palm. This print is known as a latent impression, with "latent" meaning hidden, as this print is often not easily visible.

Latent impressions, regardless of the area of the ridges present, are of the greatest importance to the criminal investigator as identification of them may solve the crime and result in successful prosecution of the subject. Consequently, every effort should be made to preserve and identify them.

Latent impressions, no matter the pattern of the ridges, are extremely important to criminal investigators because identifying them can solve the crime and lead to a successful prosecution of the suspect. Therefore, every effort should be made to preserve and identify them.

Visible prints in mediums such as blood, grease, dirt, or dust are equally important to the investigator but, strictly speaking, are not latent impressions.

Visible prints in substances like blood, grease, dirt, or dust are just as important to the investigator, but technically, they aren't considered latent impressions.

A search of the crime scene should be conducted in a logical manner. Points of entry and exit should be examined, along with surfaces or objects disturbed or likely touched during the commission of the crime. The examiner should wear a pair of light cloth gloves and handle an object only insofar as is necessary and then only by edges or surfaces which are not receptive to latent impressions. A record of the exact location of a print on an object and of the object itself should be made, since these facts may be of the utmost importance in any trial resulting from the investigation. No one should handle an object other than the examiner himself.

A search of the crime scene should be conducted in a logical way. Points of entry and exit should be examined, along with surfaces or objects that were disturbed or likely touched during the crime. The examiner should wear light cloth gloves and only handle an object as needed, and then only by the edges or surfaces that won’t capture fingerprints. A record of the exact location of a print on an object and the object itself should be documented, as these details may be extremely important in any trial stemming from the investigation. No one should handle an object except for the examiner.

Portable articles removed should be labeled or marked so that they may be readily identified thereafter.

Portable items that are removed should be labeled or marked so that they can be easily identified later.

The beam of a flashlight played over the surface of an object will frequently show the location of latent impressions, although this is not an infallible test for their presence.

The beam of a flashlight shining on an object will often reveal the location of hidden impressions, although this isn’t a foolproof method for confirming their presence.

Evidence should be examined as soon as feasible after its discovery.

Evidence should be looked at as soon as possible after it’s found.

Following the location of any latent prints at the scene of a crime, the prints of all persons whose presence at the place under inspection has been for legitimate purposes must be excluded from further attention. It is advisable, therefore, during the initial stages of an investigation where latent prints are found, to secure the inked prints of all members[Pg 174] of the household, the employees, and any police or other officials who may have touched the objects on which the latent impressions were found. Inked prints taken for this purpose are referred to as elimination prints.

Following the discovery of any latent prints at a crime scene, the prints of everyone who was there for legitimate reasons must be set aside from further consideration. Therefore, it's a good idea during the early stages of an investigation where latent prints are found to collect inked prints from all members[Pg 174] of the household, the employees, and any police or officials who may have touched the objects that have the latent impressions. Inked prints collected for this purpose are known as elimination prints.

Due to the fragmentary nature of most latent prints it is not possible to derive a classification which makes a file search practicable. A latent impression may be identified, however, by comparison with the prints of a particular suspect.

Due to the incomplete nature of most latent prints, it isn't possible to create a classification that allows for efficient file searches. However, a latent impression can be identified by comparing it to the prints of a specific suspect.

Inked fingerprints taken for comparison with latent impressions should be as legible and as complete as possible, including the areas not essential to classification, since identifications are often made with these areas. Inked palm prints taken should likewise be complete and clear and should include impressions of the finger joints. Persons not experienced in latent print comparisons should not attempt to evaluate latent fragments, since the area necessary for an identification may be extremely small compared to that of an average inked fingerprint.

Inked fingerprints taken for comparison with latent impressions should be as clear and complete as possible, including areas that aren't crucial for classification, since identifications are often made using those areas. Inked palm prints should also be complete and clear and should include impressions of the finger joints. Individuals who are not experienced in comparing latent prints shouldn't try to evaluate latent fragments, as the area needed for an identification can be very small compared to that of an average inked fingerprint.

Articles which are to be transported by mail or express should be so packed that the surfaces bearing latent impressions are not in contact with other surfaces. This may be accomplished by mounting the articles on a piece of fiber board or plywood. The board should then be secured in a box so that the objects will not touch or be shaken against the sides in transit. The package should be plainly marked "Evidence," to prevent inadvertent handling on opening. Cotton or cloth should never be placed in direct contact with any surface bearing latent prints.

Articles that need to be sent by mail or express should be packed in a way that the surfaces with latent fingerprints do not touch other surfaces. This can be done by placing the items on a piece of fiberboard or plywood. The board should then be secured in a box to ensure the objects don't touch or jostle against the sides during transit. The package should be clearly labeled "Evidence" to avoid accidental handling when opened. Cotton or cloth should never directly contact any surface that has latent prints.

Any number of paper or cardboard specimens may be placed in a single protective wrapper, since contact with other surfaces does not harm latents on such objects. Lifts, negatives and photographs are readily enclosed with letters.

Any number of paper or cardboard items can be put in a single protective wrapper, as contact with other surfaces doesn’t damage the residues on these objects. Lifts, negatives, and photographs can easily be included with letters.

An explanatory letter should accompany all evidence. If it is necessary to pack the evidence separately, a copy of the letter should be placed in every package so that the recipient will know immediately the import of the contents. All items of evidence should be marked and described exactly in the accompanying letter so that they will not be confused with packing material of a similar nature, and to provide a check on what the package should contain.

An explanatory letter should come with all evidence. If it’s necessary to pack the evidence separately, a copy of the letter should go in each package so the recipient knows right away what the contents are. All evidence items should be labeled and detailed precisely in the accompanying letter to avoid mixing them up with packing material of a similar kind, and to serve as a check on what the package should include.

In addition, the letter should include for record purposes a brief outline of the crime, i.e., type, date and place of occurrence, and names of victims and subjects. If suspects are named for comparison, sufficient descriptive data should be set out to permit location of their fingerprint records. This information, in preferential order, comprises the individual's complete name, aliases, FBI number, date of prior arrest or fingerprinting, fingerprint classification, date and place of birth, and physical description.

Additionally, the letter should contain a brief summary of the crime for record-keeping purposes, including the type, date, and location of the incident, as well as the names of the victims and subjects involved. If suspects are mentioned for comparison, enough descriptive details should be included to allow for the retrieval of their fingerprint records. This information, in order of priority, includes the person's full name, any aliases, FBI number, date of previous arrest or fingerprinting, fingerprint classification, date and place of birth, and physical description.

Evidence is preferably forwarded by registered mail or railway express, as these means provide records of dispatch and receipt.

Evidence is best sent by registered mail or express train, as these methods provide records of sending and receiving.

Elimination or suspect fingerprints are best enclosed with the evidence itself, with a notation as to the type of prints forwarded.

Elimination or suspect fingerprints should be kept with the evidence itself, along with a note specifying the type of prints sent.


CHAPTER XIII

Powdering and Lifting Latent Impressions

 

The sole purpose in "developing" a latent impression is to make it visible so that it may be preserved and compared. Various powders and chemicals are used for this purpose. When a latent print is plainly visible, it should be photographed before any effort is made to develop it.

The only reason for "developing" a hidden impression is to make it visible so it can be preserved and compared. Different powders and chemicals are used for this. When a latent print is clearly visible, it should be photographed before any attempts are made to develop it.

No attempt should be made to brush or apply powder to prints in dust, obviously greasy prints, or bloody prints, as this will almost surely destroy them. Objects which have been wet or immersed in water may still bear identifiable latent impressions. Before any examination is attempted, however, the object must be dried.

No attempt should be made to brush or apply powder to prints that have dust, obvious grease, or blood on them, as this will almost certainly ruin them. Objects that have been wet or submerged in water may still have identifiable latent impressions. However, before any examination is done, the object must be dried.

Powder brushed lightly over a latent-bearing surface will cling to grease or moisture in the ridges of a latent print, making it visible against the background. Obviously, a powder should be used which will contrast with the color of the surface. Photographic contrasts should also be considered.

Powder lightly dusted over a surface with latent prints will stick to grease or moisture in the ridges of the print, making it stand out against the background. Clearly, a powder should be chosen that contrasts with the color of the surface. Photographic contrasts should also be taken into account.

A gray powder and a black powder are adequate for latent print work. Many fingerprint powders of various colors and compositions are available from fingerprint supply houses but none are superior to the gray and black.

A gray powder and a black powder are sufficient for latent print work. Many fingerprint powders in different colors and compositions can be found at fingerprint supply stores, but none are better than the gray and black.

A very small amount of powder is placed on the brush for application to the surface. Once the contour of a print is visible, the brush strokes should conform to the direction of the ridges. All excess powder should be brushed from between the ridges. Too much powder and too little brushing are the chief faults of beginners.

A tiny amount of powder is placed on the brush for applying it to the surface. Once the outline of a print is visible, the brush strokes should follow the direction of the ridges. Any extra powder should be brushed away from between the ridges. Using too much powder and not brushing enough are the main mistakes that beginners make.

Gray powder is used on dark-colored surfaces. It is also used on mirrors and metal surfaces which have been polished to a mirrorlike finish, since these surfaces will photograph black with the fingerprint camera.

Gray powder is used on dark-colored surfaces. It's also applied on mirrors and metal surfaces that have been polished to a mirror-like finish, as these surfaces will appear black with the fingerprint camera.

Black powder should be applied to white or light-colored surfaces.

Black powder should be used on white or light-colored surfaces.

Aluminum powder affords the same contrast as the gray. Gold and red bronze powders, although of a glittering appearance, will photograph dark and should consequently be used on light-colored surfaces. Dragon's blood powder is a photographically neutral powder and may be dusted on either a light or dark surface.

Aluminum powder provides the same contrast as gray. Gold and red bronze powders, while shiny, will appear dark in photos, so they should be used on light-colored surfaces. Dragon's blood powder is neutral in photography and can be applied to both light and dark surfaces.

On clear transparent glass, either gray or black powder may be used, it being necessary only to use a contrasting black or white background when photographing.

On clear glass, you can use either gray or black powder, but you need to have a contrasting black or white background when taking photos.

Prints should be lifted after photographing. Both rubber and transparent tape are available for this purpose. Rubber lifting tape is procurable in black or white 4" x 9" sheets and has the adhesive surface protected with a celluloid cover. A black powder print should obviously be lifted on white tape and a gray powder print on black tape.[Pg 176]

Prints should be lifted after being photographed. Both rubber and transparent tape are available for this. Rubber lifting tape comes in black or white 4" x 9" sheets and has the adhesive side protected with a celluloid cover. A black powder print should clearly be lifted on white tape, and a gray powder print on black tape.[Pg 176]

Gold bronze and red bronze powders should be lifted on white tape, aluminum on black. Dragon's blood may be lifted on either black or white.

Gold bronze and red bronze powders should be applied with white tape, aluminum with black. Dragon's blood can be applied with either black or white.

After cutting a piece of tape sufficiently large to cover the entire latent print, the celluloid covering is removed and the adhesive side applied to the latent. The tape should be pressed evenly and firmly to the surface, taking care not to shift its position. It is then peeled gently from the surface and the piece of celluloid placed over the print to protect it. The operator should handle the lift in such a manner that he will leave no prints of his own on the adhesive surface. A small paper identification tag bearing the initials of the operator, date, and object from which lifted should be placed under one corner of the celluloid, or this information may be written on the back of the lift itself if it can be done in a permanent, legible manner.

After cutting a piece of tape large enough to cover the entire latent print, the cellophane covering is removed and the sticky side is applied to the latent print. The tape should be pressed down evenly and firmly onto the surface, making sure not to move it out of place. It is then carefully peeled off and a piece of cellophane is placed over the print to protect it. The person lifting the print should handle it in a way that doesn’t leave any of their own prints on the sticky side. A small paper ID tag with the operator’s initials, date, and the object from which the print was lifted should be placed under one corner of the cellophane, or this information can be written on the back of the lift itself if it can be done in a permanent and legible way.

If an excessive amount of powder adheres to the latent print, a more legible print may sometimes be obtained by lifting a second time (on a new piece of tape, of course).

If too much powder sticks to the latent print, you might be able to get a clearer print by lifting it a second time (using a new piece of tape, of course).

It should be noted that a print lifted on rubber tape is in a reverse position. Consequently, in preparing a photograph of a print on such a lift, it will be necessary to print the negative from the reverse side in order for the print to appear in its correct position for comparison. Preparation of such photographs should not be attempted by persons of inadequate knowledge and experience.

It’s important to note that a print taken from rubber tape is in reverse. Therefore, when preparing a photograph of a print on that lift, you need to print the negative from the back so that the print appears in the correct position for comparison. People without sufficient knowledge and experience should not attempt to prepare such photographs.

Transparent tape with a durable adhesive surface is available in 1" to 2" widths for fingerprint work. The common variety of transparent tape is not suitable due to the deterioration (drying) of the adhesive surface. The print on a piece of transparent tape is in correct position. Transparent lifts should be affixed to a smooth, grainless, opaque background of a black or white color contrasting with the powder used. Every effort should be made to avoid air bubbles under such lifts. In no instance should a transparent lift ever be folded back on itself or stuck to another piece of such tape as a backing, since it is generally not possible to determine the correct position of such a print.

Transparent tape with a strong adhesive is available in widths of 1" to 2" for collecting fingerprints. The typical type of transparent tape isn't suitable because its adhesive can break down (dry out). The print on a piece of transparent tape is in the right position. Transparent lifts should be applied to a smooth, non-textured, opaque background that is either black or white, providing contrast with the powder used. Every effort should be made to avoid air bubbles under these lifts. Under no circumstances should a transparent lift be folded back on itself or stuck to another piece of tape as a backing, as this makes it generally impossible to determine the correct position of the print.

Groups of latent impressions, such as those of adjacent fingers or fingers and palms which appear to have been made simultaneously, should be lifted as units, that is, on a single piece of tape, as this may facilitate the task of making comparisons.

Groups of latent impressions, like those from nearby fingers or fingers and palms that seem to have been made at the same time, should be lifted as a single unit, meaning on one piece of tape, since this can make it easier to compare them.


CHAPTER XIV

Chemical Development of Latent Impressions

 

Chemical treatment in the development of latent finger impressions on paper, cardboard, and newly finished or unpainted wood may involve a slightly more complicated technique than that in which powders are utilized, but the results justify the additional effort.

Chemical treatment in developing latent fingerprints on paper, cardboard, and newly finished or unpainted wood can be a bit more complex than using powders, but the results make the extra effort worthwhile.

It is very strongly recommended that powders not be applied to articles of the above types. This recommendation is made for several reasons. First, powders cannot be removed from paper and possibly may interfere with some types of document examinations. In this connection, they are likely to prevent restoration of the specimen to a legible condition. Powders will not develop as many latent impressions as chemicals on paper or cardboard. In some cases they will obscure latent impressions subsequently developed chemically.

It is highly advised that powders not be used on items of the types mentioned above. This advice is given for several reasons. First, powders cannot be removed from paper and may interfere with certain types of document examinations. In this regard, they are likely to hinder the restoration of the document to a readable state. Powders do not produce as many latent impressions as chemicals on paper or cardboard. In some cases, they may obscure latent impressions that are later developed chemically.

Neither scientific training nor complete knowledge of the chemical processes involved is necessary for one to become proficient in the use of chemical developers, two of which will be discussed more fully. These two, iodine and silver nitrate, are the most commonly used, inasmuch as they are relatively inexpensive, readily procurable, effective, and easy to apply.

Neither scientific training nor complete knowledge of the chemical processes involved is necessary for someone to become skilled in using chemical developers, two of which will be discussed in more detail. These two, iodine and silver nitrate, are the most commonly used, as they are relatively inexpensive, easy to obtain, effective, and simple to apply.

All specimens which are treated should be handled with tweezers or gloves.

All specimens that are treated should be handled with tweezers or gloves.

When iodine crystals are subjected to a slight amount of heat they vaporize rapidly, producing violet fumes. These fumes are absorbed by fatty or oily matter with which they come in contact. If the specimen treated bears latent impressions which contain oil or fat, the print is developed or made visible by the absorption of the iodine fumes and the ridges of the print appear yellowish-brown against the background.

When iodine crystals are exposed to a little heat, they quickly turn into vapor, creating violet fumes. These fumes are absorbed by any fatty or oily substances they touch. If the sample being tested has leftover impressions that contain oil or fat, the print is revealed through the absorption of the iodine fumes, and the ridges of the print show up as yellowish-brown against the background.

Iodine prints are not permanent and begin to fade once the fuming is stopped. It is necessary, therefore, for the operator to have a camera ready to photograph the prints immediately.

Iodine prints aren't permanent and start to fade as soon as the fuming stops. So, it's important for the operator to have a camera ready to take pictures of the prints right away.

Control of the fumes is achieved by using the crystals in an iodine gun or fuming cabinet. The iodine gun may be assembled by the individual examiner, by a druggist, or it may be purchased through a fingerprint supply house.

Control of the fumes is done by using the crystals in an iodine gun or fuming cabinet. The iodine gun can be put together by the examiner, a pharmacist, or it can be bought from a fingerprint supply store.

Material for making the iodine gun, as well as iodine crystals, may be procured from a chemical supply house or through a druggist. The gun itself consists essentially of two parts. One tube (the end of the gun through which the breath is blown) contains a drying agent such as calcium chloride, to remove moisture from the breath. Without this, the[Pg 178] moisture from the breath and saliva would condense at the end of the gun, drip onto the specimen and cause stains which might prove indelible. The second tube contains a small amount of iodine crystals which are vaporized by the heat of the breath, augmented by the warmth of the hand cupped around the tube containing the iodine. This vapor is blown onto the specimen (fig. 420). Glass wool serves to hold the calcium chloride and iodine in place.

Material for making the iodine gun, as well as iodine crystals, can be obtained from a chemical supply store or a pharmacist. The gun itself is basically made up of two parts. One tube (the end of the gun where you blow) has a drying agent like calcium chloride to get rid of moisture from your breath. Without this, the[Pg 178] moisture from your breath and saliva would condense at the end of the gun, drip onto the specimen, and create stains that might be permanent. The second tube holds a small amount of iodine crystals that are vaporized by the heat of your breath, boosted by the warmth of your hand cupped around the tube with the iodine. This vapor is then blown onto the specimen (fig. 420). Glass wool keeps the calcium chloride and iodine in place.

 

Fig. 420

Fig. 420

[Fig. 420]

[Fig. 420]

 

Due to the amount of physical exertion involved, the gun is generally limited to the examination of a few small specimens. Where a large number of specimens are to be treated, the fuming cabinet, a box-shaped wooden receptacle with a glass front and top permitting the operator to control the amount of fumes in the cabinet and observe the development of the latent impressions, is used (fig. 421). The fumes are generated by placing a small alcohol burner under an evaporating dish containing the iodine crystals. This is set in a hole cut in the bottom of the cabinet. As soon as the fumes begin to appear in sufficient amounts, the burner is removed. The specimens may be hung in the cabinet by wooden clothes pins fastened to a removable stick which is supported by wooden strips affixed near the top edges of the cabinet. The top of the cabinet is removable to permit access. Diagrams for the construction of the iodine gun or fuming cabinet will be furnished on request to members of the law enforcement profession.

Due to the physical effort required, the gun is usually limited to examining a few small samples. When a large number of samples need to be treated, a fuming cabinet is used. This is a box-shaped wooden container with a glass front and top that allows the operator to control the amount of fumes inside and observe the development of latent prints (fig. 421). The fumes are created by placing a small alcohol burner under an evaporating dish filled with iodine crystals, which is set in a hole cut into the bottom of the cabinet. Once the fumes start to appear in sufficient quantities, the burner is taken out. Samples can be hung in the cabinet using wooden clothespins attached to a removable stick that is supported by wooden strips near the top edges of the cabinet. The top of the cabinet can be taken off for easy access. Diagrams for building the iodine gun or fuming cabinet can be provided upon request to members of the law enforcement community.

 

Fig. 421

Fig. 421

[Fig. 421]

[Fig. 421]

 

Many specimens bear small, greasy areas which, in addition to any latent impressions of a greasy nature, will also appear yellowish-brown[Pg 179] after exposure to iodine fumes. All these stains will eventually disappear if the specimen is placed in a current of air from a fan or vent. All latent impressions on an object will not be developed by the iodine process but only those containing fat or oil. Due to this fact and the fact that iodine evaporates from the surface, it is used prior to (it cannot be used afterward), and in conjunction with, the silver nitrate process.

Many specimens have small, greasy spots that, along with any hidden greasy impressions, will turn yellowish-brown[Pg 179] when exposed to iodine fumes. All these stains will eventually fade away if the specimen is put in a stream of air from a fan or vent. Not all hidden impressions on an object will be revealed by the iodine method; only those that contain fat or oil will show up. Because of this and the fact that iodine vaporizes from the surface, it is used before (it cannot be used afterward) and alongside the silver nitrate process.

No ill effects have been noted from contact with small amounts of iodine vapor but prolonged or excessive contact will produce irritation of the skin and respiratory passages. To prevent gradual loss of the chemical through evaporation and the corrosion of surrounding metal surfaces, iodine crystals should be kept in an airtight container when not being used.

No negative effects have been observed from exposure to small amounts of iodine vapor, but prolonged or excessive contact can cause irritation to the skin and respiratory passages. To prevent the gradual loss of the chemical through evaporation and the corrosion of nearby metal surfaces, iodine crystals should be stored in an airtight container when not in use.

The development of latent impressions with silver nitrate is dependent on the fact that the sodium chloride (the same substance as common table salt) present in the perspiration which forms the ridges in most latent impressions reacts with the silver nitrate solution to form silver chloride. Silver chloride is white but is unstable on exposure to light and breaks down into its components, silver and chlorine. The ridges of the fingerprints developed in this manner appear reddish-brown against the background. Immersion in the silver nitrate solution will wash traces of fat[Pg 180] and oil from the paper; consequently, it is necessary to fume the specimen for latents of such a nature prior to treatment with silver nitrate.

The development of latent fingerprints with silver nitrate relies on the fact that the sodium chloride (the same substance as regular table salt) found in sweat reacts with the silver nitrate solution to create silver chloride. Silver chloride is white but unstable when exposed to light, breaking down into its components, silver and chlorine. The ridges of the fingerprints developed this way appear reddish-brown against the background. Soaking the paper in the silver nitrate solution will wash away any traces of fat[Pg 180] and oil; therefore, it’s essential to fume the specimen for latent prints of this type before treating it with silver nitrate.

Once the requisite equipment is assembled, the steps in the process are these:

Once you have all the necessary equipment, here are the steps in the process:

Dip the specimen in the solution, blot and dry it, expose to light, and photograph latents when contrast is good.

Dip the sample in the solution, blot it and dry it, expose it to light, and take photos of the prints when the contrast is good.

Chemically standardized solutions are not required for the successful application of this process. It has been determined through long practice that a 3-percent solution of silver nitrate is adequate for the purpose, although concentrations up to 10 percent are sometimes used. A solution of approximately 3 percent may be prepared by dissolving 4 ounces of silver nitrate in 1 gallon of distilled water. Smaller quantities of 3-percent solution are made by using the components in the same proportion. For instance, one quart of water will require 1 ounce of the crystals. For a 10-percent solution, use 13-1/3 ounces of crystals per gallon.

Chemically standardized solutions aren't necessary for successfully applying this process. Through extensive practice, it's been found that a 3-percent solution of silver nitrate is sufficient for this purpose, although concentrations up to 10 percent are sometimes used. You can prepare a solution of about 3 percent by dissolving 4 ounces of silver nitrate in 1 gallon of distilled water. For smaller quantities of the 3-percent solution, just use the same proportions. For example, 1 quart of water will need 1 ounce of the crystals. To make a 10-percent solution, use 13-1/3 ounces of crystals per gallon.

An alcohol solution may be preferred. This is prepared by mixing 4 ounces of silver nitrate crystals, 4 ounces of distilled water, and 1 gallon of grain alcohol, 190 proof. The alcoholic solution dries faster, and when treating paper bearing writing in ink, it is less likely to cause the ink to run. On the other hand, the alcoholic solution is much more expensive and there is some loss by evaporation while in use.

An alcohol solution might be a better choice. This is made by mixing 4 ounces of silver nitrate crystals, 4 ounces of distilled water, and 1 gallon of 190-proof grain alcohol. The alcoholic solution dries more quickly, and when treating paper with ink, it’s less likely to cause the ink to smudge. However, the alcoholic solution is significantly more expensive, and there is some evaporation loss while it’s being used.

The solutions may be used several times before losing their strength and when not in use should be kept in brown bottles in cupboards to retard deterioration. If the strength of the solution is doubtful, the operator should attempt to develop test latent impressions before proceeding on evidence.

The solutions can be used multiple times before they lose their effectiveness, and when not in use, they should be stored in brown bottles in cabinets to slow down deterioration. If there's uncertainty about the strength of the solution, the operator should try to develop test latent impressions before proceeding with the evidence.

Silver nitrate crystals and distilled water in small amounts are obtainable from druggists or in large amounts from chemical supply houses. Dealers in distilled water are located in many communities.

Silver nitrate crystals and distilled water in small amounts can be found at pharmacies or in larger quantities from chemical supply companies. Stores selling distilled water are available in many areas.

Tap water should not be used in the preparation of the solution because it generally contains chemicals which will partially neutralize the silver nitrate.

Tap water shouldn't be used to prepare the solution because it typically contains chemicals that can partially neutralize the silver nitrate.

It is suggested that the solution be placed in a glass or enamelware tray approximately 18 by 12 by 5 inches for use, a size used in photographic development. Treatment with this solution is called "silvering." The specimen is immersed in the solution so that the surfaces are completely moistened, then taken out, placed between blotters to remove the excess solution, and dried. The drying is readily accomplished with an electric hair dryer. Blotters may be dried and used several times before discarding. It is not necessary to work in a dark room. Work in an illuminated room but not in direct sunlight. Soaking the specimen in the solution does not aid development and is actually undesirable as it requires a longer drying time. The specimen should be reasonably dry before exposing to the light, otherwise the latent prints may be developed[Pg 181] while the paper is still wet, thus necessitating drying in subdued light to prevent darkening.

It’s recommended that the solution be placed in a glass or enamel tray that's about 18 by 12 by 5 inches for use, a size typically used in photographic development. This process is known as "silvering." The specimen is soaked in the solution until all surfaces are completely wet, then removed, placed between blotters to get rid of the excess solution, and dried. You can easily dry it with an electric hair dryer. Blotters can be dried and reused several times before throwing them away. You don’t need to work in a dark room; you can work in a lit room, as long as it’s not in direct sunlight. Soaking the specimen in the solution doesn’t help with development and is actually not ideal since it requires a longer drying time. The specimen should be reasonably dry before exposing it to light; otherwise, the latent prints may develop while the paper is still wet, which means you'll need to dry it in low light to avoid darkening.[Pg 181]

Development of the latent impressions occurs rapidly when the specimen is exposed to a blue or violet light source. A 1,000-watt blue or daylight photographer's lamp, a mercury arc (most ultraviolet lamps are of this type), or carbon arc is excellent for the purpose (fig. 422). If a weaker light is used, a stronger mixture of the solution should be prepared. For instance, if a 300-watt bulb is used, the 10-percent solution would be preferable. Direct sunlight will cause the latent impressions to appear very rapidly and if several specimens are exposed at once it is not possible for a single operator to properly control the development. Sunlight coming through a window pane will serve for development. Where fingerprints containing sodium chloride (normally exuded from the sweat pores in the ridges) have been deposited, the silver chloride formed will darken against the background.

The development of latent fingerprints happens quickly when the sample is exposed to a blue or violet light. A 1,000-watt blue or daylight photo lamp, a mercury arc (most UV lamps are like this), or a carbon arc lamp works great for this purpose (fig. 422). If you use a weaker light, you'll need to prepare a stronger solution mixture. For example, if you're using a 300-watt bulb, a 10-percent solution is better. Direct sunlight will make the latent fingerprints show up very fast, and if multiple samples are exposed at the same time, it can be hard for one person to manage the development effectively. Sunlight coming in through a window is also suitable for development. If fingerprints that contain sodium chloride (which typically comes from sweat glands) are present, the silver chloride formed will darken against the background.

 

Fig. 422

Fig. 422

[Fig. 422]

[Fig. 422]

 

As soon as the ridge detail of the prints is clearly visible, the paper should be removed from the light. Continued exposure will darken the paper and the contrast will be lost.

As soon as the ridge detail of the prints is clearly visible, take the paper out of the light. If you keep exposing it, the paper will darken, and the contrast will be lost.

Paper so treated should be kept in darkness; that is, in a heavy envelope or drawer until ready to photograph.

Paper treated in this way should be kept in the dark; that is, in a thick envelope or drawer until you’re ready to take a photo.

Immediate photographing, as in the case of iodine prints, is not always essential, since the prints are permanent and become illegible only through eventual clouding of the background. Prompt photographing is recom[Pg 182]mended, however, as, in exceptional instances, silver-nitrate prints have become illegible in a matter of hours. Darkening ordinarily will occur slowly if the paper is preserved in absolute darkness, and silver-nitrate prints so preserved more than 10 years have been observed to be quite clear.

Immediate photographing, like in the case of iodine prints, isn't always necessary since the prints are permanent and only lose clarity over time due to background clouding. However, quick photographing is recommended because, in rare cases, silver-nitrate prints can become unreadable within hours. Normally, darkening happens slowly if the paper is kept completely in the dark, and silver-nitrate prints stored like this for over 10 years have been found to remain quite clear.

Items such as cardboard cartons, newspapers, road maps, large pieces of wrapping paper, or smooth, unpainted wood surfaces, too large for dipping, may be treated by brushing the solution over the surface with a paint brush (fig. 423). Brushing does not damage or destroy latent impressions on surfaces of this type. Cardboard boxes may be slit down the edges and flattened out to permit easy placement under the light.

Items like cardboard boxes, newspapers, road maps, large sheets of wrapping paper, or smooth, unpainted wood surfaces that are too big for dipping can be treated by brushing the solution over the surface with a paintbrush (fig. 423). Brushing won't harm or erase any hidden impressions on surfaces like these. Cardboard boxes can be cut along the edges and flattened out to make it easier to place them under the light.

 

Fig. 423

Fig. 423

[Fig. 423]

[Fig. 423]

 

Wet paper should be handled with extreme care to prevent tearing. In treating very thin types of paper the solution is best applied with a cotton swab or brush.

Wet paper should be handled very carefully to avoid tearing. When working with very thin types of paper, it's best to apply the solution with a cotton swab or brush.

Photographs, Photostats, and blueprints of any value should not be treated with silver nitrate, since the developed prints or stains cannot be removed without destroying them.

Photographs, Photostats, and blueprints of any value shouldn't be treated with silver nitrate, as the developed prints or stains can't be removed without damaging them.

In working with silver nitrate, wear rubber gloves or handle all specimens with tweezers; avoid spilling it on clothing. It will cause dark brown stains on clothing, skin, and fingernails. Such stains are not easily removed. Areas of the skin subjected to prolonged contact are deadened, will turn black and peel.

In working with silver nitrate, wear rubber gloves or use tweezers to handle all samples; avoid spilling it on your clothes. It can create dark brown stains on clothing, skin, and nails. These stains are difficult to remove. Areas of skin that come into prolonged contact will become numb, turn black, and peel.

If removal of silver nitrate prints (called "de-silvering") is desired,[Pg 183] this may be accomplished by placing the specimen in a 2-percent solution of mercuric nitrate in a tray similar to that used for the silver nitrate.

If you want to remove silver nitrate prints (known as "de-silvering"),[Pg 183] you can do this by putting the specimen in a 2-percent solution of mercuric nitrate in a tray similar to what you used for the silver nitrate.

To prepare a small amount of this solution, dissolve two-thirds of an ounce of mercuric nitrate crystals in 1 quart of distilled water and add one-third of a fluid ounce of nitric acid. Shake well. This solution, too, may be used several times before losing its strength and is not necessarily discarded after each use. It is not necessary to keep it in a dark bottle.

To make a small amount of this solution, dissolve two-thirds of an ounce of mercuric nitrate crystals in 1 quart of distilled water and add one-third of a fluid ounce of nitric acid. Shake it well. This solution can be reused several times before it loses its strength and doesn't need to be thrown away after each use. It also doesn't have to be stored in a dark bottle.

The specimen bearing silver nitrate prints is immersed in this solution until all traces of the prints disappear. It should then be rinsed thoroughly in water to remove all mercuric nitrate. If this is not done the paper deteriorates, becoming brittle and crumbly. A tray of distilled water may be used for rinsing or a tray of ordinary tap water changed several times during the rinsing. The specimen is then laid out flat to dry.

The sample with silver nitrate prints is soaked in this solution until the prints are completely gone. After that, it needs to be rinsed well in water to get rid of all the mercuric nitrate. If this step is skipped, the paper will degrade and become brittle and crumbly. You can use a tray of distilled water for rinsing, or use regular tap water, changing it several times during the process. Finally, the sample should be laid out flat to dry.

Wrinkles, such as are left in paper after ordinary drying, may be prevented by ironing with a moderately hot iron. An electric iron with a temperature control is desirable. If kept too hot it will scorch or wrinkle the paper somewhat. The bottom of the iron should be clean so that unremovable smudges will not be left on the paper.

Wrinkles, like those left in paper after regular drying, can be avoided by ironing with a moderately hot iron. An electric iron with temperature control is recommended. If it's too hot, it can scorch or wrinkle the paper a bit. The bottom of the iron should be clean to ensure that no permanent smudges are left on the paper.

No ill effects have been noted from working in the 2-percent mercuric nitrate solution with bare hands for very short periods, but it is a caustic solution and it is suggested that the specimens be handled with tweezers or that rubber gloves be worn if contact is prolonged.

No negative effects have been observed from using the 2-percent mercuric nitrate solution with bare hands for very short periods, but it is a caustic solution, so it's recommended that specimens be handled with tweezers or that rubber gloves be worn if contact lasts for a while.


CHAPTER XV

The Use of the Fingerprint Camera

 

If a fingerprint is visible, an effort should be made to photograph it before any attempt is made to develop it. In every case a print developed with powder should be photographed before lifting. It sometimes happens that the print does not lift properly although it may be quite clear after development.

If a fingerprint is visible, you should try to photograph it before trying to develop it. In every case, a print developed with powder should be photographed before lifting it. Sometimes, the print doesn't lift correctly even though it looks clear after development.

The camera which is especially adapted to the purpose and which is easiest to handle and operate is the fingerprint camera, one type of which is shown in figure 424. This camera has several advantages in photographing fingerprints:

The camera that's specifically designed for this purpose and is the easiest to use and operate is the fingerprint camera, one type of which is shown in figure 424. This camera has several advantages for photographing fingerprints:

It photographs the prints in natural size.
It contains its own light source.
It has a fixed focus.

It takes pictures of the prints at actual size.
It has its own built-in light source.
It has a set focus.

 

Fig. 424

Fig. 424

[Fig. 424]

[Fig. 424]

 

Cameras of this type are available in models operated by batteries and 110-volt current. It is believed that the battery-operated type has the greater utility, since house current may not be available at the crime scene. When not in use the batteries should be removed as they will eventually deteriorate and corrode the brass contacts in the camera.

Cameras like this come in battery-operated models and ones that use 110-volt electricity. Many think that the battery-operated models are more useful because you might not have access to power at the crime scene. When you're not using them, you should take out the batteries since they can wear out over time and cause corrosion on the brass contacts in the camera.

The camera is of the box type and has three button controls which will open: (1) The metal flap covering the aperture, (2) the front portion of the frame providing access to the self-contained light bulbs, and (3) the camera in half, providing access to the batteries and the shutter as shown below in figure 425.

The camera is a box type with three button controls that will open: (1) the metal flap covering the aperture, (2) the front part of the frame for accessing the built-in light bulbs, and (3) the camera in half, giving access to the batteries and the shutter, as shown below in figure 425.

 

Fig. 425

Fig. 425

[Fig. 425]

[Fig. 425]

 

A 2-1/4 x 3-1/4 film pack adapter or a 2-1/4 x 3-1/4 cut film holder holds the film in the camera. The film pack adapter will hold a pack of 12 sheets of film, and accordingly, will permit the taking of 12 pictures. The cut film holder is a unit which holds two sheets of film utilizing each side of the holder.

A 2-1/4 x 3-1/4 film pack adapter or a 2-1/4 x 3-1/4 cut film holder is used to hold the film in the camera. The film pack adapter can hold a pack of 12 sheets of film, allowing you to take 12 pictures. The cut film holder is a device that holds two sheets of film, using each side of the holder.

It is pointed out that the FBI uses the film pack exclusively in view of the fact that practically all latent examinations will necessitate the taking of more than two pictures. Further, the film pack is made so that it may be loaded into the adapter in the open light. Also, the films are numbered 1 through 12, which is a valuable feature in that in maintaining notes concerning the latent examinations it is a simple matter to note by the number of the negative where the latent impression was developed and photographed. Should it happen that during a latent examination all twelve of the films are not used, the film pack, with the slide in place, is taken into the darkroom and only those films which have been exposed are removed and developed. The unexposed films remain in the film pack adapter with the slide in and may be used later.

It’s noted that the FBI uses the film pack exclusively because almost all latent examinations require taking more than two pictures. Additionally, the film pack is designed to be loaded into the adapter in open light. The films are numbered 1 through 12, which is useful for keeping track of notes related to the latent examinations as it's easy to identify the negative number where the latent impression was developed and photographed. If it turns out that not all twelve films are used during a latent examination, the film pack, with the slide in place, is taken into the darkroom, and only the exposed films are removed and developed. The unexposed films stay in the film pack adapter with the slide in and can be used later.

As was previously mentioned, the camera has a fixed focus; that is, the camera will take a legible picture only when the latent print is at the focal point, or exactly flush with the opening of the camera. The latent print must not be inside the open end of the camera, nor must it be beyond; otherwise, the picture will be blurred.[Pg 186]

As mentioned earlier, the camera has a fixed focus. This means that it will only take a clear picture when the latent print is at the focal point, or precisely at the opening of the camera. The latent print shouldn't be inside the camera's opening, nor should it be too far away; otherwise, the image will come out blurry.[Pg 186]

Since the camera has its own light source, any leakage of outside light will cause overexposure of the film. Consequently, if the surface of the object bearing the latent print which is to be photographed is uneven or does not cover the entire front of the camera opening, it will be necessary to use some opaque material such as a focusing cloth or heavy dark material to cover the front of the camera so as to exclude all outside light (fig. 426). If a latent print on a pane of glass or an automobile window is being photographed, it will be necessary to back up the latent so that there will be no light leakage. Material showing a pattern or grain should not be used for this purpose as any such pattern will photograph in the background and possibly obliterate the ridges of the latent print.

Since the camera has its own light source, any outside light that seeps in will lead to overexposure of the film. Therefore, if the surface of the object with the latent print you want to photograph is uneven or doesn't completely cover the front of the camera opening, you will need to use some opaque material like a focusing cloth or thick dark material to cover the front of the camera and block out all outside light (fig. 426). When photographing a latent print on a piece of glass or a car window, it’s important to back up the latent print to prevent any light from leaking in. Avoid using materials with patterns or texture for this, as any such pattern will show up in the background and could obscure the details of the latent print.

 

Fig. 426

Fig. 426

[Fig. 426]

[Fig. 426]

 

To insure an equal distribution of the light over the latents being photographed, the impressions should be centered in the opening of the camera. This is accomplished by opening the angular front section of the camera after the metal plate covering the front has been opened, and setting the aperture over the latent impressions so that they will be as near the center as possible. Then, holding the camera firmly in place, it is carefully closed (fig. 427).

To ensure an even distribution of light over the images being photographed, the impressions should be centered in the camera's opening. This is done by opening the angular front section of the camera after the metal plate covering the front has been opened and aligning the aperture over the images so they are as close to the center as possible. Then, while holding the camera steady, it is carefully closed (fig. 427).

 

Fig. 427

Fig. 427

[Fig. 427]

[Fig. 427]

 

During exposure the camera must be held perfectly still. Any movement of the camera or object will result in a fuzzy or double image.

During exposure, the camera must be held completely still. Any movement of the camera or the object will lead to a blurry or doubled image.

In photographing a small, movable object such as a bottle or tumbler, the camera should not be placed on its end and an attempt made to balance[Pg 187] the object across the opening. Instead, the camera should be placed on its side and the bottle or tumbler built up to the opening so that there is no necessity for holding the object (fig. 428). There will be, of course, instances where the camera will have to be held, such as to the side of a wall, cabinet or automobile. Here an extreme effort should be made to avoid moving the camera or permitting it to slip during exposure.

In taking photos of a small, movable object like a bottle or glass, don’t position the camera vertically and try to balance the object on the opening. Instead, lay the camera on its side and adjust the bottle or glass up to the opening, so you don’t have to hold the object (fig. 428). Of course, there will be times when you'll need to hold the camera, like when you're beside a wall, cabinet, or car. In those cases, make sure to avoid moving the camera or letting it slip during the exposure.

 

Fig. 428

Fig. 428

[Fig. 428]

[Fig. 428]

 

Anticipating the possible use of the photographic negatives in a court proceeding, it becomes of paramount importance to be able to identify them. This is done by using what is called an identification tag. The tag consists of a small piece of paper bearing the date, initials of the examiner, and possibly a case number, and it should be hand-written. The tag is placed near the latent prints being photographed so that it will appear in the picture. It should be borne in mind that concentration should be on the latent impressions, which must be centered, and the identification tag should be to one side and not covering any of the latent prints. Another method of identification, if the surface permits, is to write the above-mentioned data on the surface of the object bearing the latents so that the information set out will also be a part of the picture. Too much emphasis cannot be placed on the importance of the identification tag.[Pg 188] The lack of such data, by discretion of the court, may exclude the latents as evidence, in the absence of the original specimen bearing the latents.

Anticipating the potential use of photographic negatives in court, it's crucial to identify them. This is done using what's known as an identification tag. The tag is a small piece of paper that includes the date, the examiner's initials, and possibly a case number, and it should be handwritten. The tag is placed next to the latent prints being photographed so that it appears in the image. It's important to focus on the latent impressions, which should be centered, while the identification tag is positioned to the side, ensuring it doesn't cover any of the latent prints. Another way to identify them, if the surface allows, is to write the information mentioned above directly on the surface of the object with the latent prints so that the details become part of the photograph. The significance of the identification tag cannot be overstated.[Pg 188] Without such data, the court may exclude the latents as evidence if the original specimen with the latents is not available.

The following are suggested exposure times for Tri-X film (available in 2-1/4" x 3-1/4" film packs) with battery-operated cameras having lenses without diaphragms:

The following are recommended exposure times for Tri-X film (available in 2-1/4" x 3-1/4" film packs) when using battery-operated cameras with lenses that don't have diaphragms:

Black powder print on white or light background—snapshot
Gray or white powder print on black or dark background—1 second

Black powder print on white or light background—snapshot
Gray or white powder print on black or dark background—1 second

These same exposure times can be used on some cameras having lenses with diaphragms, provided the lens opening is set at f6.3.

These same exposure times can be used on some cameras with lenses that have apertures, as long as the lens opening is set at f6.3.

The above exposure times are for cameras with batteries in average condition. If batteries become weak the exposures may be increased slightly.

The exposure times mentioned above are for cameras with batteries in average condition. If the batteries start to weaken, you may need to increase the exposure times slightly.

In making snapshots the shutter mechanism should be manipulated as rapidly as possible since slow motion will appreciably lengthen the exposure. In making time exposures the camera shutter must be held open for the desired time. Personnel with photographic experience may desire to use cut film with the fingerprint camera. A few tests will determine the optimum exposure times for any particular type of film.

In taking snapshots, the shutter mechanism should be operated as quickly as possible because slow motion will significantly increase the exposure time. For time exposures, the camera shutter needs to remain open for the required duration. People with photography experience may want to use cut film with the fingerprint camera. A few tests will help figure out the best exposure times for any specific type of film.

Briefly, the procedure for taking photographs of latents is as follows: The film pack is placed into the film pack adapter with the safety paper side of the film pack to the slide side of the adapter, care being taken to see that all of the paper tabs are outside of the adapter. The adapter is placed on the camera in its proper position by opening a slide clamp attached to the camera, fitting the side of the adapter into the slot away from the clamp and pushing it down flat into the opening. Don't try to slide the adapter into the opening from the top. The adapter is locked in position by closing the clamp. Next the slide is removed and the tab marked "Safety Cover" pulled out as far as it will come and torn off. The camera is placed in position and the first exposure made; then the[Pg 189] tab marked "1" is pulled and the next film is in position for exposure. This procedure is followed with each succeeding film until all have been exposed.

Briefly, here's how to take photos of latent images: First, place the film pack into the film pack adapter with the safety paper side facing the slide side of the adapter, making sure all the paper tabs are outside the adapter. Then, attach the adapter to the camera in the right position by opening the slide clamp connected to the camera, fitting the side of the adapter into the slot away from the clamp, and pressing it down flat into the opening. Don’t try to slide the adapter in from the top. Lock the adapter in place by closing the clamp. Next, remove the slide and pull out the tab labeled "Safety Cover" as far as it will go and tear it off. Position the camera and take the first shot; then pull the tab labeled "1" and the next film is ready for exposure. Continue this process for each film until all have been exposed.

When the last tab has been pulled out, the pack can be removed from the adapter in daylight. If all of the films have not been exposed the slide is replaced into the adapter and the film pack removed from it in a darkroom, as previously stated.

When the last tab is pulled out, you can take the pack out of the adapter in daylight. If not all the films have been exposed, put the slide back into the adapter and take the film pack out of it in a darkroom, as mentioned earlier.

As a matter of regular policy, it is recommended that more than one exposure be made of each latent, varying the normal exposure time to insure satisfactory results, especially when the contrast is not a good black on white or gray on black.

As a regular practice, it's advisable to take multiple exposures of each latent image, varying the standard exposure time to ensure satisfactory results, particularly when the contrast isn’t a clear black on white or gray on black.

Before starting to photograph, note the following:

Before you start taking photos, keep the following in mind:

● Check shutter action.

● Check shutter operation.

● Check bulbs, batteries, and lights.

● Check bulbs, batteries, and lights.

● Center latents in opening of camera.

● Center the subjects in the camera’s frame.

● Latent being photographed must be flush with opening of camera.

● The subject being photographed must be level with the camera opening.

● Outside light must be excluded.

● Outside light must be blocked.

● Include identification tag in photograph.

● Include an identification tag in the photo.

● Remove slide and pull safety tab of film pack before making exposure.

● Remove the slide and pull the safety tab from the film pack before taking the picture.

● Hold camera still while making exposure.

● Keep the camera steady while taking the shot.

● Pull correct number tab after each exposure (be careful not to pull more than one).

● Pull the correct number tab after each exposure (be careful not to pull more than one).

● Do not use grained or uneven material as a backing when photographing latents on transparent glass.

● Avoid using grained or uneven material as a backing when photographing latents on transparent glass.

● Mirrors, polished chrome, and nickel plate will photograph black in the fingerprint camera.

● Mirrors, polished chrome, and nickel plating will show up black in the fingerprint camera.

The foregoing has dealt with the standard use of the fingerprint camera when the direct light afforded by the camera gives suitable results. There will be cases, however, where the results from the use of the direct light may not be adequate. Such cases may involve molded or embedded prints, such as prints in putty, wax, soap, etc. Should direct light give poor results, side lighting may prove effective. This can be done by loosening two of the bulbs on one side so that they will not light. The light given by the other two bulbs is directed so as to pass at right angles, as much as possible, across the ridges of the embedded latent print. Adjustment of the exposure time must be made when this is done.

The previous section discussed the standard use of the fingerprint camera when the direct light it provides produces good results. However, there will be times when the results from using direct light may not be sufficient. These situations could involve molded or embedded prints, like those found in putty, wax, soap, etc. If direct light yields poor results, side lighting might be more effective. This can be accomplished by turning off two of the bulbs on one side so they don’t light up. The light from the other two bulbs should be directed to shine as much as possible at a right angle across the ridges of the embedded latent print. You'll need to adjust the exposure time when doing this.


CHAPTER XVI

Preparation of Fingerprint Charts for Court Testimony

 

In testifying to fingerprint identification, the expert often prepares charts to visually aid the court and jury in understanding the nature of his testimony. Many times it is undoubtedly difficult for the layman to perceive, from a vocal explanation alone, the full import of an expert's testimony, due to its technical nature; consequently, some graphic representation of the facts presented is amply justified and rewarded. The preparation of the charts is ultimately the sole responsibility of the expert using them. As a matter of interest to law enforcement personnel engaged in fingerprint work, a brief explanation of the preparation of such charts follows, along with suggestions and remarks based on long experience in these matters.

In testimony regarding fingerprint identification, experts often create charts to help the court and jury grasp the details of their testimony. It can be really tough for someone who isn’t a specialist to fully understand what an expert is saying just from the spoken explanation, given how technical the subject is; therefore, having some visual representation of the facts is completely justified and beneficial. Ultimately, the responsibility for creating these charts lies with the expert using them. For law enforcement personnel involved in fingerprint work, here’s a brief overview of how to prepare these charts, along with tips and insights based on extensive experience in this area.

To do the work conveniently, it will be necessary to have available, in addition to the ordinary photographic developing and printing materials, a projection enlarger which will enlarge preferably to at least ten diameters. In the projection method of enlargement, the image is printed directly from the original negative, and the preparation of an enlarged negative is unnecessary.

To do the work easily, you'll need access to, along with the usual photographic developing and printing materials, a projection enlarger that preferably enlarges to at least ten times larger. With the projection method of enlargement, the image is printed directly from the original negative, so you don’t need to prepare an enlarged negative.

Aside from the photographic equipment, the needed materials are: a roll of scotch photographic tape 1 inch wide to outline the areas of the fingerprints on the negatives to be used; some stiff cardboard approximately 1/32 inch thick on which to mount the prepared charts; a tube of rubber cement; and a bottle of translucent ink, other than black or white.

Aside from the camera gear, here’s what you’ll need: a 1-inch wide roll of Scotch tape to outline the areas of the fingerprints on the negatives; some stiff cardboard about 1/32 inch thick to mount the prepared charts; a tube of rubber cement; and a bottle of translucent ink in a color that's not black or white.

A light-box on which to view the negatives while blocking, and a lettering set to draw the lines and numbers uniformly on the charts, while not absolutely essential, are helpful conveniences. A light-box is basically a frosted pane of glass with a light beneath it to produce soft, even, non-glaring illumination. If no light-box is available, a clear window may be utilized in "blocking" the negatives.

A light box for viewing negatives while blocking, and a lettering set for drawing lines and numbers consistently on the charts, while not strictly necessary, are useful tools. A light box is essentially a frosted glass pane with a light underneath it that provides soft, even, non-glaring light. If you don’t have a light box, you can use a clear window to "block" the negatives.

If the expert finds it necessary to have an outside source prepare his photographs, he should retain personal custody of the evidence during the operation.

If the expert thinks it's necessary to have an outside source take care of his photographs, he should keep personal control of the evidence throughout the process.

The original latent print and inked print with which it is identical should be photographed actual size. This procedure eliminates guesswork in enlarging both to the same degree. Whatever areas of the two prints are deemed requisite to illustrate the method of identification are then outlined (blocked) on the negatives with the masking tape, so that only those areas will show in the subsequent enlargements. Generally, if the[Pg 191] legible area of the latent print is small, it is well to show the complete print. If the area is large, however, as in a palm print, an area which will not make the chart too bulky or unwieldy may be selected.

The original latent print and the inked print that matches it should be photographed at actual size. This step removes the uncertainty in enlarging both prints equally. Any areas of the two prints that are necessary to demonstrate the identification method are then outlined (blocked) on the negatives with masking tape, so only those areas will appear in the later enlargements. Generally, if the[Pg 191] visible area of the latent print is small, it’s best to show the entire print. However, if the area is large, like in a palm print, select a portion that won’t make the chart too bulky or hard to handle.

In blocking, the negative is affixed to the window pane or light-box by means of strips of photographic tape across the corners, with the side to be blocked up. This prevents constant shifting of the negative while it is being prepared. The latent print should be blocked first. Corners of the blocked areas should be square. Care should be exercised to have as nearly as possible the same ridge formations shown and the ridge formations in the same upright or horizontal positions. This may be facilitated by fixing a negative, bearing ruled squares, between the negative being blocked and the glass to which it is attached.

In blocking, the negative is secured to the window pane or light box using strips of photographic tape across the corners where the side needs to be blocked. This stops the negative from shifting while it’s being prepared. The latent print should be blocked first. The corners of the blocked areas should be square. It's important to ensure that the ridge formations are as consistent as possible and that they are in the same upright or horizontal positions. This can be made easier by placing a negative with ruled squares between the negative being blocked and the glass it’s attached to.

If the latent print was developed or photographed as a light print on a dark background, a reverse-color negative should be prepared and blocked in order that both prints may appear as black ridges on light backgrounds. This is done by placing the original negative adjacent to a new sheet of film and exposing it. The resultant negative contains the same image as the original except that the color of the image has been reversed.

If the latent print was developed or photographed as a light print on a dark background, a reverse-color negative should be created and blocked so that both prints show up as black ridges on a light background. This is done by placing the original negative next to a new sheet of film and exposing it. The resulting negative has the same image as the original, but the colors have been reversed.

If the negative is a photograph of an opaque lift, the print appears in reverse position; that is, as a mirror image, and the negative will accordingly have to be blocked from the dull or emulsion side in order for it to appear in a position comparable to that of the inked print.

If the negative is a photo of an opaque lift, the print looks like a mirror image, meaning it's in reverse position. To have it appear like the inked print, the negative needs to be blocked from the dull or emulsion side.

Failure to present the prints in question in the same color and position may possibly confuse the observer and nullify the purpose for which the chart is made.

Failure to show the prints in the same color and position might confuse the viewer and defeat the purpose of the chart.

The degree of enlargement is not important in itself, so long as the ridges of the latent print are readily distinguishable by the eye. Ten diameters have been found adequate, although any enlargement from 5 to 30 will serve. It should be remembered, however, that small enlargements are difficult to see a few feet away and that large ones lose some of the contrast between ridges and background. A white border of at least 1-1/2 inches or a width equal to about one-third the enlarged area should be left for charting purposes.

The level of enlargement isn't crucial by itself, as long as the patterns in the latent print are clearly visible to the eye. An enlargement of ten times has proven to be sufficient, but any enlargement between 5 and 30 will work. It's important to note, though, that small enlargements can be hard to see from a few feet away, while large ones may reduce the contrast between the ridges and the background. A white border of at least 1.5 inches, or a width that’s about one-third of the enlarged area, should be left for charting purposes.

Any chart prepared must be technically correct; that is, the corresponding ridge characteristics in the two prints must be similarly numbered and indicated.

Any chart created must be technically accurate; that is, the corresponding ridge features in the two prints must be numbered and indicated in the same way.

Several ways of pointing out the similar ridge formations have been observed, but the one which appears soundest is also simplest and consists of merely marking the characteristics with lines and numbers.

Several ways to indicate the similar ridge formations have been noted, but the one that seems most reliable is also the simplest and involves just marking the features with lines and numbers.

All of the ridge characteristics in the prints need not be charted. Twelve characteristics are ample to illustrate an identification, but it is neither claimed nor implied that this number is required.

All of the ridge features in the prints don’t all need to be mapped out. Twelve features are enough to show a match, but it’s not suggested or implied that this number is necessary.

All fingerprint identifications are made by observing that two impres[Pg 192]sions have ridge characteristics of similar shapes which occupy the same relative positions in the patterns.

All fingerprint identifications are made by observing that two impressions have ridge characteristics of similar shapes that occupy the same relative positions in the patterns.

Methods involving superimposition of the prints are not recommended because such a procedure is possible only in a very few instances, due to the distortion of ridges in most prints through pressure and twisting. Such a procedure is not necessarily a test of identity.

Methods that involve layering the prints are not recommended because this approach can only be effective in rare cases, due to the distortion of ridges in most prints caused by pressure and twisting. This process doesn't necessarily confirm identity.

Likewise, presenting charts with the shapes of the characteristics drawn in the margin is not recommended. Individual ridge characteristics may vary slightly in actual shape or physical position due to twisting, pressure, incomplete inking, condition of latent print when developed, powder adhering to background, etc. Identifications are based on a number of characteristics viewed in a unit relationship and not on the microscopic appearances of single characteristics.

Similarly, it’s not a good idea to show charts with the shapes of the features drawn in the margin. Individual ridge features can slightly differ in actual shape or physical position due to factors like twisting, pressure, incomplete inking, the state of the latent print when it’s developed, powder stuck to the background, etc. Identifications rely on several features observed together in context, rather than on the microscopic details of individual features.

Since the enlarged photographs appear in black and white, an ink other than black or white should be used to line the chart. Such an ink should be preferably translucent so that it will be possible to see the ridges which it traverses. A translucent carmine drawing ink serves well. In placing the lines on the chart, they should be arranged so that they do not cross or touch.

Since the enlarged photographs are in black and white, you should use an ink that isn’t black or white to outline the chart. Ideally, this ink should be translucent so you can see the ridges it goes over. A translucent carmine drawing ink works well for this. When placing the lines on the chart, make sure they don’t cross or touch each other.

The chart will present a clearer, neater, and more pleasing appearance if it is numbered clockwise and the numbers are evenly spaced (fig. 429). It is not necessary, however, to place the numbers evenly around the photograph.

The chart will look clearer, neater, and more visually appealing if it's numbered in a clockwise direction and the numbers are evenly spaced (fig. 429). However, it isn't essential to arrange the numbers evenly around the photograph.

 

Fig. 429

Fig. 429

[Fig. 429]

[Fig. 429]

 

Ordinarily, the numbers are placed on three sides and the type of print (latent or ink) noted at the bottom. In any case, the manner of numbering should be subservient to an explanation of the characteristics in an orderly sequence; and, if the situation warrants it, all of the points may be illustrated on a single side of the photograph.[Pg 193]

Ordinarily, the numbers are positioned on three sides, and the type of print (latent or ink) is mentioned at the bottom. In any case, the numbering should support an explanation of the characteristics in a clear order; and, if needed, all points can be illustrated on one side of the photograph.[Pg 193]

A single line should be drawn from each characteristic to a numbered point on the margin. Care should be taken to draw the line exactly to the characteristic point, not short of it, beyond it, or obscuring it. Erasures should be avoided. If the ink runs or blots, it is sometimes possible to remove it with a cloth dampened in denatured alcohol, without damaging the photograph.

A single line should be drawn from each characteristic to a numbered point on the margin. Make sure to draw the line exactly to the characteristic point, not falling short, going past it, or covering it up. Avoid making erasures. If the ink smudges or blots, you can often remove it with a cloth dampened in denatured alcohol, without harming the photograph.

If the enlargement is great, that is, 25 or 30 diameters, it might be well to draw a small circle around each characteristic and then draw the line from the circle to the number, since the ridge will be much thicker than the illustrating line. All lines and numbers should be checked for absolute accuracy. The expert should also study the enlargements for apparent discrepancies in the prints, which he might be called upon to explain.

If the magnification is significant, meaning 25 or 30 times larger, it would be helpful to draw a small circle around each feature and then connect the circle to the number, since the ridge will be much thicker than the line used for illustration. All lines and numbers should be verified for complete accuracy. The expert should also examine the enlargements for apparent discrepancies in the prints, which they may need to clarify.

The charted enlargements are readily mounted on stiff cardboard with rubber cement, which may be purchased in small tubes. After cementing the photograph to the cardboard, it should be placed under a heavy flat object which will cover the entire surface until dry to prevent warping and wrinkling. After drying, trim the two enlargements to the same square size with heavy scissors, a pen knife or scalpel, and fasten them together, book-fashion, with strips of the photographic tape used in blocking the negatives. Of course, if charts are large, 20 to 36 inches square, mounting is unnecessary and they will have to be supported in the courtroom with thumbtacks or metal rings.

The enlarged prints can easily be mounted on stiff cardboard using rubber cement, which comes in small tubes. Once you attach the photograph to the cardboard, place it under a heavy flat object that covers the entire surface until it dries to avoid warping and wrinkling. After it's dry, cut the two enlargements to the same square size using heavy scissors, a utility knife, or scalpel, and bind them together like a book with strips of photographic tape used for blocking negatives. If the charts are large, measuring 20 to 36 inches square, mounting isn't necessary; they should be supported in the courtroom with thumbtacks or metal rings.

Some courts do not permit numbering or lining of the photographs and the enlargements alone in these cases will have to suffice. If there is some question about admissibility of the charted enlargements, it is well to prepare an extra uncharted set.

Some courts don’t allow numbering or labeling of the photos, so just the enlargements will have to be enough in these cases. If there’s any doubt about the admissibility of the labeled enlargements, it’s a good idea to prepare an additional unmarked set.


CHAPTER XVII

Unidentified Latent Fingerprint File

 

From time to time the FBI is requested to conduct surveys and participate in conferences and in police schools on the problem of fingerprint identification.

From time to time, the FBI is asked to conduct surveys and participate in conferences and police training programs on the issue of fingerprint identification.

As a result of its observations in the course of these activities it has been found that many identification bureaus are not fully aware of the importance which latent finger impressions can have in connection with the ordinary handling of arrest fingerprint cards.

As a result of its observations during these activities, it has been found that many identification bureaus are not fully aware of the significance that latent fingerprint impressions can have in relation to the regular processing of arrest fingerprint cards.

Many bureaus and departments spend considerable time in developing latent impressions in a particular case. If no immediate results are forthcoming, the latent impressions are filed for future reference.

Many bureaus and departments spend a lot of time developing latent impressions in a specific case. If no immediate results are produced, the latent impressions are stored for future reference.

Single fingerprint files have been maintained with success by some departments. Many others do not attempt to keep a file because of either limited personnel or lack of funds. In many departments, however, where such a file is maintained, too often latent impressions are simply filed with no regard to possible future use. Actually, these impressions should be treated as evidence directly connecting the subject with the crime.

Single fingerprint files have been successfully maintained by some departments. Many others don’t try to keep a file due to limited staff or lack of funds. However, in many departments where a file is maintained, latent impressions are often just filed away with no thought to future use. In reality, these impressions should be handled as evidence that directly links the subject to the crime.

Active consideration should be given to the latent impressions until they are identified or the case has been successfully prosecuted. It is definitely felt that the following suggested procedure might have some decided advantages.

Active consideration should be given to the hidden impressions until they are identified or the case has been successfully prosecuted. It is strongly believed that the following suggested procedure could have some clear advantages.

It is suggested that in all cases where latent impressions are developed at the crime scene, or on an object used in connection with the commission of a crime, the impressions be properly photographed and lifted. The evidence, where possible and practicable, should be properly packed, labeled, and stored for future use in court (fig. 430).

It is recommended that whenever latent fingerprints are found at the crime scene or on an object related to the crime, those fingerprints should be properly photographed and collected. The evidence, whenever feasible, should be appropriately packed, labeled, and stored for use in court later (fig. 430).

 

Fig. 430

Fig. 430

[Fig. 430]

[Fig. 430]

 

Use care in wrapping the evidence to see that the latent impressions on the objects are not destroyed. If the specimens are later used in court, the impressions should still be clearly visible. In the same manner, all evidence not of a bulky nature, such as photographic negatives, photographs, and lifts of latent impressions, should be similarly preserved for future court use. It is to be emphasized that all material in one case should bear a case number. All specimens not of a bulky nature can be placed in an envelope and filed by this case number (fig. 431).

Use care when wrapping the evidence to ensure that the latent impressions on the objects aren’t damaged. If the specimens are later used in court, the impressions should still be clearly visible. Similarly, all evidence that isn’t bulky, such as photographic negatives, photographs, and lifts of latent impressions, should be preserved for future court use. It’s important that all material in one case is labeled with a case number. All specimens that aren’t bulky can be placed in an envelope and filed using this case number (fig. 431).

 

Fig. 431

Fig. 431

[Fig. 431]

[Fig. 431]

 

The above procedure is the usual one followed by the majority of identification bureaus in handling latent impressions. In order, however, to keep the latents in an active state, the photographs of all the latent impressions found in a particular case should be cut up and pasted on a 3 by 5 card bearing the case number and title of the case (fig. 432).

The above procedure is the standard method used by most identification bureaus for managing latent impressions. However, to keep the latents active, the photographs of all the latent impressions found in a specific case should be cut out and glued onto a 3 by 5 card that includes the case number and title of the case (fig. 432).

 

Fig. 432

Fig. 432

[Fig. 432]

[Fig. 432]

 

If numerous latents are developed, several cards should be used, all[Pg 196][Pg 195] having the same number and title. These cards are then filed by case number in a regular filing cabinet. Before this step is taken, every effort should be made to secure and compare the fingerprints of individuals who may legitimately have placed their prints on the objects which were examined. In addition, as part of the case report bearing the same case number as the latent impressions, there should be a notation pointing out that latent impressions were developed in the case and that they are on file.

If multiple latent prints are developed, several cards should be used, all[Pg 196][Pg 195] with the same number and title. These cards are then organized by case number in a standard filing cabinet. Before proceeding, every effort should be made to obtain and compare the fingerprints of individuals who may have legitimately left their prints on the items that were examined. Additionally, as part of the case report with the same case number as the latent prints, there should be a note indicating that latent prints were developed in the case and that they are on file.

Fingerprint comparisons in this unidentified file can be made on the basis of fingerprints taken from day to day of individuals fingerprinted for criminal identification purposes. A routine may be set up whereby the fingerprints of individuals arrested each day will be compared the following day with the latent fingerprints filed in the unidentified latent file. It is most important that this procedure be rigidly followed from day to day. It is to be borne in mind that the comparisons are made whether the particular person is or is not a suspect in a certain case. Special attention should be paid to fingerprints of individuals charged with burglary, breaking and entering, armed robbery, and other similar crimes.

Fingerprint comparisons in this unidentified file can be made using fingerprints taken daily from individuals fingerprinted for criminal identification. A routine may be established where the fingerprints of individuals arrested each day are compared the next day with the latent fingerprints stored in the unidentified latent file. It’s crucial that this procedure is strictly followed every day. It should be noted that the comparisons are made regardless of whether the person is a suspect in a specific case. Extra attention should be given to fingerprints of individuals charged with burglary, breaking and entering, armed robbery, and other similar offenses.

Should an identification be made of some latent prints, and others in the same case remain unidentified, the 3 by 5 card should remain in file until the case is fully closed, inasmuch as more than one person may be involved in the crime. Of course, if all the latents are identified, then the 3 by 5 card is removed and placed with the negatives, lifts, etc.[Pg 197]

Should some latent prints be identified while others in the same case are still unknown, the 3 by 5 card should be kept on file until the case is completely closed, since more than one person might be involved in the crime. Of course, if all the latent prints are identified, then the 3 by 5 card is removed and stored with the negatives, lifts, etc.[Pg 197]

It may be deemed advisable to remove these latents from the file in instances where the statute of limitations covering the crime has run.

It might be wise to delete these records from the file in cases where the statute of limitations for the crime has expired.

If the above procedure is rigidly followed, identification in many instances will result—more than would be effected if the department maintained only a single fingerprint file in which the latent prints were merely filed away. Very often such a latent fingerprint file is a source of information when all logical investigative leads have been exhausted.

If the steps outlined above are strictly followed, identification in many cases will be achieved—more than what would happen if the department only kept one fingerprint file where the latent prints were just stored away. Often, this kind of latent fingerprint file serves as a valuable source of information when all logical investigative leads have been used up.


This résumé of latent impressions has been prepared by the Federal Bureau of Investigation in the belief that it may be of possible interest to law enforcement officers desiring to avail themselves of latent identification evidence in connection with their investigative activities. It should be borne in mind that the comments and expressions set out in this book are not intended to convey the thought that the Federal Bureau of Investigation believes the points emphasized are the only ones of moment, or that other methods of developing latent impressions are not equally acceptable. The Federal Bureau of Investigation will be glad to answer any questions on the foregoing which may occur to any law enforcement officer who reads this material.

This summary of latent impressions has been prepared by the Federal Bureau of Investigation with the hope that it might be of interest to law enforcement officers looking to utilize latent identification evidence in their investigations. It's important to remember that the comments and opinions presented in this book are not meant to suggest that the Federal Bureau of Investigation thinks the highlighted points are the only significant ones, or that other methods of developing latent impressions are any less valid. The Federal Bureau of Investigation is happy to answer any questions that any law enforcement officer reading this material may have.




        
        
    
Download ePUB

If you like this ebook, consider a donation!